WO2017170339A1 - Composition, film, optical filter, laminate, solid-state imaging element, image display device and infrared sensor - Google Patents

Composition, film, optical filter, laminate, solid-state imaging element, image display device and infrared sensor Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017170339A1
WO2017170339A1 PCT/JP2017/012275 JP2017012275W WO2017170339A1 WO 2017170339 A1 WO2017170339 A1 WO 2017170339A1 JP 2017012275 W JP2017012275 W JP 2017012275W WO 2017170339 A1 WO2017170339 A1 WO 2017170339A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
ring
compound
film
infrared
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2017/012275
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
峻輔 北島
佐々木 大輔
和也 尾田
崇一郎 長田
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2018509312A priority Critical patent/JP6705891B2/en
Publication of WO2017170339A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017170339A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/22Absorbing filters
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • B32B27/18Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin characterised by the use of special additives
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F2/00Processes of polymerisation
    • C08F2/46Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation
    • C08F2/48Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation by ultraviolet or visible light
    • C08F2/50Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation by ultraviolet or visible light with sensitising agents
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09KMATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
    • C09K3/00Materials not provided for elsewhere
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L27/00Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate
    • H01L27/14Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B33/00Electroluminescent light sources
    • H05B33/12Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a composition, a film, an optical filter, a laminate, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and an infrared sensor.
  • Films such as color filters and near-infrared cut filters have been manufactured using compositions containing color materials such as pigments and dyes.
  • compositions using dyes have the advantage of reducing the time and effort for producing the composition.
  • Patent Document 1 describes that a color filter is produced using a coloring composition containing a phthalocyanine compound having high solubility in an organic solvent and a compound having a pyridine ring substituted with a carboxyl group.
  • a phthalocyanine compound having a predetermined substituent also referred to as a specific phthalocyanine compound
  • a compound having a pyridine ring substituted with a carboxyl group specifically pyridine compound
  • an optical filter such as a near-infrared cut filter using a composition containing a near-infrared absorbing compound having an absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm.
  • an optical filter further improvement in near-infrared spectrum such as light shielding property in the near-infrared region has been desired in recent years.
  • One method for improving the near-infrared spectrum of an optical filter is to increase the concentration of a near-infrared absorbing compound in the film.
  • the near-infrared absorbing compound tends to aggregate when the film is formed. Further, as the concentration of the near-infrared absorbing compound was increased, the near-infrared absorbing compound tended to aggregate more easily during film formation.
  • the aggregates of the near-infrared absorbing compounds present in the film dissolve in the developer or the like during pattern formation when the film is patterned. Peeling or the like is likely to occur, and there is a possibility that a hole having the size of the aggregate of the near infrared ray absorbing compound may be formed at a location where the aggregate of the near infrared ray absorbing compound was present.
  • Patent Document 1 is an application intended to produce a color filter using a colored composition containing a phthalocyanine compound, and there is no description or suggestion of a near-infrared absorbing compound.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a composition, a film, an optical filter, a laminate, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device that are capable of producing a film that is excellent in near-infrared spectroscopy and in which aggregation of near-infrared absorbing compounds is suppressed. And providing an infrared sensor.
  • the present inventor has conducted intensive studies on a near-infrared absorbing compound having a ⁇ -conjugated plane including a monocyclic or condensed aromatic ring and having an absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm.
  • a near-infrared absorbing compound having a ⁇ -conjugated plane including a monocyclic or condensed aromatic ring and having an absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm.
  • a composition comprising an aggregation inhibitor having at least one ring selected from an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and a heterocyclic ring and having no absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm.
  • the aggregation inhibitor includes at least one ring selected from a benzene ring, a condensed ring including a benzene ring, and a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring.
  • the aggregation inhibitor is a benzene ring, naphthalene ring, pyridine ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, imidazole ring, benzimidazole ring, pyrazole ring, thiazole ring, benzothiazole ring, triazole ring, benzotriazole ring, oxazole ring, Includes at least one ring selected from a benzoxazole ring, imidazoline ring, pyrazine ring, quinoxaline ring, pyrimidine ring, quinazoline ring, pyridazine ring, triazine ring, pyrrole ring, indole ring, isoindole ring, fluorene ring and carbazole ring ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2>.
  • ⁇ 4> The composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, wherein the ⁇ -conjugated plane of the near-infrared absorbing compound includes two or more monocyclic or condensed aromatic rings.
  • ⁇ 5> The composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, wherein the near-infrared absorbing compound is at least one selected from a pyrrolopyrrole compound, a cyanine compound, and a squarylium compound.
  • ⁇ 6> The composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, further comprising a resin.
  • composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6> further comprising a polymerizable compound and a photopolymerization initiator.
  • composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7> further comprising a colorant that transmits at least part of light in the near infrared region and shields light in the visible region.
  • ⁇ 9> A film using the composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8>.
  • ⁇ 10> An optical filter having the film according to ⁇ 9>.
  • the optical filter according to ⁇ 10>, wherein the optical filter is a near-infrared cut filter or an infrared transmission filter.
  • ⁇ 12> A pixel of the film according to ⁇ 9>, The optical filter according to ⁇ 10> or ⁇ 11>, having at least one pixel selected from red, green, blue, magenta, yellow, cyan, black, and colorless.
  • ⁇ 13> A laminate having the film according to ⁇ 9> and a color filter containing a chromatic colorant.
  • ⁇ 14> A solid-state imaging device having the film according to ⁇ 9>.
  • ⁇ 15> An image display device having the film according to ⁇ 9>.
  • ⁇ 16> An infrared sensor having the film according to ⁇ 9>.
  • a composition, a film, an optical filter, a laminate, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and an infrared ray that are capable of producing a film excellent in near-infrared spectroscopy and suppressed from aggregation of near-infrared absorbing compounds. It became possible to provide a sensor.
  • a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • the notation in which neither substitution nor substitution is described includes a group (atomic group) having a substituent together with a group (atomic group) having no substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • exposure includes not only exposure using light, but also drawing using particle beams such as an electron beam and an ion beam, unless otherwise specified.
  • the light used for exposure generally includes active rays or radiation such as an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
  • active rays or radiation such as an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
  • (meth) acrylate” represents acrylate and methacrylate
  • (meth) acryl” represents acryl and methacryl
  • (meth) allyl” represents allyl and methallyl
  • (meth) ) "Acryloyl” represents acryloyl and methacryloyl.
  • a weight average molecular weight and a number average molecular weight are defined as a polystyrene conversion value measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • near-infrared light refers to light (electromagnetic wave) having a maximum absorption wavelength region of 700 to 2,500 nm.
  • the term “process” not only indicates an independent process, but also if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes, include.
  • a dye means a compound that dissolves in a solvent.
  • the dye used in the present invention has a solubility in 100 g of at least one solvent selected from cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate at 23 ° C., preferably 1 g or more. Is more preferably 5 g or more.
  • the pigment means a compound that is difficult to dissolve in a solvent.
  • the pigment preferably has a solubility in 100 g of any of cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate at 23 ° C. of 0.1 g or less, more preferably 0.01 g or less. preferable.
  • the composition of the present invention comprises: A near-infrared absorbing compound having a ⁇ -conjugated plane containing a monocyclic or condensed aromatic ring and having an absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm; And an aggregation inhibitor having at least one ring selected from an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and a heterocyclic ring and having no absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm. According to the composition of the present invention, it is possible to produce a film that is excellent in near-infrared spectrum and in which aggregation of the near-infrared absorbing compound is suppressed.
  • membrane with which aggregation of the near-infrared absorption compound was suppressed can be manufactured effectively, raising the density
  • the above-described interaction suppresses the association property of the J-aggregate of the near-infrared absorbing compound in the film, while appropriately maintaining the J-association property of the near-infrared absorbing compound, thereby reducing the aggregate size of the near-infrared absorbing compound. This is presumed to be due to the small size. Therefore, by using the composition of the present invention, it is possible to produce a film that is excellent in near-infrared spectrum and in which aggregation of near-infrared absorbing compounds is suppressed.
  • each component of the composition of the present invention will be described.
  • the composition of the present invention includes a near-infrared absorbing compound having a ⁇ -conjugated plane including a monocyclic or condensed aromatic ring and having an absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm.
  • the aromatic ring includes an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocyclic ring.
  • the near-infrared absorbing compound may be a pigment or a dye, but is preferably a dye. In the case where a dye type near-infrared absorbing compound is used, the effect of the present invention is particularly remarkably obtained.
  • the aromatic ring of the near-infrared absorbing compound includes a benzene ring, naphthalene ring, pentalene ring, indene ring, azulene ring, heptalene ring, indacene ring, perylene ring, pentacene ring, quaterylene ring, acenaphthene ring, phenanthrene.
  • the ⁇ -conjugated plane of the near-infrared absorbing compound preferably contains 2 or more monocyclic or condensed aromatic rings, more preferably 3 or more, further preferably 4 or more, and more preferably 5 or more. It is particularly preferable to include it.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100 or less, more preferably 50 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of the near-infrared absorbing compound is preferably in the range of 660 to 1,000 nm, more preferably in the range of 670 to 1,000 nm, and in the range of 700 to 1,000 nm. More preferably.
  • “having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm” means the maximum absorbance in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm in the absorption spectrum of the near-infrared absorbing compound solution. It means that it has the wavelength which shows.
  • the measurement solvent used for measuring the absorption spectrum of the near-infrared absorbing compound solution include chloroform, methanol, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl acetate, and tetrahydrofuran.
  • chloroform is used as a measurement solvent.
  • methanol For compounds that do not dissolve in chloroform, use methanol.
  • dimethyl sulfoxide is used when it does not dissolve in either chloroform or methanol.
  • the ratio A1 / A2 between the absorbance A1 at a wavelength of 500 nm and the absorbance A2 at the maximum absorption wavelength is preferably 0.08 or less, more preferably 0.04 or less. preferable. According to this aspect, it is easy to produce a film having excellent visible transparency and infrared shielding properties from the composition of the present invention.
  • the absorbance A1 at a wavelength of 500 nm and the absorbance A2 at the maximum absorption wavelength are values obtained from an absorption spectrum of a near-infrared absorbing compound solution.
  • the waveform of the absorption spectrum of the film is wider than when one kind of near-infrared absorbing compound is used, and near-infrared rays in a wide wavelength range can be shielded.
  • the first near-infrared absorbing compound having the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm, and the maximum absorption wavelength of the first near-infrared absorbing compound At least a second near-infrared absorbing compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength range of 650 to 1000 nm, the maximum absorption wavelength of the first near-infrared absorption compound, and the second near-infrared absorption
  • the difference from the maximum absorption wavelength of the compound is preferably 1 to 150 nm.
  • the near-infrared absorbing compound is a pyrrolopyrrole compound, cyanine compound, squarylium compound, phthalocyanine compound, naphthalocyanine compound, quaterylene compound, merocyanine compound, croconium compound, oxonol compound, diimonium compound, dithiol compound, triarylmethane compound, At least one selected from a pyromethene compound, an azomethine compound, an anthraquinone compound and a dibenzofuranone compound is preferable, and at least one selected from a pyrrolopyrrole compound, a cyanine compound, a squarylium compound, a phthalocyanine compound, a naphthalocyanine compound and a quaterrylene compound is more preferable.
  • At least one selected from a pyrrolopyrrole compound, a cyanine compound, and a squarylium compound but more preferably, pyrrolo-pyrrole compounds are particularly preferred.
  • the pyrrolopyrrole compound include compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0016 to 0058 of JP-A-2009-263614.
  • the phthalocyanine compound include oxytitanium phthalocyanine pigments.
  • the phthalocyanine compound, naphthalocyanine compound, imonium compound, cyanine compound, squarylium compound, and croconium compound the compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0010 to 0081 of JP 2010-1111750 A may be used. Incorporated into.
  • cyanine compound for example, “functional pigment, Nobu Okawara / Ken Matsuoka / Kojiro Kitao / Kensuke Hirashima, Kodansha Scientific”, the contents of which are incorporated herein. .
  • pyrrolopyrrole compound As the pyrrolopyrrole compound used as the near-infrared absorbing compound, a compound represented by the following formula (I) is preferable.
  • a 1 and A 2 each independently represent a heteroaryl group
  • B 1 and B 2 each independently represent a —BR 1 R 2 group
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a substituent
  • R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring
  • C 1 and C 2 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group
  • D 1 and D 2 each independently represent a substituent.
  • a 1 and A 2 each independently represents a heteroaryl group.
  • a 1 and A 2 may be the same group or different groups.
  • a 1 and A 2 are preferably the same group.
  • the heteroaryl group is preferably a single ring or a condensed ring, more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having a condensation number of 2 to 8, more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having a condensation number of 2 to 4. .
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the hetero atom constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, still more preferably 3 to 12, and particularly preferably 3 to 10.
  • the heteroaryl group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the heteroaryl group is preferably a group represented by the following formula (A-1) and a group represented by the following formula (A-2).
  • X 1 each independently represents O, S, NR X1 or CR X2 R X3 , R X1 to R X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 1 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 3 and R 4 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • * Represents a bonding position with the formula (I).
  • the substituents represented by R 3 , R 4 and R X1 to R X3 are alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, heteroaryloxy groups, acyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, aryls.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the groups described above, and examples thereof include a halogen atom and an aryl group.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
  • substituent include the groups described above, and examples include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.
  • halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • the ring formed by combining R 3 and R 4 is preferably an aromatic ring.
  • the group represented by the formula (A-1) is a group represented by the formula (A-1-1) or a group represented by the formula (A-1-2).
  • each of X 1 independently represents O, S, NR X1 or CR X2 R X3
  • each of R X1 to R X3 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R 101 to R 109 represent Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • * represents a bonding position with the formula (I).
  • Y 1 to Y 4 each independently represent N or CR Y1 , at least two of Y 1 to Y 4 are CR Y1 , and R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent And adjacent R Y1 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • * Represents a bonding position with the formula (I).
  • the substituent represented by R Y1 include the substituents described above, and an alkyl group, an aryl group, and a halogen atom are preferable.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
  • Examples of the substituent include the substituents described above, and examples thereof include a halogen atom and an aryl group.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
  • Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents, and examples thereof include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.
  • Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • At least two of Y 1 to Y 4 are CR Y1 , and adjacent R Y1 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the ring formed by combining adjacent R Y1 is preferably an aromatic ring.
  • examples of the group represented by the formula (A-2) include groups represented by the formulas (A-2-1) to (A-2-5).
  • R 201 to R 227 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and * represents a bonding position with the formula (I).
  • a 1 and A 2 include the following.
  • Bu represents a butyl group.
  • B 1 and B 2 each independently represent a —BR 1 R 2 group, and R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a substituent.
  • R 1 and R 2 may combine with each other to form a ring.
  • substituent include the groups described above for A 1 and A 2.
  • a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group is preferable, and a halogen atom, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group is preferable.
  • R 1 and R 2 may be the same group or different groups.
  • R 1 and R 2 are preferably the same group.
  • B 1 and B 2 may be the same group or different groups.
  • B 1 and B 2 are preferably the same group.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 40 carbon atoms.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30 or less, and further preferably 25 or less.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched.
  • the alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 40 carbon atoms.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3 or more, more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and particularly preferably 10 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less.
  • the alkenyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the alkoxy group preferably has 1 to 40 carbon atoms.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30 or less, and further preferably 25 or less.
  • the alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, and a halogen atom.
  • the heteroaryl group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the hetero atom constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, still more preferably 3 to 12, and particularly preferably 3 to 5.
  • the heteroaryl group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the heteroaryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, and a halogen atom.
  • R 1 and R 2 of the —BR 1 R 2 group may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • Examples thereof include the structures shown in the following (B-1) to (B-4).
  • R represents a substituent
  • R a1 to R a4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • m1 to m3 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 4
  • * represents a formula This represents the binding position with (I).
  • Examples of the substituent represented by R and R a1 to R a4 include the substituents described for R 1 and R 2 , and a halogen atom and an alkyl group are preferable.
  • B 1 and B 2 include the following.
  • Me represents a methyl group and Bu represents a butyl group.
  • C 1 and C 2 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group.
  • C 1 and C 2 may be the same group or different groups.
  • C 1 and C 2 are preferably the same group.
  • C 1 and C 2 are each independently preferably an aryl group or a heteroaryl group, and more preferably an aryl group.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 25 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, particularly preferably branched.
  • the aryl group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is particularly preferred.
  • the heteroaryl group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the hetero atom constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, and still more preferably 3 to 12.
  • the alkyl group, aryl group, and heteroaryl group described above may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. It preferably has a substituent.
  • substituents include a hydrocarbon group which may contain an oxygen atom, an amino group, an acylamino group, an alkoxycarbonylamino group, an aryloxycarbonylamino group, a heteroaryloxycarbonylamino group, a sulfonylamino group, a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkylthio group.
  • arylthio group, heteroarylthio group alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, heteroarylsulfonyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, heteroarylsulfinyl group, ureido group, phosphoric acid amide group, mercapto group, sulfo group, Examples thereof include a carboxyl group, a nitro group, a hydroxamic acid group, a sulfino group, a hydrazino group, an imino group, a silyl group, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, and a cyano group.
  • halogen atom examples include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • hydrocarbon group examples include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, and an aryl group.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 40 carbon atoms.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3 or more, further preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and particularly preferably 10 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, particularly preferably branched.
  • the branched alkyl group preferably has 3 to 40 carbon atoms.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and still more preferably 10 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less.
  • the number of branches of the branched alkyl group is preferably 2 to 10, for example, and more preferably 2 to 8.
  • the alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 40 carbon atoms.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3 or more, more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and particularly preferably 10 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less.
  • the alkenyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, particularly preferably branched.
  • the branched alkenyl group preferably has 3 to 40 carbon atoms.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and still more preferably 10 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less.
  • the number of branches of the branched alkenyl group is preferably 2 to 10, and more preferably 2 to 8.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the hydrocarbon group containing an oxygen atom include a group represented by -LR x1 .
  • L represents —O—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, — (OR x2 ) m — or — (R x2 O) m —.
  • R x1 represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, or an aryl group.
  • R x2 represents an alkylene group or an arylene group.
  • m represents an integer of 2 or more, and the m R x2 may be the same or different.
  • L is preferably —O—, — (OR x2 ) m — or — (R x2 O) m —, more preferably —O—.
  • R x1 is preferably an alkyl group or an alkenyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group.
  • the alkylene group represented by R x2 preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the arylene group represented by R x2 is preferably 6 to 20, and more preferably 6 to 12.
  • R x2 is preferably an alkylene group.
  • m represents an integer of 2 or more, preferably 2 to 20, and more preferably 2 to 10.
  • the substituent which the alkyl group, aryl group and heteroaryl group may have is preferably a group having a branched alkyl structure.
  • the substituent is preferably a hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom, and more preferably a hydrocarbon group containing an oxygen atom.
  • the hydrocarbon group containing an oxygen atom is preferably a group represented by —O—R x1 .
  • R x1 is preferably an alkyl group or an alkenyl group, more preferably an alkyl group, and particularly preferably a branched alkyl group. That is, the substituent is more preferably an alkoxy group, and particularly preferably a branched alkoxy group.
  • the alkoxy group preferably has 1 to 40 carbon atoms.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3 or more, more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and particularly preferably 10 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less.
  • the alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, particularly preferably branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the branched alkoxy group is preferably 3 to 40.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and still more preferably 10 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less.
  • the number of branched alkoxy groups is preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 8.
  • C 1 and C 2 include the following.
  • Me represents a methyl group and Bu represents a butyl group.
  • D 1 and D 2 each independently represent a substituent.
  • D 1 and D 2 may be the same group or different groups.
  • D 1 and D 2 are preferably the same group.
  • the substituent include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heteroaryloxycarbonyl group, Acyloxy group, amino group, acylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, heteroaryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfonylamino group, sulfamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heteroarylthio group, alkylsulfonyl Group, arylsulfonyl group, heteroaryl
  • a substituent having a positive Hammett constant ⁇ p value acts as an electron-attracting group.
  • a substituent having a Hammett's ⁇ p value of 0.2 or more can be exemplified as an electron withdrawing group.
  • the ⁇ p value of the substituent is preferably 0.25 or more, more preferably 0.3 or more, and particularly preferably 0.35 or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.80 or less.
  • the electron withdrawing group include a cyano group (0.66), a carboxyl group (—COOH: 0.45), an alkoxycarbonyl group (for example, —COOMe: 0.45), an aryloxycarbonyl group (for example, , —COOPh: 0.44), a carbamoyl group (eg, —CONH 2 : 0.36), an alkylcarbonyl group (eg, —COMe: 0.50), an arylcarbonyl group (eg, —COPh: 0.43) An alkylsulfonyl group (for example, —SO 2 Me: 0.72), an arylsulfonyl group (for example, —SO 2 Ph: 0.68), and the like.
  • a cyano group 0.66
  • a carboxyl group —COOH: 0.45
  • an alkoxycarbonyl group for example, —COOMe: 0.45
  • an aryloxycarbonyl group for example, ,
  • a cyano group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group and an arylsulfonyl group are preferred, and a cyano group is more preferred.
  • Me represents a methyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group
  • the numerical values in parentheses are ⁇ p values.
  • Hammett's ⁇ p value paragraph numbers 0024 to 0025 of JP-A-2009-263614 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • D 1 and D 2 include the following.
  • the pyrrolopyrrole compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (II) or a compound represented by the following formula (III). According to this aspect, it is easy to form a pattern having excellent infrared shielding properties and light resistance.
  • X 1 and X 2 each independently represent O, S, NR X1 or CR X2 R X3 , R X1 to R X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 3 to R 6 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 3 and R 4 , or R 5 and R 6 may combine with each other to form a ring, B 1 and B 2 each independently represent a —BR 1 R 2 group, R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • C 1 and C 2 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group
  • D 1 and D 2 each independently represent a substituent.
  • B 1, B 2, C 1 , C 2, D 1 and D 2 of formula (II) has the same meaning as B 1, B 2, C 1 , C 2, D 1 and D 2 of formula (I)
  • the preferable range is also the same.
  • X 1 , X 2 and R 3 to R 6 in formula (II) have the same meanings as X 1 , R 3 and R 4 in formula (A-1) described above, and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • Y 1 to Y 8 each independently represent N or CR Y1 , at least two of Y 1 to Y 4 are CR Y1 , and at least two of Y 5 to Y 8 are CR Y 1 , R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and adjacent R Y1 may be bonded to each other to form a ring; B 1 and B 2 each independently represent a —BR 1 R 2 group, R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • C 1 and C 2 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, D 1 and D 2 each independently represent a substituent.
  • B 1, B 2, C 1 , C 2, D 1 and D 2 of formula (III) has the same meaning as B 1, B 2, C 1 , C 2, D 1 and D 2 of formula (I)
  • the preferable range is also the same.
  • Y 1 to Y 8 in the formula (III) have the same meanings as Y 1 to Y 4 in the formula (A-2) described above, and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • pyrrolopyrrole compound examples include the following compounds.
  • Ph represents a phenyl group
  • Me represents a methyl group
  • Bu represents a butyl group.
  • Specific examples of the pyrrolopyrrole compound include the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0049 to 0058 of JP-A-2009-263614, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the squarylium compound used as the near-infrared absorbing compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (1).
  • a 1 and A 2 each independently represent an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, or a group represented by the following formula (2);
  • Z 1 represents a nonmetallic atomic group forming a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring,
  • R 2 represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group or an aralkyl group, d represents 0 or 1
  • a wavy line represents Represents a connecting hand with the formula (1).
  • a 1 and A 2 in Formula (1) each independently represent an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, or a group represented by Formula (2), and a group represented by Formula (2) is preferable.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the aryl group represented by A 1 and A 2 is preferably 6 to 48, more preferably 6 to 24, and even more preferably 6 to 12. Specific examples include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group.
  • the heteroaryl group represented by A 1 and A 2 is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the heteroaryl group is preferably a single ring or a condensed ring, more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 8 condensations, still more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 4 condensations, a single ring or A condensed ring having a condensation number of 2 or 3 is particularly preferred.
  • a hetero atom contained in a heterocyclic group a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom are illustrated, and a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom are preferable.
  • the number of heteroatoms is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 to 2.
  • Specific examples include a heteroaryl group derived from a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic ring such as a 5-membered or 6-membered ring containing at least one of a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom.
  • the aryl group and heteroaryl group may have a substituent.
  • the aryl group and heteroaryl group may have two or more substituents, the plurality of substituents may be the same or different.
  • substituents include a halogen atom, cyano group, nitro group, alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aryl group, heteroaryl group, aralkyl group, —OR 10 , —COR 11 , —COOR 12 , —OCOR 13 , — NR 14 R 15 , —NHCOR 16 , —CONR 17 R 18 , —NHCONR 19 R 20 , —NHCOOR 21 , —SR 22 , —SO 2 R 23 , —SO 2 OR 24 , —NHSO 2 R 25 , and —SO 2 NR 26 R 27 is exemplified.
  • R 10 to R 27 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, or an aralkyl group.
  • R 12 of —COOR 12 is hydrogen (that is, a carboxyl group)
  • the hydrogen atom may be dissociated or may be in a salt state.
  • R 24 of —SO 2 OR 24 is a hydrogen atom (that is, a sulfo group)
  • the hydrogen atom may be dissociated or may be in a salt state.
  • halogen atom examples include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched.
  • the alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkenyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched.
  • the alkynyl group preferably has 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 2 to 25 carbon atoms.
  • the alkynyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl part of the aralkyl group is the same as the above alkyl group.
  • the aryl part of the aralkyl group is the same as the above aryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aralkyl group is preferably 7 to 40, more preferably 7 to 30, and still more preferably 7 to 25.
  • the heteroaryl group is preferably a single ring or a condensed ring, more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 8 condensations, and further preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 4 condensations.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the hetero atom constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • the heteroaryl group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, and still more preferably 3 to 12.
  • alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aralkyl group, aryl group and heteroaryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
  • substituents include the above-described substituents.
  • R 2 represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group or an aralkyl group, and an alkyl group is preferable.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, still more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group and the alkenyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and are preferably linear or branched.
  • the aralkyl group preferably has 7 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 7 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the nitrogen-containing heterocycle formed by Z 1 is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the nitrogen-containing heterocycle is preferably a single ring or a condensed ring, more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 8 condensations, more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 4 condensations, Is particularly preferably a fused ring of 2 or 3.
  • the nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring may contain a sulfur atom in addition to the nitrogen atom.
  • the nitrogen-containing heterocycle may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
  • a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an amino group, and an acylamino group are preferable, and a halogen atom and an alkyl group are more preferable.
  • the halogen atom is preferably a chlorine atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group is preferably linear or branched.
  • the group represented by the formula (2) is preferably a group represented by the following formula (3) or the formula (4).
  • R 11 represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group or an aralkyl group
  • R 12 represents a substituent
  • m is 2 or more, R 12 are linked to each other.
  • a ring may form
  • X represents a nitrogen atom or CR 13 R 14
  • R 13 and R 14 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • m is an integer of 0 to 4
  • a wavy line represents a connecting hand with the formula (1).
  • R 11 in formulas (3) and (4) has the same meaning as R 2 in formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • R 12 in the formulas (3) and (4) represents a substituent.
  • the substituent include the substituent described in the above formula (1).
  • a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an amino group, and an acylamino group are preferable, and a halogen atom and an alkyl group are more preferable.
  • the halogen atom is preferably a chlorine atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group is preferably linear or branched.
  • R 12 may be linked to form a ring.
  • the ring include an alicyclic ring (non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring), an aromatic ring, and a heterocyclic ring.
  • the ring may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • the linking group includes —CO—, —O—, —NH—, a divalent aliphatic group, a divalent aromatic group, and a divalent unsaturated chain.
  • R 12 are connected to each other to form a benzene ring.
  • X in Formula (3) represents a nitrogen atom or CR 13 R 14 , and R 13 and R 14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • substituent include the substituent described in the above formula (1).
  • an alkyl group etc. are mentioned.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, particularly preferably 1 to 3, and most preferably 1.
  • the alkyl group is preferably linear or branched, and particularly preferably linear.
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 to 2.
  • the squarylium compound used as the near-infrared absorbing compound in the present invention is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (5).
  • Ring A and Ring B each independently represent an aromatic ring or a heteroaromatic ring
  • X A and X B each independently represent a substituent
  • G A and G B independently represents a substituent
  • kA represents an integer of 0 to n A
  • kB represents an integer of 0 to n B
  • n A and n B each represent the largest integer that can be substituted for ring A or ring B
  • X A and G A, X B and G B may combine with each other to form a ring, if G A and G B are present in plural may be bonded to form a ring structure .
  • G A and G B independently represents a substituent.
  • substituents include the substituent described in the above formula (1).
  • X A and X B each independently represent a substituent.
  • substituents include the substituent described in the above formula (1), and a group having active hydrogen is preferable.
  • —OH, —SH, —COOH, —SO 3 H, —NR X1 R X2 , —NHCOR X1 , —CONR X1 R X2 , —NHCONR X1 R X2 , —NHCOOR X1 , —NHSO 2 R X1 , —B (OH) 2 and —PO (OH) 2 are more preferable, —OH, —SH and —NR X1 R X2 is more preferable.
  • R X1 and R X1 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • substituents include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, and a heteroaryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable.
  • the alkyl group is preferably linear or branched. The details of the alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aryl group, and heteroaryl group are the same as those described in the above-mentioned substituent column.
  • Ring A and ring B each independently represent an aromatic ring or a heteroaromatic ring.
  • the aromatic ring and heteroaromatic ring may be a single ring or a condensed ring.
  • Specific examples of the aromatic ring and heteroaromatic ring include benzene ring, naphthalene ring, pentalene ring, indene ring, azulene ring, heptalene ring, indacene ring, perylene ring, pentacene ring, acenaphthene ring, phenanthrene ring, anthracene ring, Naphthacene ring, chrysene ring, triphenylene ring, fluorene ring, pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyr
  • X A and G A, X B and G B may combine with each other to form a ring, if G A and G B are present in plural may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the ring is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the ring may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • X A and G A, X B and G B, when forming a G A or between G B are bonded to each other rings, may be they are attached directly to form a ring, an alkylene group, -CO-,
  • a ring may be formed by bonding via a divalent linking group which is —O—, —NH—, —BR—, or a combination thereof.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • substituents include the substituent described in the above formula (1), and an alkyl group or an aryl group is preferable.
  • kA represents an integer of 0 to nA
  • kB represents an integer of 0 to nB
  • nA represents the largest integer that can be substituted on the A ring
  • nB represents the largest integer that can be substituted on the B ring.
  • kA and kB are each independently preferably 0 to 4, more preferably 0 to 2, and particularly preferably 0 to 1.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a substituent
  • R 3 and R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • X 1 and X 2 each independently represent —O— or —N (R 5 ) —
  • R 5 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group
  • Y 1 to Y 4 each independently represent a substituent
  • Y 3 and Y 4 may be bonded to each other to form a ring
  • Y 1 to Y 4 may be bonded to each other to form a ring when there are a plurality of Y 1 to Y 4 .
  • p and s each independently represent an integer of 0 to 3
  • q and r each independently represents an integer of 0 to 2.
  • R 1 , R 2 , Y 1 to Y 4 examples include the substituents described in the above-described formula (1).
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group or an ethyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and particularly preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • X 1 and X 2 each independently represents —O— or —N (R 5 ) —.
  • X 1 and X 2 may be the same or different, but are preferably the same.
  • R 5 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group.
  • R 5 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the alkyl group, aryl group and heteroaryl group represented by R 5 may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent described in the above formula (1).
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 4, and particularly preferably 1 to 2.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the heteroaryl group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the hetero atom constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, and still more preferably 3 to 12.
  • squarylium compound examples include the following compounds. Further, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0044 to 0049 of JP 2011-208101 A can be mentioned, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the cyanine compound used as the near-infrared absorbing compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (C).
  • Formula (C) In formula (C), Z 1 and Z 2 are each independently a nonmetallic atomic group that forms a 5-membered or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocycle that may be condensed, R 101 and R 102 each independently represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aralkyl group or an aryl group, L 1 represents a methine chain having an odd number of methine groups, a and b are each independently 0 or 1, When a is 0, a carbon atom and a nitrogen atom are bonded by a double bond, and when b is 0, a carbon atom and a nitrogen atom are bonded by a single bond, When the site represented by Cy in the formula is a cation moiety, X 1 represents an anion, c represents a number necessary for bala
  • Z 1 and Z 2 each independently represent a nonmetallic atomic group that forms a 5-membered or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring that may be condensed.
  • the nitrogen-containing heterocycle may be condensed with another heterocycle, aromatic ring or aliphatic ring.
  • the nitrogen-containing heterocycle is preferably a 5-membered ring.
  • a structure in which a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring is condensed to a 5-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring is more preferable.
  • nitrogen-containing heterocycle examples include an oxazole ring, an isoxazole ring, a benzoxazole ring, a naphthoxazole ring, an oxazolocarbazole ring, an oxazodibenzobenzofuran ring, a thiazole ring, a benzothiazole ring, a naphthothiazole ring, an indolenine ring, Examples include benzoindolenin ring, imidazole ring, benzimidazole ring, naphthimidazole ring, quinoline ring, pyridine ring, pyrrolopyridine ring, furopyrrole ring, indolizine ring, imidazoquinoxaline ring, quinoxaline ring, quinoline ring, indolenine ring Benzoindolenine ring, benzoxazole ring, benzothiazole ring and benzimi
  • R 101 and R 102 each independently represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aralkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkenyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the alkynyl group has preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkynyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 25 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent.
  • the alkyl part of the aralkyl group is the same as the above alkyl group.
  • the aryl part of the aralkyl group is the same as the above aryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aralkyl group is preferably 7 to 40, more preferably 7 to 30, and still more preferably 7 to 25.
  • the alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aralkyl group and aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, an alkoxy group, and an amino group.
  • a carboxyl group and a sulfo group are preferable, and a sulfo group is particularly preferable.
  • the carboxyl group and the sulfo group may have a hydrogen atom dissociated or a salt state.
  • L 1 represents a methine chain having an odd number of methine groups.
  • L 1 is preferably a methine chain having 3, 5, or 7 methine groups.
  • the methine group may have a substituent.
  • the methine group having a substituent is preferably a central (meso-position) methine group.
  • Specific examples of the substituent include a substituent that the nitrogen-containing heterocycle of Z 1 and Z 2 may have, a group represented by the following formula (a), and the like. Further, two substituents of the methine chain may be bonded to form a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • * represents a linkage with a methine chain
  • a 1 represents —O—.
  • a and b are each independently 0 or 1. When a is 0, the carbon atom and the nitrogen atom are bonded by a double bond, and when b is 0, the carbon atom and the nitrogen atom are bonded by a single bond. Both a and b are preferably 0. When a and b are both 0, the formula (C) is expressed as follows.
  • X 1 represents an anion
  • c represents a number necessary for balancing the charge.
  • anions include halide ions (Cl ⁇ , Br ⁇ , I ⁇ , etc.), paratoluenesulfonic acid ions, ethyl sulfate ions, PF 6 ⁇ , BF 4 ⁇ , ClO 4 ⁇ , tris (halogenoalkylsulfonyl) methide anions ( For example, (CF 3 SO 2 ) 3 C ⁇ ), di (halogenoalkylsulfonyl) imide anion (for example, (CF 3 SO 2 ) 2 N ⁇ ), tetracyanoborate anion and the like can be mentioned.
  • X 1 represents a cation
  • c represents a number necessary for balancing the charge.
  • the cation include alkali metal ions (Li + , Na + , K +, etc.), alkaline earth metal ions (Mg 2+ , Ca 2+ , Ba 2+ , Sr 2+, etc.), transition metal ions (Ag + , Fe 2+ , Co + 2+ , Ni 2+ , Cu 2+ , Zn 2+, etc.), other metal ions (such as Al 3+ ), ammonium ions, triethylammonium ions, tributylammonium ions, pyridinium ions, tetrabutylammonium ions, guanidinium ions, tetramethylguanidini.
  • the cyanine compound is also preferably a compound represented by the following formulas (C-1) to (C-3).
  • R 1A , R 2A , R 1B and R 2B each independently represent an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aralkyl group or an aryl group
  • L 1A and L 1B each independently represent a methine chain having an odd number of methine groups
  • Y 1 and Y 2 each independently represent —S—, —O—, —NR X1 — or —CR X2 R X3 —
  • R X1 , R X2 and R X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • V 1A , V 2A , V 1B and V 2B each independently represent a substituent
  • m1 and m2 each independently represents 0 to 4
  • X 1 represents an anion
  • c represents a number
  • R 1A , R 2A , R 1B and R 2B are synonymous with the alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aralkyl group and aryl group described for R 101 and R 102 in formula (C), and are preferably in a preferred range. Is the same. These groups may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, an alkoxy group, and an amino group. A carboxyl group and a sulfo group are preferable, and a sulfo group is particularly preferable.
  • the carboxyl group and the sulfo group may have a hydrogen atom dissociated or a salt state.
  • R 1A , R 2A , R 1B and R 2B represent an alkyl group, it is more preferably a linear alkyl group.
  • Y 1 and Y 2 are each independently, -S -, - O -, - NR X1 - or -CR X2 R X3 - represents, -NR X1 - is preferred.
  • R X1 , R X2 and R X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, preferably an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, particularly preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group is particularly preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group.
  • L 1A and L 1B have the same meaning as L 1 in formula (C), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • Examples of the substituent represented by V 1A , V 2A , V 1B, and V 2B include the substituents described above, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • m1 and m2 each independently represents 0 to 4, preferably 0 to 2.
  • the anion and cation represented by X 1 are synonymous with the range described for X 1 in formula (C), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • cyanine compound examples include the following compounds. Further, compounds described in JP-A-2015-172004 and JP-A-2015-172102 may be mentioned.
  • the content of the near-infrared absorbing compound is preferably 1 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, and more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the near-infrared absorbing compound may be only one type or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the composition of the present invention contains an aggregation inhibitor.
  • an aggregation inhibitor a compound having at least one ring selected from an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and a heterocyclic ring and having no absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm is used.
  • the aggregation inhibitor is preferably a compound that dissolves in a solvent.
  • the solubility in 100 g of at least one solvent selected from cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate at 23 ° C. is preferably 1 g or more, and more preferably 5 g or more.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring and the heterocyclic ring possessed by the aggregation inhibitor may be a single ring or a condensed ring.
  • the number of condensed rings is preferably 2 to 8, and more preferably 2 to 4.
  • the heterocycle possessed by the aggregation inhibitor is preferably a nitrogen-containing heterocycle.
  • the heterocyclic ring is preferably an aromatic heterocyclic ring.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic ring is preferably 1 to 3.
  • a kind of hetero atom which comprises the ring of a heterocyclic ring a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom are mentioned.
  • the heterocycle possessed by the aggregation inhibitor is preferably a nitrogen-containing heterocycle.
  • the heterocyclic ring which the aggregation inhibitor has is an aromatic heterocyclic ring.
  • the aggregation inhibitor preferably contains at least one ring selected from a benzene ring, a condensed ring containing a benzene ring, and a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, and includes a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, a pyridine ring, a quinoline ring, and an isoquinoline.
  • the ring of the aggregation inhibitor preferably has the same aromatic hydrocarbon ring or heterocyclic ring as the aromatic hydrocarbon ring or heterocyclic ring of the near-infrared absorbing compound. According to this aspect, the aggregation of the near-infrared absorbing compound can be effectively suppressed.
  • a compound having the above ring as the aggregation inhibitor is as follows.
  • a compound having at least one structure having a ⁇ - ⁇ interaction with the near infrared absorbing compound in the structure as an aggregation inhibitor, aggregation of the near infrared absorbing compound in the film can be suppressed, The aggregate size of the near-infrared absorbing compound can be reduced.
  • the pyrrolopyrrole compound mentioned above as a specific example of the near-infrared absorbing compound has an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and / or a heterocyclic ring and a pyrrolopyrrole skeleton in the ⁇ plane.
  • an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and / or a heterocyclic ring preferably a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring
  • the association of the near infrared absorbing compound can be effectively suppressed, and the aggregate size of the near infrared absorbing compound can be effectively suppressed.
  • the aggregation inhibitor is a compound represented by the following formula (b1-1), a compound having a partial structure represented by the following formula (b2-1), or a compound represented by the following formula (b3-1). It is preferably at least one selected from a compound having a partial structure and a compound having a partial structure represented by the following formula (b4-1).
  • B 1 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring
  • R b1 represents a substituent
  • m1 represents an integer of 0 to mA
  • mA can be substituted with B 1 Represents the maximum integer; when m1 is 2 or more, two or more R b1 may be the same or different.
  • * -B 2- (R b2 ) m2 (b2-1) In formula (b2-1), * represents a bond with another atom or atomic group constituting the compound, B 2 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring, and R b2 represents a substituent.
  • M2 represents an integer of 0 to mB, and mB represents the largest integer that can be substituted for B 2 ; when m2 is 2 or more, two or more R b2s may be the same or different May be.
  • * represents a bond with another atom or atomic group constituting the compound
  • B 3 and B 4 each independently represents an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring
  • R b3 and R b3 each independently represent a substituent
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • m3 represents an integer of 0 to mC
  • mC represents the largest integer that can be substituted for B 3
  • m4 is 0 to an integer of mD
  • mD represents the largest integer that can be replaced with B 4.
  • R b3 s When m3 is 2 or more, two or more R b3 s may be the same or different. When m4 is 2 or more, two or more Rb4s may be the same or different.
  • * 1 and * 2 represent a bond with another atom or atomic group constituting the compound
  • B 5 and B 6 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring
  • R b5 and R b6 each independently represent a substituent
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • m5 represents an integer of 0 to mE
  • mE represents the largest integer that can be substituted for B 5
  • m6 is 0 to an integer of mF
  • mF represents the largest integer that can be replaced by B 6.
  • m5 When m5 is 2 or more, two or more R b5 s may be the same or different.
  • two or more Rb6s may be the same or different.
  • R b1 to R b6 are alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, heteroaryloxy groups, acyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, aryloxycarbonyl groups, heteroaryls.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring or heterocyclic ring represented by B 1 to B 6 preferably includes at least one ring selected from a benzene ring, a condensed ring including a benzene ring, and a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, and includes a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring.
  • B 3 to B 6 are more preferably a benzene ring.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring or heterocyclic ring represented by B 1 to B 6 may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L 1 include an alkylene group, —CO—, —O—, —NH—, —OCO—, —COO—, and a group consisting of a combination thereof.
  • m1 is preferably an integer of 1 or more.
  • m1 is preferably an integer of 1 or more.
  • m3 and m4 are preferably integers of 1 or more.
  • m5 and m6 are preferably integers of 1 or more.
  • the compound having a partial structure represented by the formula (b2-1) includes (1) a compound in which a plurality of partial structures represented by the formula (b2-1) are bonded via a linking group; Examples thereof include compounds in which the partial structure represented by b2-1) is bonded to a repeating unit of the polymer through a single bond or a linking group.
  • the linking group includes 1 And groups consisting of ⁇ 100 carbon atoms, 0-10 nitrogen atoms, 0-50 oxygen atoms, 1-200 hydrogen atoms, and 0-20 sulfur atoms.
  • a group composed of a combination of two or more of the following structural units or the following structural units (which may form a ring structure) may be mentioned.
  • the polymer repeating unit includes: Examples thereof include a (meth) acrylic repeating unit and a vinylic repeating unit.
  • the (meth) acrylic repeating unit means a repeating unit derived from a compound having a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • the vinyl repeating unit means a repeating unit derived from a compound having a vinyl group.
  • polymer compound examples include compounds having the following repeating units.
  • R b100 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • L b1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • B 2 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring, R b2 represents a substituent, m 2 represents an integer of 0 to mB, and m B represents the largest integer that can be substituted for B 2 ; In the case of two or more, two or more R b2 may be the same or different.
  • B 2 , R b2 and m2 have the same meanings as B 2 , R b2 and m2 in (b2-1).
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R b100 in the above formula is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3, and still more preferably 1.
  • R b100 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • an alkylene group As the divalent linking group represented by L b1 in the above formula, an alkylene group, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —SO 2 —, —NR 10 — (R 10 Represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom), or a group consisting of a combination thereof.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. Further, the cyclic alkylene group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • the aggregation inhibitor may further include other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit having the partial structure represented by the formula (b2-1).
  • the other repeating unit include the repeating units described in the resin described later.
  • the aggregation inhibitor when the aggregation inhibitor is a polymer compound, the aggregation inhibitor preferably contains 5 to 100 mol% of repeating units having a partial structure represented by the formula (b2-1) based on the total repeating units of the polymer compound. More preferably, it is contained in an amount of ⁇ 100 mol%, more preferably 30-100 mol%.
  • the compound having the partial structure represented by the formula (b3-1) includes (1) a compound in which a plurality of partial structures represented by the formula (b3-1) are bonded via a linking group; Examples thereof include compounds in which the partial structure represented by b3-1) is bonded to a repeating unit of the polymer through a single bond or a linking group.
  • the linking group and the repeating unit of the polymer have the same meaning as described above.
  • the compound having a partial structure represented by the formula (b4-1) may have two or more partial structures represented by the formula (b4-1) in one molecule. That is, a compound having a structure in which a plurality of partial structures represented by the formula (b4-1) are bonded through a single bond or a linking group may be used. One of * 1 and * 2 may be bonded to the repeating unit of the polymer via a single bond or a linking group.
  • the aggregation inhibitor may be a compound having substantially no molecular weight distribution or a compound having a molecular weight distribution.
  • the aggregation inhibitor When a compound having substantially no molecular weight distribution is used as the aggregation inhibitor, the aggregation inhibitor tends to approach the near infrared absorbing compound, and the aggregation inhibitor and the near infrared absorbing compound interact effectively, Aggregation of the near infrared ray absorbing compound in the film can be effectively suppressed.
  • a compound having a molecular weight distribution when a compound having a molecular weight distribution is used as an aggregation inhibitor, sublimation of the aggregation inhibitor from the film due to heating during film formation can be suppressed, and aggregation of near-infrared absorbing compounds in the film is more effective. Can be suppressed.
  • the compound having a molecular weight distribution includes a compound having a repeating unit such as a polymer. Examples thereof include compounds having the repeating units represented by the above (b2-1-1) to (b2-1-3).
  • the compound having substantially no molecular weight distribution is preferably a compound having a dispersity (weight average molecular weight (Mw) / number average molecular weight (Mn)) of 1.00 to 2.00.
  • Mw weight average molecular weight
  • Mn number average molecular weight
  • the compound having substantially no molecular weight distribution is preferably a compound whose molecular weight can be calculated from the structural formula.
  • the molecular weight of the aggregation inhibitor is preferably 100 to 500.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 130 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 450 or less. If the molecular weight is in the above range, an effect of achieving both suppression of aggregation and suppression of sublimation by baking at high temperature can be expected.
  • the aggregation inhibitor is a compound having substantially no molecular weight distribution, it preferably has 1 to 10 rings in one molecule selected from aromatic hydrocarbon rings and heterocyclic rings. It is more preferably 1 to 8, more preferably 1 to 6, still more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the effect of the aggregation inhibitor is more prominent as the number of aromatic hydrocarbon rings and heterocyclic rings increases. Therefore, visible transparency may be reduced.
  • the number of rings is preferably in the above range (particularly 1 to 4) from the viewpoint of visible transparency and aggregation suppression.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the aggregation inhibitor is preferably 3,000 to 50,000.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 5,000 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 40,000 or less. If a weight average molecular weight is the said range, the effect that J association property and aggregation suppression can be made compatible can be anticipated.
  • the aggregation inhibitor is preferably a compound having a repeating unit.
  • the repeating unit described above is preferably a repeating unit having at least one ring selected from an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and a heterocyclic ring in the side chain, and has 1 to 10 rings in the side chain.
  • a repeating unit it is more preferably a repeating unit, more preferably a repeating unit having 1 to 8 rings in the side chain, and particularly preferably a repeating unit having 1 to 6 rings in the side chain.
  • the repeating unit having 1 to 4 rings in the side chain is most preferred.
  • the acid value of the aggregation inhibitor is preferably 100 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 80 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 50 mgKOH / g or less, and particularly preferably 10 mgKOH / g or less. According to this aspect, an effect of improving the developer resistance can be expected.
  • the aggregation inhibitor is preferably a compound having no carboxyl group. According to this aspect, it is possible to expect an effect that the developer resistance is improved.
  • the aggregation inhibitor is preferably a compound having no radical polymerizable group.
  • the radical polymerizable group include groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, such as a vinyl group, a styryl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • the aggregation inhibitor may further have an antioxidant function and / or a polymerization inhibition function.
  • aggregation inhibitor examples include the following compounds.
  • the content of the aggregation inhibitor is preferably 0.5 to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 10% by mass or less, and still more preferably 8% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • 1 to 200 parts by mass of an aggregation inhibitor is included with respect to 100 parts by mass of the near-infrared absorbing compound (when two or more near-infrared absorbing compounds are included, the total of two or more near-infrared absorbing compounds is 100 parts by mass). It is preferable.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 100 parts by mass or less, still more preferably 50 parts by mass or less, still more preferably 40 parts by mass or less, still more preferably 38 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 35 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 2 parts by mass or more, further preferably 3 parts by mass or more, still more preferably 4.5 parts by mass or more, still more preferably 5 parts by mass or more, and particularly preferably 10 parts by mass or more. If content of an aggregation inhibitor is more than said lower limit, aggregation of a near-infrared absorption compound can be suppressed effectively and coarsening of the aggregation size of a near-infrared absorption compound can be suppressed more effectively.
  • an aggregation inhibitor may be only one type or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the composition of the present invention can contain a chromatic colorant.
  • the chromatic colorant means a colorant other than the white colorant and the black colorant.
  • the chromatic colorant is preferably a colorant having absorption in a wavelength range of 400 nm or more and less than 650 nm.
  • the chromatic colorant may be a pigment or a dye.
  • the pigment is preferably an organic pigment, and examples thereof include the following.
  • the dye is not particularly limited, and a known dye can be used.
  • the chemical structure includes pyrazole azo, anilino azo, triphenylmethane, anthraquinone, anthrapyridone, benzylidene, oxonol, pyrazolotriazole azo, pyridone azo, cyanine, phenothiazine, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine, Xanthene, phthalocyanine, benzopyran, indigo, and pyromethene dyes can be used. Moreover, you may use the multimer of these dyes. Further, the dyes described in JP-A-2015-028144 and JP-A-2015-34966 can also be used.
  • the content of the chromatic colorant is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the composition, 15 A mass% or less is more preferable.
  • the lower limit may be 0.01% by mass or more, and may be 0.5% by mass or more.
  • the composition of this invention can also be made into the aspect which does not contain a chromatic color agent substantially.
  • the content of the chromatic colorant is preferably 0.005% by mass or less, and 0.001% by mass or less based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. More preferably, no chromatic colorant is contained.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain a colorant that transmits at least part of light in the near infrared region and shields light in the visible region (hereinafter also referred to as colorant that shields visible light). it can.
  • the colorant that blocks visible light preferably satisfies at least one of the following requirements (1) and (2), and more preferably satisfies the requirement (1).
  • Examples of the chromatic colorant include the chromatic colorants described above.
  • Examples of the organic black colorant include bisbenzofuranone compounds, azomethine compounds, perylene compounds, and azo compounds, and bisbenzofuranone compounds and perylene compounds are preferable.
  • Examples of the bisbenzofuranone compounds include compounds described in JP-T 2010-534726, JP-2012-515233, JP-2012-515234, and the like.
  • An example is “Irgaphor Black” manufactured by BASF.
  • Examples of perylene compounds include C.I. I. Pigment Black 31, 32 and the like.
  • Examples of the azomethine compound include compounds described in JP-A-1-170601 and JP-A-2-34664, and examples thereof include “Chromofine Black A1103” manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd.
  • the colorant that blocks visible light is, for example, a ratio between the minimum absorbance A in the wavelength range of 450 nm to less than 650 nm and the minimum absorbance B in the wavelength range of 900 to 1,300 nm. / B is preferably 4.5 or more.
  • the above characteristics may be satisfied with one kind of material, or may be satisfied with a combination of a plurality of materials.
  • the chromatic colorants are red colorants, green colorants, blue colorants, yellow colorants, purple colorants, and orange colorants. It is preferable that it is a coloring agent chosen from these. Examples of combinations of chromatic colorants include the following.
  • Embodiment containing yellow colorant, blue colorant, purple colorant and red colorant (2) Embodiment containing yellow colorant, blue colorant and red colorant (3) Yellow colorant, purple colorant And (4) an embodiment containing a yellow colorant and a purple colorant (5) an embodiment containing a green colorant, a blue colorant, a purple colorant and a red colorant (6) a purple colorant And an embodiment containing an orange colorant (7) an embodiment containing a green colorant, a purple colorant and a red colorant (8) an embodiment containing a green colorant and a red colorant.
  • ratio (mass ratio) of each colorant examples include the following.
  • the content of the colorant that blocks visible light is preferably 30% by mass or less, and 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the following is more preferable, and 15% by mass or less is more preferable.
  • the lower limit may be 0.01% by mass or more, and may be 0.5% by mass or more.
  • the composition of this invention can also be made into the aspect which does not contain the coloring material which shields visible light substantially.
  • the content of the coloring material that blocks visible light is preferably 0.005% by mass or less based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. 0.001 mass% or less is more preferable, and it is further more preferable not to contain the color material which shields visible light.
  • Pigment derivative When the composition of this invention contains a pigment, it can contain a pigment derivative further.
  • the pigment derivative a compound having a structure in which a part of the pigment is substituted with an acidic group, a basic group or a phthalimidomethyl group is preferable.
  • the content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 50 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment contained in the composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3 parts by mass or more, and still more preferably 5 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 40 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 30 parts by mass or less.
  • content of a pigment derivative is the said range, the dispersibility of a pigment can be improved and aggregation of a pigment can be suppressed efficiently. Only one pigment derivative or two or more pigment derivatives may be used, and in the case of two or more pigment derivatives, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin.
  • resin is components other than the aggregation inhibitor mentioned above.
  • the resin is blended, for example, for the purpose of dispersing a pigment or the like in the composition and the purpose of a binder.
  • a resin used mainly for dispersing pigments is also called a dispersant.
  • the resin is merely an example, and the resin can be used for other purposes.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 20,000 to 60,000.
  • the lower limit is preferably 25,000 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 55,000 or less.
  • the resin dispersity (Mw / Mn) is preferably 1.1 to 10.0.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 1.3 or more, and further preferably 1.5 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 8.0 or less, and even more preferably 6.0 or less.
  • the glass transition temperature of the resin is preferably 0 to 100 ° C.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 10 ° C. or higher, and further preferably 20 ° C. or higher.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 95 ° C. or less, and still more preferably 90 ° C. or less.
  • the glass transition temperature of the resin is determined by weighing 5 mg of sample in a sample pan using a differential scanning calorimeter (Seiko Instruments, DSC1000) and in a nitrogen stream from 10 ° C / 200 ° C to -20 ° C to 200 ° C. It is the value measured by raising the temperature at a temperature elevation rate of minutes. The average value of the temperature at which the baseline begins to deviate and the temperature at which the baseline returns to the base line was taken as the glass transition temperature of the resin.
  • Types of resin include (meth) acrylic resin, ene / thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resin, polyimide resin, Polyamideimide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, and polysiloxane resin are exemplified, and (meth) acrylic resin is preferable.
  • One kind selected from these resins may be used alone, or two or more kinds may be mixed and used.
  • Resin may have an acid group.
  • the acid group include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Resins having acid groups can also be used as alkali-soluble resins. Hereinafter, the resin having an acid group is also referred to as an alkali-soluble resin.
  • the alkali-soluble resin a polymer having a carboxyl group in the side chain is preferable, and a methacrylic acid copolymer, an acrylic acid copolymer, an itaconic acid copolymer, a crotonic acid copolymer, a maleic acid copolymer, and a partial esterification are used.
  • examples include maleic acid copolymers, alkali-soluble phenol resins such as novolak resins, acidic cellulose derivatives having a carboxyl group in the side chain, and polymers having a hydroxyl group added with an acid anhydride.
  • a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid and another monomer copolymerizable therewith is suitable.
  • Examples of other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid include alkyl (meth) acrylates, aryl (meth) acrylates, and vinyl compounds.
  • alkyl (meth) acrylate and aryl (meth) acrylate methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate, Hexyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, tolyl (meth) acrylate, naphthyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl methacrylate, etc
  • Examples of the vinyl compound include styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, vinyl toluene, acrylonitrile, vinyl acetate, N-vinyl pyrrolidone, Styrene macromonomer, polymethylmethacrylate macromonomer, and the like.
  • N-substituted maleimide monomers described in JP-A-10-300922 such as N-phenylmaleimide and N-cyclohexylmaleimide can also be used. Only one kind of these other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid may be used, or two or more kinds may be used.
  • alkali-soluble resin examples include benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid copolymer, benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate copolymer, and benzyl (meth) acrylate.
  • a multi-component copolymer composed of / (meth) acrylic acid / other monomers can be preferably used.
  • the alkali-soluble resin includes a monomer component including a compound represented by the following formula (ED1) and / or a compound represented by the following formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as “ether dimers”). It is also preferable to include a polymer obtained by polymerization.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the description in JP 2010-168539 A can be referred to.
  • the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent represented by R 1 and R 2 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include methyl, ethyl, n- Linear or branched alkyl groups such as propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, tert-amyl, stearyl, lauryl, 2-ethylhexyl; aryl groups such as phenyl; cyclohexyl, tert-butylcyclohexyl, Alicyclic groups such as dicyclopentadienyl, tricyclodecanyl, isobornyl, adamantyl and 2-methyl-2-adamantyl; alkyl groups substituted with alkoxy such as 1-methoxyethyl and 1-ethoxyethyl; benzyl and the like An alkyl group substituted with an aryl group of
  • ether dimer for example, paragraph number 0317 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. Only one type of ether dimer may be used, or two or more types may be used.
  • the alkali-soluble resin may contain a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the following formula (X).
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms
  • R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or a carbon atom that may contain a benzene ring.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 15.
  • the alkylene group of R 2 preferably has 2 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group of R 3 has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, and the alkyl group of R 3 may contain a benzene ring.
  • Examples of the alkyl group containing a benzene ring represented by R 3 include a benzyl group and a 2-phenyl (iso) propyl group.
  • alkali-soluble resins examples include paragraphs 0558 to 0571 in JP2012-208494A (paragraph numbers 0685 to 0700 in the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099), and JP2012-198408.
  • the description of paragraph numbers 0076 to 0099 of the publication can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • Specific examples of the alkali-soluble resin include the following resins. In the following structural formulas, Me represents a methyl group.
  • the acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 30 to 200 mgKOH / g.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, and still more preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less.
  • Resin may have a curable group.
  • the curable group include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an epoxy group, a methylol group, and an alkoxysilyl group.
  • the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group, and a (meth) acryloyloxy group.
  • alkoxysilyl group include a monoalkoxysilyl group, a dialkoxysilyl group, and a trialkoxysilyl group.
  • repeating unit having a curable group examples include repeating units represented by the following formulas (A2-1) to (A2-4).
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 5 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1.
  • R 1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • L 51 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include an alkylene group, an arylene group, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —SO 2 —, —NR 10 — (R 10 represents a hydrogen atom Or a group consisting of a combination thereof, and a group consisting of at least one of an alkylene group, an arylene group and an alkylene group and —O— is preferable.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group may have a substituent, but is preferably unsubstituted.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. Further, the cyclic alkylene group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 18, more preferably 6 to 14, and still more preferably 6 to 10.
  • P 1 represents a curable group.
  • the curable group include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an epoxy group, a methylol group, and an alkoxysilyl group.
  • Examples of the resin containing a curable group and an acid group include NR series (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Photomer 6173 (COOH-containing polyurethane acrylic oligomer. Diamond Shamrock Co., Ltd.). ), Biscote R-264, KS resist 106 (all manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Cyclomer P series (for example, ACA230AA), Plaxel CF200 series (all manufactured by Daicel Corporation), Ebecryl 3800 (Daicel) UC Bee Co., Ltd.), ACRYCURE RD-F8 (manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • the resin preferably also has a repeating unit represented by the following formulas (A3-1) to (A3-7).
  • R 5 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • L 4 to L 7 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • R 10 to R 13 each independently represents a hydrocarbon.
  • R 14 and R 15 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • R 5 has the same meaning as R 1 in formulas (A2-1) to (A2-4), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • L 4 to L 7 have the same meaning as L 51 in formulas (A2-1) to (A2-4), and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • the hydrocarbon group represented by R 10 to R 13 is not particularly limited.
  • R 14 and R 15 are alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, heteroaryloxy groups, acyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, aryloxycarbonyl groups, heteroaryls.
  • the resin is a proof G-0150M, G-0105SA, G-0130SP, G-0250SP, G-1005S, G-1005SA, G-1010S, G-2050M, G-01100, G-01758 (day Oil Co., Ltd., epoxy group-containing polymer), ARTON F4520 (manufactured by JSR Co., Ltd.), Acrybase FF-187 (Fujikura Kasei Co., Ltd.) and the like can also be used.
  • the resin content is preferably 1 to 80% by mass relative to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 10% by mass or more, and further preferably 20% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 70% by mass or less, and still more preferably 60% by mass or less.
  • the resin content is preferably 100 to 16000 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the aggregation inhibitor described above.
  • the upper limit is preferably 10,000 parts by mass or less, more preferably 7000 parts by mass or less, and still more preferably 6000 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 150 parts by mass or more, more preferably 200 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 300 parts by mass or more.
  • the composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
  • a polymerizable compound a compound that can be polymerized by the action of a radical is preferable. That is, the polymerizable compound is preferably a radical polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a compound having one or more groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, more preferably a compound having two or more groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, and 3 groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond. A compound having at least one is more preferable.
  • the upper limit of the number of groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is, for example, preferably 15 or less, and more preferably 6 or less.
  • Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a styryl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable.
  • the polymerizable compound may be in the form of either a monomer or a polymer, but is preferably a monomer.
  • the monomer type polymerizable compound preferably has a molecular weight of 200 to 3,000.
  • the upper limit of the molecular weight is more preferably 2,500 or less, and further preferably 2,000 or less.
  • the lower limit of the molecular weight is more preferably 250 or more, and further preferably 300 or more.
  • the description in paragraph numbers 0033 to 0034 of JP2013-253224A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the compound include ethyleneoxy-modified pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available product is NK ester ATM-35E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD D-330; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available products are KAYARAD D-320; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available products are KAYARAD D -310; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available products are KAYARAD D -310; Nippon
  • Pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., A-TMMT) and 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., KAYARAD HDDA) are also preferable. These oligomer types can also be used. Examples thereof include RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • the polymerizable compound may have an acid group such as a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, or a phosphoric acid group.
  • a polymerizable compound having an acid group can be obtained by a method in which a part of hydroxyl groups of a polyfunctional alcohol is (meth) acrylated, and an acid anhydride is added to the remaining hydroxyl groups to form carboxyl groups. Further, an acid group may be introduced by reacting the above hydroxyl group with a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride or the like.
  • non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride examples include tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, hexahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated hexahydrophthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, and maleic anhydride.
  • the polymerizable compound having an acid group an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid is preferable, and a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride is reacted with an unreacted hydroxyl group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound.
  • a polymerizable compound to which a group is added is more preferable, and in the above-described ester, a compound in which the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is at least one of pentaerythritol and dipentaerythritol is further preferable.
  • Commercially available products include Aronix M-510, M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), CBX-0, CBX-1 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • the acid value of the polymerizable compound having an acid group is preferably from 0.1 to 40 mgKOH / g.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 5 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30 mgKOH / g or less.
  • a polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure is also a preferred embodiment.
  • the polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure is not particularly limited as long as it has a caprolactone structure in the molecule.
  • polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure a compound represented by the following formula (Z-1) is preferable.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • m represents 1 or 2
  • “*” represents a bond
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • “*” represents a bond
  • a compound represented by the formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) can also be used.
  • each E independently represents — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O) —.
  • y independently represents an integer of 0 to 10
  • X independently represents a (meth) acryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxyl group.
  • the total number of (meth) acryloyl groups is 3 or 4
  • each m independently represents an integer of 0 to 10
  • the total of each m is an integer of 0 to 40.
  • the total number of (meth) acryloyl groups is 5 or 6
  • each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 10 and the total of each n is an integer of 0 to 60.
  • m is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
  • the total of each m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and particularly preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
  • n is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
  • the total of each n is preferably an integer of 3 to 60, more preferably an integer of 3 to 24, and particularly preferably an integer of 6 to 12.
  • — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O) — represents an oxygen atom side.
  • a form in which the terminal of X is bonded to X is preferred.
  • the compounds represented by formula (Z-4) or formula (Z-5) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • a form in which all six Xs are acryloyl groups is preferable.
  • a pentaerythritol derivative and / or a dipentaerythritol derivative are more preferable.
  • Specific examples include compounds represented by the following formulas (a) to (f) (hereinafter also referred to as “exemplary compounds (a) to (f)”).
  • exemplary compounds (a), (f) b), (e) and (f) are preferred.
  • Examples of commercially available polymerizable compounds represented by the formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5) include SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains manufactured by Sartomer Co., Ltd., Japan Examples thereof include DPCA-60, which is a hexafunctional acrylate having six pentyleneoxy chains, and TPA-330, which is a trifunctional acrylate having three isobutyleneoxy chains, manufactured by Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • the polymerizable compound is also preferably isocyanuric acid ethyleneoxy-modified (meth) acrylate.
  • examples of commercially available products include Aronix M-315, M-313 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), NK ester A-9300 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), SR368 (manufactured by Sartomer Co., Ltd.), and the like. . Also, the following compounds can be used.
  • Polymerizable compounds include urethane acrylates such as those described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, and JP-B-2-16765.
  • Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418 are also suitable.
  • addition polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are used. Can do.
  • urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (manufactured by Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA- 306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600, and light acrylate DCP-A (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 0.01 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 0.1% by mass or more, and further preferably 0.5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less, and further preferably 15% by mass or less.
  • the composition of the present invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • a photoinitiator It can select suitably from well-known photoinitiators.
  • a compound having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet region to the visible region is preferable.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molar extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 800 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 500 nm).
  • Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazoles, oxime derivatives, etc. Oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, hydroxyacetophenones, and the like.
  • Examples of the halogenated hydrocarbon derivative having a triazine skeleton include those described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc.
  • photopolymerization initiators from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, tria.
  • a compound selected from the group consisting of a reel imidazole dimer, an onium compound, a benzothiazole compound, a benzophenone compound, an acetophenone compound, a cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complex, a halomethyloxadiazole compound and a 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compound is preferred.
  • Examples of ⁇ -aminoketone compounds include 2-methyl-1-phenyl-2-morpholinopropan-1-one, 2-methyl-1- [4- (hexyl) phenyl] -2-morpholinopropane-1- ON, 2-ethyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -butanone-1,2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -butanone-1,2- And (dimethylamino) -2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1- [4- (4-morpholinyl) phenyl] -1-butanone.
  • Examples of commercially available products of ⁇ -aminoketone compounds include IRGACURE907, IRGACURE369, and IRGACURE379 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF).
  • Examples of commercially available ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds include IRGACURE184, DAROCUR1173, IRGACURE500, IRGACURE2959, IRGACURE127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF).
  • Examples of commercially available acylphosphine compounds include IRGACURE 819 and IRGACURE TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF).
  • an oxime compound as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound include compounds described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, compounds described in JP-A No. 2006-342166, and JP-A No. 2016-21012. The compounds described in the publication can be used.
  • J.H. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 1653-1660
  • TR-PBG-304 manufactured by Changzhou Powerful Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.
  • Adeka Arkles NCI-930 manufactured by ADEKA Corporation
  • Adeka Optomer N-1919 manufactured by ADEKA Corporation
  • JP 2012-14052 A Can be used.
  • oxime compounds other than those described above compounds described in JP-T 2009-519904, in which an oxime is linked to the N-position of the carbazole ring, and those described in US Pat.
  • a compound described in JP2009-221114A having an absorption maximum wavelength at 405 nm and good sensitivity to a g-ray light source Paragraph No. 00 of JP 2014-137466 A The like may be used compounds described in 6-0079.
  • paragraph numbers 0274 to 0275 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the oxime compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (OX-1).
  • the oxime compound may be an oxime compound in which the oxime N—O bond is an (E) isomer, or the oxime N—O bond may be a (Z) oxime compound. Z) It may be a mixture with the body.
  • R and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent
  • A represents a divalent organic group
  • Ar represents an aryl group.
  • the monovalent substituent represented by R is preferably a monovalent nonmetallic atomic group.
  • the monovalent nonmetallic atomic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, and an arylthiocarbonyl group.
  • these groups may have one or more substituents.
  • the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
  • the substituent examples include a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkyl group, and an aryl group.
  • the monovalent substituent represented by B is preferably an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an arylcarbonyl group, or a heterocyclic carbonyl group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
  • the divalent organic group represented by A is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkylene group, or an alkynylene group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
  • an oxime compound having a fluorene ring can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorene ring include compounds described in JP-A-2014-137466. This content is incorporated herein.
  • an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP 2010-262028 A, compounds 24 and 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP-A 2013-164471. Compound (C-3). This content is incorporated herein.
  • an oxime compound having a nitro group can be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the oxime compound having a nitro group is also preferably a dimer.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a nitro group include paragraph numbers 0031 to 0047 of JP2013-114249A, paragraph numbers 0008 to 0012 and 0070 to 0079 of JP2014-137466A, paragraph of JP4223071. No. 0007 to 0025, Adeka Arcles NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) can be mentioned.
  • an oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples include OE-01 to OE-75 described in International Publication No. WO2015 / 036910.
  • oxime compounds that are preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the oxime compound is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 350 to 500 nm, more preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 360 to 480 nm, and particularly preferably a compound having high absorbance at 365 nm and 405 nm.
  • the molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably 2,000 to 300,000, and more preferably 5,000 to 200,000 from the viewpoint of sensitivity. 000 is particularly preferred.
  • the molar extinction coefficient of the compound can be measured using a known method. Specifically, for example, using an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian) using an ethyl acetate solvent, It is preferable to measure at a concentration of 0.01 g / L.
  • the photopolymerization initiator preferably contains an oxime compound and an ⁇ -aminoketone compound. By using both in combination, the developability is improved and a pattern having excellent rectangularity can be easily formed.
  • the oxime compound and the ⁇ -aminoketone compound are used in combination, the ⁇ -aminoketone compound is preferably 50 to 600 parts by mass, more preferably 150 to 400 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the oxime compound.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 30% by mass, and still more preferably based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. 1 to 20% by mass. Within this range, better sensitivity and pattern formability can be obtained.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more kinds. When 2 or more types are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the composition of the present invention preferably contains a chain transfer agent. According to this aspect, in exposure at the time of pattern formation, hardening of the film surface (pattern surface) by exposure can be promoted. For this reason, it can suppress that the thickness of a film
  • chain transfer agents include N, N-dialkylaminobenzoic acid alkyl esters and thiol compounds, with thiol compounds being preferred.
  • the thiol compound is preferably a compound having 2 or more (preferably 2 to 8, more preferably 3 to 6) thiol groups in the molecule.
  • thiol compound examples include 2-mercaptobenzothiazole, 2-mercaptobenzoxazole, 2-mercaptobenzimidazole, N-phenylmercaptobenzimidazole, 1,3,5-tris (3-mercaptobutyloxyethyl) -1 , 3,5-triazine-2,4,6 (1H, 3H, 5H) -trione and other thiol compounds having a heterocyclic ring, pentaerythritol tetrakis (3-mercaptobutyrate), 1,4-bis (3-mercapto) And aliphatic thiol compounds such as butyryloxy) butane. Moreover, it is also preferable to use the following compound.
  • chain transfer agents include PEMP (manufactured by Nagase Sangyo Co., Ltd., thiol compound), Sunseller M (manufactured by Sanshin Chemical Co., Ltd., thiol compound), Karenz MT BD1 (Showa Denko Co., Ltd.) And thiol compounds).
  • the content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.2 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.4 to 3.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
  • the content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 1 to 40 parts by mass, and more preferably 2 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound.
  • the composition of this invention can also contain the compound which has an epoxy group.
  • the compound which has an epoxy group the compound which has 1 or more of epoxy groups in 1 molecule is mentioned, The compound which has 2 or more is preferable. It is preferable to have 2 to 100 epoxy groups in one molecule.
  • the upper limit of the epoxy group can be, for example, 10 or less, or 5 or less.
  • the compound having an epoxy group may be a low molecular weight compound (for example, a molecular weight of less than 1,000) or a high molecular weight compound (for example, a molecular weight of 1,000 or more, and in the case of a polymer, the weight average molecular weight is 1,000). Any of the above).
  • the molecular weight of the compound having an epoxy group (weight average molecular weight in the case of a polymer) is preferably 200 to 100,000, and more preferably 500 to 50,000.
  • jER825, jER827, jER828, jER834, jER1001, jER1002, jER1003, jER1055, jER1007, jER1009, jER1010 (above, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON860, EPICLON1050 , EPICLON 1051, EPICLON 1055 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation) and the like.
  • Examples of the bisphenol F type epoxy resin include jER806, jER807, jER4004, jER4005, jER4007, jER4010 (above, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON830, EPICLON835 (above, made by DIC Corporation), LCE-21, RE-602S. (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • phenol novolac type epoxy resins jER152, jER154, jER157S70, jER157S65 (Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.), EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-770, EPICLON N-775 (above, DIC Corporation), etc. Is mentioned.
  • Cresol novolac type epoxy resins include EPICLON N-660, EPICLON N-665, EPICLON N-670, EPICLON N-673, EPICLON N-680, EPICLON N-690, EPICLON N-695 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation) ), EOCN-1020 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • Aliphatic epoxy resins include ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S, EP-4085S, EP-4088S (manufactured by ADEKA), Celoxide 2021P, Celoxide 2081, Celoxide 2083, Celoxide 2085, EHPE3150, EPOLEAD PB 3600, PB 4700 (above, manufactured by Daicel Corporation), Denacol EX-212L, EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L (above, manufactured by Nagase ChemteX Corporation), and the like.
  • ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S, EP-4003S, EP-4010S, EP-4010S, EP-4011S (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), NC-2000, NC-3000, NC-7300, XD-1000, EPPN-501, EPPN-502 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), jER1031S (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), OXT-221 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • the content of the compound having an epoxy group is preferably 0.5 to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 1% by mass or more, and further preferably 2% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 15% by mass or less, and further preferably 10% by mass or less.
  • the composition of the present invention can contain a solvent.
  • the solvent include organic solvents.
  • the solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the applicability of the composition, but is preferably selected in consideration of the applicability and safety of the composition.
  • organic solvents include the following.
  • esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, cyclohexyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, alkyl alkoxyacetate ( For example, methyl alkoxyacetate, ethyl alkoxyacetate, butyl alkoxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate, etc.), alkyl esters of 3-alkoxypropionic acid (eg, Methyl 3-alkoxypropionate, ethyl 3-alkoxypropionate, etc.
  • 2-alkoxypropionic acid alkyl esters for example, methyl 2-alkoxypropionate, ethyl 2-alkoxypropionate, propyl 2-alkoxypropionate, etc.
  • ethers include diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, propylene glycol Examples thereof include monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, and propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate.
  • ketones include methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, and 3-heptanone.
  • aromatic hydrocarbons include toluene and xylene. However, aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) as a solvent may be better reduced for environmental reasons (for example, 50 ppm by weight per part of organic solvent). (million) or less, or 10 mass ppm or less, or 1 mass ppm or less).
  • Organic solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • a mixed solution composed of two or more selected from ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate is preferable.
  • a solvent having a low metal content it is preferable to use a solvent having a low metal content, and the metal content of the solvent is preferably 10 mass ppb (parts per billion) or less, for example. If necessary, a solvent having a mass ppt (parts per trillation) level may be used, and such a high-purity solvent is provided, for example, by Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (Chemical Industry Daily, November 13, 2015). .
  • Examples of the method for removing impurities such as metals from the solvent include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter.
  • the filter pore size of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 nm or less, more preferably 5 nm or less, and even more preferably 3 nm or less.
  • the filter material is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon.
  • the solvent may contain isomers (compounds having the same number of atoms and different structures). Moreover, only 1 type may be included and the isomer may be included multiple types.
  • the organic solvent preferably has a peroxide content of 0.8 mmol / L or less, and more preferably contains substantially no peroxide.
  • the content of the solvent is preferably 10 to 90% by mass, more preferably 20 to 80% by mass, and further preferably 25 to 75% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present invention. .
  • the composition of the present invention can further contain a silane coupling agent.
  • the silane coupling agent is a component different from the polymerizable compound described above.
  • the silane coupling agent means a silane compound having a hydrolyzable group and other functional groups.
  • the hydrolyzable group refers to a substituent that is directly bonded to a silicon atom and can generate a siloxane bond by at least one of a hydrolysis reaction and a condensation reaction.
  • a hydrolysable group a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group etc. are mentioned, for example, An alkoxy group is preferable.
  • the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group.
  • the functional group other than the hydrolyzable group a group that exhibits an affinity by forming an interaction or bond with the resin is preferable. Examples thereof include a vinyl group, a styryl group, a (meth) acryloyl group, a mercapto group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, an amino group, a ureido group, a sulfide group, and an isocyanate group, and a (meth) acryloyl group and an epoxy group are preferable.
  • the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group and at least one of a (meth) acryloyl group and an epoxy group.
  • silane coupling agent examples include, for example, vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane, 2- (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-glycol.
  • the content of the silane coupling agent is preferably 0.01 to 15.0 mass%, more preferably 0.05 to 10.0 mass%, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
  • the silane coupling agent may be only one type or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain various surfactants from the viewpoint of further improving applicability.
  • various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
  • the liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid can be further improved, and the uniformity of coating thickness and liquid saving can be further improved. it can. That is, when a film is formed using a coating liquid to which a composition containing a fluorosurfactant is applied, the interfacial tension between the surface to be coated and the coating liquid is reduced, and the wettability to the surface to be coated is reduced. Is improved, and the coating property to the coated surface is improved. For this reason, it is possible to more suitably form a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness.
  • the fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in the composition.
  • fluorosurfactant examples include surfactants described in JP 2014-41318 A, paragraphs 0060 to 0064 (paragraph numbers 0060 to 0064 of the corresponding international publication WO 2014/17669), and the like. Examples include surfactants described in paragraphs 0117 to 0132 of JP2011-132503A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • fluorosurfactants include, for example, Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, F780 (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, Same SC-103, Same SC-104, Same SC-105, Same SC1068, Same SC-381, Same SC-383, Same S393, Same KH-40 (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PolyFox PF636, PF656, PF6320, PF6520, PF7002 (above, the product made by OMNOVA) etc. are mentioned.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant has a molecular structure having a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and an acrylic compound in which the fluorine atom is volatilized by cleavage of the functional group containing the fluorine atom when heated is suitably used.
  • a fluorosurfactant include Megafac DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (Chemical Industry Daily, February 22, 2016) (Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun, February 23, 2016). -21, which can be used.
  • a block polymer can be used. Examples thereof include compounds described in JP2011-89090A.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy group or propyleneoxy group) (meth).
  • a fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used.
  • the following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorosurfactant used in the present invention.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3,000 to 50,000, for example, 14,000. % Which shows the ratio of a repeating unit in said compound is the mass%.
  • a fluorosurfactant and a fluoropolymer having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain can also be used.
  • Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A 2010-164965, paragraph numbers 0050 to 0090 and 0289 to 0295, for example, Megafac RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, RS manufactured by DIC Corporation. -72-K and the like.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant compounds described in paragraph numbers 0015 to 0158 of JP-A No. 2015-117327 can also be used.
  • Nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane and their ethoxylates and propoxylates (eg, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, Polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octyl phenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonyl phenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester, Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2 (BASF ), Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1 (B SF), Solsperse 20000 (Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.), NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002 (Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Pionein D-
  • cationic surfactants examples include organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid (co) polymer polyflow No. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • anionic surfactant examples include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.), Sandet BL (manufactured by Sanyo Chemical Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • silicone-based surfactants include Torre Silicone DC3PA, Torre Silicone SH7PA, Torre Silicone DC11PA, Torresilicone SH21PA, Torree Silicone SH28PA, Torree Silicone SH29PA, Torree Silicone SH30PA, Torree Silicone SH8400 (above, Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.) )), TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4442 (above, manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP341, KF6001, KF6002 (above, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) , BYK307, BYK323, BYK330 (above, manufactured by BYK Chemie) and the like.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably from 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably from 0.005 to 1.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
  • the composition of this invention contains a ultraviolet absorber.
  • the ultraviolet absorber include conjugated diene compounds and diketone compounds, and conjugated diene compounds are preferable.
  • the conjugated diene compound is more preferably a compound represented by the following formula (UV-1).
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 1 and R 2 May be the same as or different from each other, but do not represent a hydrogen atom at the same time.
  • R 1 and R 2 may form a cyclic amino group together with the nitrogen atom to which R 1 and R 2 are bonded. Examples of the cyclic amino group include piperidino group, morpholino group, pyrrolidino group, hexahydroazepino group, piperazino group and the like.
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and still more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • R 3 and R 4 represent an electron withdrawing group.
  • R 3 and R 4 are preferably acyl, carbamoyl, alkyloxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, cyano, nitro, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonyloxy, sulfamoyl, acyl, carbamoyl Group, alkyloxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, cyano group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, sulfonyloxy group, sulfamoyl group are preferred.
  • R 3 and R 4 may be bonded to each other to form a cyclic electron withdrawing group.
  • Examples of the cyclic electron withdrawing group formed by combining R 3 and R 4 with each other include a 6-membered ring containing two carbonyl groups. At least one of the above R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 may be in the form of a polymer derived from a monomer bonded to a vinyl group via a linking group. It may be a copolymer with another monomer.
  • UV-1 Specific examples of the ultraviolet absorber represented by the formula (UV-1) include the following compounds.
  • the description of the substituent of the ultraviolet absorber represented by the formula (UV-1) is given in paragraph numbers 0024 to 0033 of the international publication WO2009 / 123109 (paragraph number 0040 of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2011/0039195). To 0059), the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Preferable specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (UV-1) include those described in paragraph Nos. 0034 to 0037 (paragraph number 0060 of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2011/0039195) of International Publication No. WO2009 / 123109.
  • Descriptions of exemplary compounds (1) to (14) can be taken into account, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • Examples of commercially available ultraviolet absorbers represented by the formula (UV-1) include UV503 (manufactured by Daito Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • the diketone compound used as the ultraviolet absorber is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (UV-2).
  • R 101 and R 102 each independently represent a substituent
  • m1 and m2 each independently represent 0 to 4.
  • Substituents are alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, heteroaryloxy groups, acyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, aryloxycarbonyl groups, heteroaryloxycarbonyl groups, acyloxy groups, Amino group, acylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, heteroaryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfonylamino group, sulfamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heteroarylthio group, alkylsulfonyl group, aryl Sulf
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the alkyl group include linear, branched, and cyclic, and linear or branched is preferable, and branched is more preferable.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkoxy group is preferably 1-20.
  • Examples of the alkoxy group include straight chain, branched, and cyclic, and straight chain or branched is preferable, and branched is more preferable.
  • a combination in which one of R 101 and R 102 is an alkyl group and the other is an alkoxy group is preferable.
  • m1 and m2 each independently represents 0-4.
  • m1 and m2 are each independently preferably 0 to 2, more preferably 0 to 1, and particularly preferably 1.
  • Examples of the compound represented by the formula (UV-2) include the following compounds.
  • Yubinal A manufactured by BASF
  • an ultraviolet absorber such as an aminodiene compound, a salicylate compound, a benzophenone compound, a benzotriazole compound, an acrylonitrile compound, a triazine compound, or the like
  • Specific examples include the compounds described in JP2013-68814A. Is mentioned.
  • As the benzotriazole compound MYUA series (Chemical Industry Daily, February 1, 2016) manufactured by Miyoshi Oil & Fats Co., Ltd. may be used.
  • the content of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably from 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably from 0.01 to 5% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
  • the ultraviolet absorber is preferably contained in an amount of 5 to 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound.
  • the upper limit is preferably 80 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 60 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 20 parts by mass or more.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain a polymerization inhibitor in order to prevent unnecessary thermal polymerization of the polymerizable compound during the production or storage of the composition.
  • polymerization inhibitors include phenolic hydroxyl group-containing compounds, N-oxide compounds, piperidine 1-oxyl free radical compounds, pyrrolidine 1-oxyl free radical compounds, N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamines, diazonium compounds , Cationic dyes, sulfide group-containing compounds, nitro group-containing compounds, phosphorus compounds, lactone compounds, transition metal compounds (FeCl 3 , CuCl 2 etc.).
  • these compounds may be composite compounds in which a plurality of structures that exhibit a polymerization inhibiting function such as a phenol skeleton and a phosphorus-containing skeleton are present in the same molecule.
  • a polymerization inhibiting function such as a phenol skeleton and a phosphorus-containing skeleton
  • the compounds described in JP-A-10-46035 are also preferably used.
  • polymerization inhibitor examples include hydroquinone, paramethoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-paracresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine salts (ammonium salt, primary cerium salt, etc.) can be mentioned. Of these, paramethoxyphenol is preferred.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
  • the polymerization inhibitor is preferably contained in an amount of 0.001 to 1 part by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound.
  • the upper limit is preferably 0.5 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 0.2 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.01 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 0.03 parts by mass or more.
  • the composition of the present invention preferably contains an antioxidant.
  • the antioxidant include a phenol compound, a phosphite compound, a thioether compound, a hindered amine compound, and the like, and a phenol compound and a hindered amine compound are preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the antioxidant is preferably 500 or more.
  • phenol compound any phenol compound known as a phenol-based antioxidant can be used.
  • Preferable phenolic compounds include hindered phenolic compounds.
  • a compound having a substituent at a site (ortho position) adjacent to the phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
  • a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon atoms is preferable, and a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propionyl group, an isopropionyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a t-butyl group, a pentyl group, an isopentyl group.
  • the phenol compound is preferably a polysubstituted phenol compound.
  • Multi-substituted phenolic compounds are roughly classified into three types (substitution position and structure below) (following formula (A) hindered type, following formula (B) semi-hindered type, and following formula (C) less hindered type). is there.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, amino group, alkyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, alkylamino group, arylamino group, alkylsulfonyl group, and arylsulfonyl group.
  • amino group, alkyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, alkylamino group, arylamino group, alkylsulfonyl group, and arylsulfonyl group may further have a substituent.
  • the phenol compound is preferably a compound in which a plurality of structures represented by the formulas (A) to (C) are present in the same molecule, and the structure represented by the formulas (A) to (C) is 2 in the same molecule. More preferred are compounds having ⁇ 4.
  • phenol compound examples include p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, 4,4-thiobis (3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2′- Examples thereof include compounds selected from the group consisting of methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), phenol resins, and cresol resins.
  • Representative examples that can be obtained as a commercially available product include Sumitizer BHT (manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.), Irganox 1010, 1222 (manufactured by BASF), Adekastab AO-20, AO-50, AO-50F, AO-60, AO-60G, AO-330 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • Sumilizer BBM-S manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Irganox H.245 manufactured by BASF
  • Adeka Stub AO-80 manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.
  • examples of the compound of the above formula (C) include Adeka Stub AO-30 and AO-40 (manufactured by ADEKA).
  • Examples of the hindered amine compound include compounds having one or more partial structures represented by the following formula (HA) in one molecule.
  • R 1 to R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • R 5 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or an aryloxycarbonyl group.
  • the hindered amine compound is preferably a compound having two or more partial structures represented by the above formula (HA) in one molecule.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100 or less, more preferably 50 or less, further preferably 20 or less, and particularly preferably 10 or less.
  • hindered amine compounds include ADK STAB LA-52, LA-57, LA-63P, LA-68, LA-72, LA-77Y, LA-77G, LA-81, LA-82, and LA-87 (ADEKA CORPORATION). Manufactured).
  • phosphite compound tris [2-[[2,4,8,10-tetrakis (1,1-dimethylethyl) dibenzo [d, f] [1,3,2] dioxaphosphine- 6-yl] oxy] ethyl] amine, tris [2-[(4,6,9,11-tetra-tert-butyldibenzo [d, f] [1,3,2] dioxaphosphin-2- Yl) oxy] ethyl] amine and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of ethyl bis (2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl) phosphite.
  • ADK STAB PEP-36A As the antioxidant, in addition to those described above, ADK STAB PEP-36A, ADK STAB AO-412S (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), and the like can also be used.
  • the content of the antioxidant is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.3 to 15% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. Only one type of antioxidant may be used, or two or more types may be used. In the case of two or more types, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain a sensitizer, a curing accelerator, a filler, a thermal curing accelerator, a thermal polymerization inhibitor, a plasticizer, and other auxiliary agents (for example, conductive particles, fillers, An antifoaming agent, a flame retardant, a leveling agent, a peeling accelerator, a fragrance, a surface tension adjusting agent, etc.).
  • auxiliary agents for example, conductive particles, fillers, An antifoaming agent, a flame retardant, a leveling agent, a peeling accelerator, a fragrance, a surface tension adjusting agent, etc.
  • the composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the aforementioned components.
  • the components may be mixed together, or may be sequentially mixed after each component is dissolved or dispersed in a solvent.
  • the composition may be prepared by dissolving or dispersing all the components in a solvent at the same time, and if necessary, each component is suitably used as two or more solutions or dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be mixed to prepare a composition.
  • the composition of this invention contains particles, such as a pigment, it is preferable to include the process of disperse
  • the mechanical force used for dispersing the particles includes compression, squeezing, impact, shearing, cavitation and the like.
  • Specific examples of the disperser of these processes include a bead mill, a sand mill, a roll mill, a ball mill, a paint shaker, a microfluidizer, a high-speed impeller, a sand grinder, a flow jet mixer, a high-pressure wet atomization, and an ultrasonic dispersion.
  • a bead having a small diameter or to increase the pulverization efficiency by increasing the filling rate of beads.
  • the process and disperser for dispersing particles are described in “Dispersion Technology Taizen, Issued by Information Technology Corporation, July 15, 2005” and “Dispersion technology and industrial application centering on suspension (solid / liquid dispersion system)”.
  • the process and disperser described in Paragraph No. 0022 of Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-157893 can be suitably used.
  • the particles may be refined in the salt milling process.
  • materials, equipment, processing conditions and the like used in the salt milling process for example, those described in JP-A-2015-194521 and JP-A-2012-046629 can be used.
  • the material of the filter can be used without particular limitation as long as it has been conventionally used for filtration.
  • fluorine resin such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyamide resin such as nylon (for example, nylon-6, nylon-6,6), polyolefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (high density, super high And a filter using a molecular weight polyolefin resin).
  • PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
  • nylon for example, nylon-6, nylon-6,6)
  • polyolefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (high density, super high And a filter using a molecular weight polyolefin resin).
  • PP polypropylene
  • nylon including high density and ultra high molecular weight polypropylene
  • nylon are preferable.
  • the filter has a pore size of about 0.01 to 7.0 ⁇ m, preferably about 0.01 to 3.0 ⁇ m, more preferably about 0.05 to 0.5 ⁇ m. By setting it as this range, it becomes possible to remove a fine foreign material reliably. It is also preferable to use a fiber-shaped filter medium.
  • the fiber-shaped filter medium include polypropylene fiber, nylon fiber, glass fiber, and the like, specifically, SBP type series (SBP008 etc.), TPR type series (TPR002, TPR005 etc.), SHPX type manufactured by Loki Techno Co., Ltd. Series (such as SHPX003) filter cartridges can be used.
  • the filtration with the first filter may be performed only once or may be performed twice or more.
  • the pore diameter here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer.
  • select from various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd. (DFA4201NXEY, etc.), Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Integris Co., Ltd. (formerly Nihon Microlith Co., Ltd.) or KITZ Micro Filter Co., Ltd. can do.
  • the second filter a filter formed of the same material as the first filter described above can be used.
  • the filtration with the first filter may be performed only with the dispersion, and the second filtration may be performed after mixing the other components.
  • the viscosity (at 23 ° C.) of the composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 100 mPa ⁇ s.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 2 mPa ⁇ s or more, and further preferably 3 mPa ⁇ s or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 50 mPa ⁇ s or less, further preferably 30 mPa ⁇ s or less, and particularly preferably 15 mPa ⁇ s or less.
  • the total solid content of the composition of the present invention varies depending on the application method, it is preferably, for example, 1 to 50% by mass.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • composition of the present invention can be preferably used for forming a near-infrared cut filter or an infrared transmission filter.
  • the film of the present invention is formed using the above-described composition of the present invention.
  • the film of the present invention can be preferably used as a near-infrared cut filter or an infrared transmission filter.
  • the film of the present invention may have a pattern, or may be a film without a pattern (flat film).
  • the film of the present invention may be used in a state of being laminated on a support, or the film of the present invention may be used after being peeled from the support.
  • the film of the present invention is a filter using a composition containing the above-mentioned near-infrared absorbing compound and a colorant that blocks visible light, or a layer containing the above-mentioned near-infrared absorbing compound.
  • the filter includes a layer containing a color material that blocks visible light.
  • the thickness of the film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose.
  • the film thickness is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.2 ⁇ m or more, and further preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or more.
  • the film of the present invention can also be used in combination with a color filter containing a chromatic colorant.
  • a color filter can be manufactured using the coloring composition containing a chromatic colorant.
  • the chromatic colorant include the chromatic colorant described in the composition of the present invention.
  • the coloring composition can further contain a resin, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator, a surfactant, a solvent, a polymerization inhibitor, an ultraviolet absorber, and the like. About these details, the material demonstrated by the composition of this invention is mentioned, These can be used. Moreover, it is good also as a filter provided with the function as a near-infrared cut filter and a color filter by making the film
  • membrane of this invention contain a chromatic colorant.
  • the near-infrared cut filter means a filter that transmits light having a wavelength in the visible region (visible light) and shields at least part of light having a wavelength in the near-infrared region (near infrared light). .
  • the near-infrared cut filter may transmit all light having a wavelength in the visible region, and transmits light having a specific wavelength out of light having a wavelength in the visible region and shields light having a specific wavelength. It may be.
  • the color filter means a filter that allows light having a specific wavelength to pass through and blocks light having a specific wavelength among light having a wavelength in the visible region.
  • the infrared transmission filter means a filter that blocks light having a wavelength in the visible region and transmits at least part of light having a wavelength in the near infrared region (near infrared).
  • a near infrared cut filter and an infrared transmission filter can be used in combination.
  • a combination of a near-infrared cut filter and an infrared transmission filter it can be preferably used for an infrared sensor that detects infrared rays having a specific wavelength.
  • both filters are used in combination, both the near-infrared cut filter and the infrared transmission filter can be formed using the composition of the present invention, and only one of them is formed using the composition of the present invention. You can also.
  • the film of the present invention can be used for various devices such as a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) and a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor), an infrared sensor, and an image display device. Further, the film of the present invention includes a lens having a function of absorbing or cutting near infrared rays (a lens for a camera such as a digital camera, a mobile phone, an in-vehicle camera, an optical lens such as an f- ⁇ lens, a pickup lens) and a semiconductor light receiving element.
  • a lens having a function of absorbing or cutting near infrared rays a lens for a camera such as a digital camera, a mobile phone, an in-vehicle camera, an optical lens such as an f- ⁇ lens, a pickup lens
  • Optical filters agricultural coatings for selective use of sunlight, recording media using near infrared absorption heat, near infrared filters for electronic devices and photographs, protective glasses, sunglasses, heat ray blocking filters Used for optical character reading and recording, confidential document copy prevention, electrophotographic photosensitive member, laser welding, and the like. It is also useful as a noise cut filter for CCD cameras and a filter for CMOS image sensors.
  • the pattern forming method includes a step of forming a composition layer on a support using the composition, and a pattern is formed on the composition layer by a photolithography method or a dry etching method. Forming.
  • the pattern forming method by the photolithography method includes a step of forming a composition layer on a support using the composition, a step of exposing the composition layer in a pattern, and developing and removing unexposed portions to form a pattern. Preferably including the step of forming. If necessary, a step of baking the composition layer (pre-bake step) and a step of baking the developed pattern (post-bake step) may be provided.
  • the pattern forming method by the dry etching method includes a step of forming a composition layer on a support using the composition, a step of curing the composition layer to form a cured product layer, A step of forming a photoresist layer on the substrate, a step of patterning the photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern, and a step of forming a pattern by dry etching the cured product layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask. It is preferable to contain.
  • each step will be described.
  • Step of Forming Composition Layer In the step of forming the composition layer, the composition layer is formed on the support using the composition.
  • the support examples include a support made of a material such as glass, silicon, polycarbonate, polyester, aromatic polyamide, polyamideimide, and polyimide. Further, a support for a solid-state imaging element in which a solid-state imaging element (light receiving element) such as a CCD or CMOS is provided on the support can be used.
  • the pattern may be formed on the solid-state image sensor formation surface side (front surface) of the solid-state image sensor substrate, or may be formed on the solid-state image sensor non-formation surface side (back surface). If necessary, the support may be provided with an undercoat layer for improving adhesion to the upper layer, preventing diffusion of substances, or flattening the substrate surface.
  • a known method can be used as a method for applying the composition to the support.
  • dropping method drop casting
  • slit coating method spray method; roll coating method
  • spin coating method spin coating
  • casting coating method slit and spin method
  • prewet method for example, JP 2009-145395 A
  • inkjet for example, on-demand method, piezo method, thermal method
  • ejection system printing such as nozzle jet, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, metal mask printing method, etc.
  • the application method in the ink jet is not particularly limited.
  • the composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked).
  • pre-baking may not be performed.
  • the prebaking temperature is preferably 150 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower, and further preferably 110 ° C. or lower.
  • the lower limit may be 50 ° C. or higher, and may be 80 ° C. or higher.
  • the pre-bake time is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 40 to 250 seconds, and further preferably 80 to 220 seconds. Drying can be performed with a hot plate, oven, or the like.
  • Exposure process When forming a pattern by photolithography, ⁇ Exposure process >> Next, the composition layer is exposed in a pattern (exposure process).
  • pattern exposure can be performed by exposing the composition layer through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using an exposure apparatus such as a stepper. Thereby, an exposed part can be hardened.
  • the radiation (light) that can be used for the exposure is preferably ultraviolet rays such as g-line and i-line, and particularly preferably i-line.
  • Irradiation dose (exposure dose) for example, preferably 0.03 ⁇ 2.5J / cm 2, more preferably 0.05 ⁇ 1.0J / cm 2, most preferably 0.08 ⁇ 0.5J / cm 2 .
  • the oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be appropriately selected.
  • the exposure may be performed in a substantially oxygen-free manner, and in a high oxygen atmosphere where the oxygen concentration exceeds 21% by volume (preferably 22% by volume or more, more preferably 30% by volume or more, further preferably 50% by volume or more). ) For exposure.
  • the exposure illuminance can be appropriately set, and is usually 1,000 W / m 2 to 100,000 W / m 2 (preferably 5,000 W / m 2 or more, more preferably 15,000 W / m 2 or more, More preferably, it can be selected from the range of 35,000 W / m 2 or more.
  • Oxygen concentration and exposure illuminance may appropriately combined conditions, for example, illuminance 10,000 W / m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 10 vol%, oxygen concentration of 35 vol% can be such illuminance 20,000W / m 2.
  • the development removal of the unexposed portion can be performed using a developer.
  • the developer is preferably an alkaline developer that does not damage the underlying solid-state imaging device or circuit.
  • the temperature of the developer is preferably 20 to 30 ° C., for example.
  • the development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds.
  • the process of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and supplying a new developer may be repeated several times.
  • alkaline agent used in the developer examples include ammonia water, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, diglycolamine, diethanolamine, hydroxyamine, ethylenediamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, Organic alkalinity such as tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis (2-hydroxyethyl) ammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene Compounds.
  • an alkaline aqueous solution obtained by diluting these alkaline agents with pure water is preferably used.
  • the concentration of the alkaline agent in the alkaline aqueous solution is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass.
  • the inorganic alkaline compound include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate and the like.
  • a surfactant may be used for the developer. Examples of the surfactant include the surfactant described in the above-described composition, and a nonionic surfactant is preferable.
  • clean (rinse) with a pure water after image development.
  • Post-baking is a heat treatment after development for complete film curing.
  • the post-baking temperature is preferably 100 to 240 ° C., for example. From the viewpoint of film curing, 200 to 230 ° C. is more preferable.
  • the post-bake temperature is preferably 150 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower. Preferably, it is 100 ° C. or lower, and more preferably 90 ° C. or lower.
  • the lower limit can be, for example, 50 ° C. or higher.
  • Post-baking can be carried out continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), a high-frequency heater, etc., so that the film after development is in the above-mentioned condition. .
  • the pattern formation by the dry etching method is performed by curing the composition layer formed on the support to form a cured product layer, and then using the patterned photoresist layer as a mask to etch the obtained cured product layer. Can be used.
  • a pre-bake treatment As a process for forming a photoresist, a mode in which heat treatment after exposure and heat treatment after development (post-bake treatment) are desirable.
  • pattern formation by the dry etching method the description of paragraph numbers 0010 to 0067 of JP2013-064993A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the optical filter of the present invention has the film of the present invention.
  • the optical filter can be preferably used as a near-infrared cut filter or an infrared transmission filter.
  • the optical filter of the present invention may further have a layer containing copper, a dielectric multilayer film, an ultraviolet absorbing layer, and the like.
  • the optical filter of the present invention when used as a near-infrared cut filter, in addition to the film of the present invention, it has a copper-containing layer and a dielectric multilayer film, so that the viewing angle is wide and the infrared shielding property is achieved. An excellent near-infrared cut filter can be obtained.
  • a near-infrared cut filter having excellent ultraviolet shielding properties can be obtained by further comprising an ultraviolet absorbing layer.
  • the ultraviolet absorber contained in an ultraviolet absorption layer As an ultraviolet absorber contained in an ultraviolet absorption layer, the ultraviolet absorber demonstrated with the composition of this invention is mentioned.
  • the ultraviolet absorbing layer for example, the description of paragraph numbers 0040 to 0070 and 0119 to 0145 of International Publication No. WO2015 / 099060 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • the dielectric multilayer film As the dielectric multilayer film, the description of paragraph numbers 0255 to 0259 of JP 2014-41318 A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • As a layer containing copper As a layer containing copper, the glass substrate (copper containing glass substrate) comprised with the glass containing copper and the layer (copper complex containing layer) containing a copper complex are mentioned.
  • the copper-containing glass substrate examples include a phosphate glass containing copper and a fluorophosphate glass containing copper.
  • Commercially available products of copper-containing glass include NF-50 (manufactured by AGC Techno Glass Co., Ltd., product name), BG-60, BG-61 (manufactured by Schott Co., Ltd., product name), and CD5000 (manufactured by HOYA Corp.). , Product name) and the like.
  • a copper complex containing layer the layer formed using the copper complex containing composition containing a copper complex is mentioned.
  • the copper complex is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 700 to 1,200 nm.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of the copper complex is more preferably in the wavelength region of 720 to 1,200 nm, and further preferably in the wavelength region of 800 to 1,100 nm.
  • the optical filter of the present invention has a pixel of the film of the present invention and a pixel selected from red, green, blue, magenta, yellow, cyan, black, and colorless.
  • the laminate of the present invention has the film of the present invention and a color filter containing a chromatic colorant.
  • the film of the present invention and the color filter may or may not be adjacent in the thickness direction.
  • the film of the present invention may be formed on a support different from the support on which the color filter is formed.
  • other members for example, a microlens, a flattening layer, etc.
  • the solid-state imaging device of the present invention has the above-described film of the present invention.
  • the configuration of the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration having the film of the present invention and functions as a solid-state imaging device, and examples thereof include the following configurations.
  • photodiodes that constitute the light receiving area of the solid-state imaging device, and transfer electrodes made of polysilicon, etc., and light shielding made of tungsten or the like that opens only the light receiving part of the photodiodes on the photodiodes and transfer electrodes.
  • the structure having a light collecting means for example, a microlens, etc., the same shall apply hereinafter
  • the structure etc. which have a condensing means may be sufficient.
  • the color filter may have a structure in which a cured film that forms each color pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by a partition, for example, in a lattice shape.
  • the partition in this case preferably has a low refractive index for each color pixel.
  • Examples of the image pickup apparatus having such a structure include apparatuses described in JP 2012-227478 A and JP 2014-179577 A.
  • the film of the present invention can also be used for image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices and organic electroluminescence (organic EL) display devices.
  • image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices and organic electroluminescence (organic EL) display devices.
  • organic EL organic electroluminescence
  • each colored pixel for example, red, green, blue
  • the infrared light contained in the backlight of the display device for example, white light emitting diode (white LED)
  • white LED white light emitting diode
  • It can be used for the purpose of forming an infrared pixel in addition to each colored pixel.
  • the liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”.
  • the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
  • the image display device may have a white organic EL element.
  • the white organic EL element preferably has a tandem structure.
  • JP 2003-45676 A supervised by Akiyoshi Mikami, “Frontier of Organic EL Technology Development-High Brightness, High Precision, Long Life, Know-how Collection”, Technical Information Association, 326-328 pages, 2008, etc.
  • the spectrum of white light emitted from the organic EL element preferably has a strong maximum emission peak in the blue region (430 to 485 nm), the green region (530 to 580 nm) and the yellow region (580 to 620 nm). In addition to these emission peaks, those having a maximum emission peak in the red region (650 to 700 nm) are more preferable.
  • the infrared sensor of the present invention has the above-described film of the present invention.
  • the configuration of the infrared sensor is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration having the film of the present invention and functions as an infrared sensor.
  • reference numeral 110 denotes a solid-state image sensor.
  • the imaging region provided on the solid-state imaging device 110 includes a near infrared cut filter 111 and an infrared transmission filter 114.
  • a color filter 112 is laminated on the near infrared cut filter 111.
  • a micro lens 115 is disposed on the incident light h ⁇ side of the color filter 112 and the infrared transmission filter 114.
  • a planarization layer 116 is formed so as to cover the microlens 115.
  • the characteristics of the near infrared cut filter 111 are selected according to the emission wavelength of an infrared light emitting diode (infrared LED) described later. For example, visible light (for example, light having a wavelength of 450 nm or more and less than 650 nm) is transmitted, and at least a part of the light having a wavelength of 650 nm or more (preferably at least a part of light having a wavelength of 650 to 1,000 nm, more preferably a wavelength of 700 to A filter that shields at least a part of light of 1,000 nm) is preferable.
  • the near-infrared cut filter 111 can be formed using, for example, the composition of the present invention.
  • the color filter 112 is a color filter in which pixels that transmit and absorb light of a specific wavelength in the visible region are formed, and is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known color filter for pixel formation can be used.
  • a color filter in which red (R), green (G), and blue (B) pixels are formed can be used.
  • R red
  • G green
  • B blue
  • paragraph numbers 0214 to 0263 in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-043556 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the characteristics of the infrared transmission filter 114 are selected according to the emission wavelength of an infrared LED described later.
  • the infrared transmission filter 114 preferably has a maximum value of 30% or less of the light transmittance in the film thickness direction in the wavelength range of 450 nm to less than 650 nm. 20% or less, more preferably 10% or less, and particularly preferably 0.1% or less.
  • This transmittance preferably satisfies the above-described conditions over the entire wavelength range of 450 nm or more and less than 650 nm.
  • the minimum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 800 nm or more is preferably 70% or more, and 80% or more. Is more preferable, and it is still more preferable that it is 90% or more.
  • This transmittance preferably satisfies the above condition in a part of the wavelength range of 800 nm or more, and preferably satisfies the above condition at a wavelength corresponding to the emission wavelength of the infrared LED.
  • the film thickness of the infrared transmission filter 114 is preferably 100 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 15 ⁇ m or less, further preferably 5 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 1 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m.
  • a method for measuring the spectral characteristics, film thickness, etc. of the infrared transmission filter 114 is shown below.
  • the film thickness was measured using a stylus type surface shape measuring instrument (DEKTAK150 manufactured by ULVAC) on the dried support having the film.
  • the spectral characteristic of the film is a value obtained by measuring transmittance in a wavelength range of 300 to 1,300 nm using a spectrophotometer (U-4100, manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation).
  • the infrared transmission filter 114 having the spectral characteristics described above can be formed using a composition containing a colorant that blocks visible light.
  • the details of the colorant that blocks visible light are the same as those described in the above-described composition of the present invention.
  • the infrared transmission filter 114 has a maximum light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the range of the wavelength of 450 nm or more and less than 650 nm of 20% or less.
  • the transmittance of light at a wavelength of 835 nm in the thickness direction of the film is 20% or less, and the minimum transmittance of light in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 1,000 to 1,300 nm is 70%. The above is preferable.
  • the infrared transmission filter 114 having the spectral characteristics described above can be formed using a composition containing a colorant that blocks visible light and a near infrared absorber.
  • the details of the colorant that blocks visible light are the same as those described in the above-described composition of the present invention.
  • a near-infrared absorber the near-infrared absorption compound demonstrated with the composition of this invention mentioned above etc. are mentioned.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the resin was measured by using HPC-8220GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corp.) as a measuring device, TSKguardcolumn SuperHZ-L as a guard column, TSKgel SuperHZM-M as a column, TSKgel SuperHZ4000, TSKgel SuperTSZHZ3000, and TSKgel Super TS
  • the column temperature was set to 40 ° C., 10 ⁇ L of a tetrahydrofuran solution having a sample concentration of 0.1% by mass was injected into the column, and tetrahydrofuran as an elution solvent was allowed to flow at a flow rate of 0.35 mL / min.
  • RI differential refractive index
  • the sample peak was detected by a detection device, and calculation was performed using a calibration curve prepared using standard polystyrene.
  • the raw materials described in the above table are as follows. (Near-infrared absorbing compound) pp-1, pp-2, pp-3, pp-4, pp-5, sq-1, cy-1: the following compounds.
  • the following compounds have a solubility of 2 g or more in 100 g of cyclopentanone at 23 ° C., 100 g of cyclohexanone at 23 ° C., and 100 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate at 23 ° C.
  • Resin 1 Cyclohexanone 30% by mass solution of a resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 41,400, glass transition temperature 53 ° C., the numerical value added to the repeating unit of the main chain is a molar ratio)
  • Resin 2 A cyclopentanone 30% by mass solution of a resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 41,400, glass transition temperature 53 ° C., the numerical value added to the repeating unit of the main chain is a molar ratio)
  • Resin 3 40% by mass solution of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate in a resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 10,000, glass transition temperature 46 ° C., the numerical value added to the repeating unit of the main chain is a molar ratio)
  • Organic solvent 1 Cyclohexanone
  • Organic solvent 2 Cyclopentanone
  • Polymerizable compound 1 Mixture of the following compounds (Mix ratio of left compound to right compound is 7: 3) Polymerizable compound 2:
  • Aggregation inhibitor 1 2-aminobenzimidazole Aggregation inhibitor 2: Flubendazole Aggregation inhibitor 3: 2-Methyl-8-quinolinol Aggregation inhibitor 4: Diethyldithiocarbamate-2-benzothiazolyl Aggregation inhibitor 6: 2,7- Dibromo-9-dodecylcarbazole aggregation inhibitor 7: 2,2-bis (4-hydroxy-3-methylphenyl) propane Aggregation inhibitor 5 has a weight average molecular weight of 110,000. Polymerization inhibitor: p-hydroxyphenol
  • the near-infrared absorbing compounds pp-1, pp-2, pp-3, pp-4, pp-5, sq-1, and cy-1 described above are compounds that are soluble in acetone at 23 ° C. Therefore, the agglomerated size of the near-infrared absorbing compound corresponds to the perforated size in the film, and the smaller the perforated size, the smaller the agglomerated size of the near-infrared absorbing compound.
  • transmittance was measured in the wavelength range of 400 to 1,300 nm using an ultraviolet-visible near-infrared spectrophotometer U-4100 (manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation). .
  • the glass substrate on which the above film was formed was irradiated with a xenon lamp at 100,000 lux for 20 hours (equivalent to 2 million lux ⁇ h), and the transmittance of the film after irradiation with the xenon lamp was measured.
  • the transmittance change ( ⁇ T) was measured in the wavelength range of 400 to 1,300 nm before and after irradiation with the xenon lamp.
  • the light resistance was evaluated according to the following criteria based on the value with the largest transmittance change ( ⁇ T) in the entire measurement wavelength range. The smaller the value of ⁇ T, the better the light resistance.
  • Transmittance change ( ⁇ T)
  • the films of the examples were excellent in the shielding property of light in the near infrared region (near infrared), and the aggregate size of the near infrared absorbing compound was small. Further, the films of the examples were excellent in light resistance. On the other hand, the film of the comparative example could not achieve both the light shielding property in the near infrared region (near infrared) and the suppression of aggregation of the near infrared absorbing compound.
  • an infrared transmission filter excellent in spectral variability can be obtained by further blending a colorant that blocks visible light.
  • 110 Solid-state imaging device
  • 111 Near-infrared cut filter
  • 112 Color filter
  • 114 Infrared transmission filter
  • 115 Micro lens
  • 116 Flattening layer

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • Electromagnetism (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)
  • Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)
  • Compositions Of Macromolecular Compounds (AREA)
  • Solid State Image Pick-Up Elements (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are: a composition which is capable of producing a film that has excellent light dispersion in a near-infrared region, while being suppressed in aggregation of near-infrared absorbing compounds; a film; an optical filter; a laminate; a solid-state imaging element; an image display device; and an infrared sensor. This composition contains: a near-infrared absorbing compound which has a π-conjugated plane containing a monocyclic or fused aromatic ring, while having a maximum absorption wavelength within the wavelength range of 650-1,000 nm; and an aggregation inhibitor which has at least one ring selected from among aromatic hydrocarbon rings and heterocyclic rings, while having no maximum absorption wavelength within the wavelength range of 650-1,000 nm.

Description

組成物、膜、光学フィルタ、積層体、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置および赤外線センサComposition, film, optical filter, laminate, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and infrared sensor
 本発明は、組成物、膜、光学フィルタ、積層体、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置および赤外線センサに関する。 The present invention relates to a composition, a film, an optical filter, a laminate, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and an infrared sensor.
 顔料や染料などの色材を含む組成物を用いて、カラーフィルタや近赤外線カットフィルタなどの膜を製造することが行われている。 Films such as color filters and near-infrared cut filters have been manufactured using compositions containing color materials such as pigments and dyes.
 染料は、顔料に比べて分散などの手間を省略できるので、染料を用いた組成物は、組成物の製造の手間などが少ないなどの利点がある。 Since dyes can save time and effort for dispersion as compared to pigments, compositions using dyes have the advantage of reducing the time and effort for producing the composition.
 特許文献1には、有機溶剤への溶解性の高いフタロシアニン化合物と、カルボキシル基で置換されたピリジン環を有する化合物とを含む着色組成物を用いて、カラーフィルタを製造することが記載されている。特許文献1によれば、所定の置換基を有するフタロシアニン化合物(特定フタロシアニン化合物ともいう)と、カルボキシル基で置換されたピリジン環を有する化合物(特定ピリジン化合物)とを共存させることで、特定フタロシアニン化合物が会合体を形成して凝集することを抑制でき、輝度などに優れるカラーフィルタを製造できると記載されている。 Patent Document 1 describes that a color filter is produced using a coloring composition containing a phthalocyanine compound having high solubility in an organic solvent and a compound having a pyridine ring substituted with a carboxyl group. . According to Patent Document 1, a phthalocyanine compound having a predetermined substituent (also referred to as a specific phthalocyanine compound) and a compound having a pyridine ring substituted with a carboxyl group (specific pyridine compound) are allowed to coexist. Is said to be able to suppress the formation of aggregates and agglomeration, and to produce a color filter excellent in luminance and the like.
特開2015-72440号公報Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-72440
 近年において、波長650~1,000nmの範囲に吸収極大波長を有する近赤外線吸収化合物を含む組成物を用いて、近赤外線カットフィルタなどの光学フィルタを製造する試みがなされている。このような光学フィルタにおいて、近赤外領域の光の遮蔽性などの近赤外領域の分光のさらなる向上が近年望まれている。光学フィルタにおける近赤外領域の分光を向上させる方法の一つとして、膜中における近赤外線吸収化合物の濃度を高める方法がある。 In recent years, an attempt has been made to produce an optical filter such as a near-infrared cut filter using a composition containing a near-infrared absorbing compound having an absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm. In such an optical filter, further improvement in near-infrared spectrum such as light shielding property in the near-infrared region has been desired in recent years. One method for improving the near-infrared spectrum of an optical filter is to increase the concentration of a near-infrared absorbing compound in the film.
 しかしながら、本発明者らの検討によれば、近赤外線吸収化合物を含む組成物を用いて膜を形成した場合、膜の形成時に近赤外線吸収化合物が凝集しやすい傾向にあることが分かった。また、近赤外線吸収化合物の濃度を高めるに伴い、膜の形成時に近赤外線吸収化合物がより凝集しやすい傾向にあった。膜中の近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集物のサイズが大きくなると、膜をパターン形成した際に、膜中に存在する近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集物が、現像液などに溶解したり、パターン形成中に剥落などが生じやすくなり、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集物が存在していた箇所に、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集物のサイズの孔が生じる恐れがある。 However, according to the study by the present inventors, it has been found that when a film is formed using a composition containing a near-infrared absorbing compound, the near-infrared absorbing compound tends to aggregate when the film is formed. Further, as the concentration of the near-infrared absorbing compound was increased, the near-infrared absorbing compound tended to aggregate more easily during film formation. When the size of the aggregates of near-infrared absorbing compounds in the film increases, the aggregates of the near-infrared absorbing compounds present in the film dissolve in the developer or the like during pattern formation when the film is patterned. Peeling or the like is likely to occur, and there is a possibility that a hole having the size of the aggregate of the near infrared ray absorbing compound may be formed at a location where the aggregate of the near infrared ray absorbing compound was present.
 なお、特許文献1は、フタロシアニン化合物を含む着色組成物を用いて、カラーフィルタを製造することを目的とした出願であって、近赤外線吸収化合物についての記載や示唆はない。 Note that Patent Document 1 is an application intended to produce a color filter using a colored composition containing a phthalocyanine compound, and there is no description or suggestion of a near-infrared absorbing compound.
 よって、本発明の目的は、近赤外領域の分光に優れ、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集が抑制された膜を製造可能な組成物、膜、光学フィルタ、積層体、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置および赤外線センサを提供することにある。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a composition, a film, an optical filter, a laminate, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device that are capable of producing a film that is excellent in near-infrared spectroscopy and in which aggregation of near-infrared absorbing compounds is suppressed. And providing an infrared sensor.
 本発明者は、単環または縮合環の芳香族環を含むπ共役平面を有し、波長650~1,000nmの範囲に吸収極大波長を有する近赤外線吸収化合物について鋭意検討したところ、前述の近赤外線吸収化合物と、芳香族炭化水素環および複素環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を有し、波長650~1,000nmの範囲に吸収極大波長を有さない化合物とを併用することで、膜中における前述の近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集を抑制できることを見出し、本発明を完成するに至った。本発明は以下を提供する。
<1> 単環または縮合環の芳香族環を含むπ共役平面を有し、波長650~1,000nmの範囲に吸収極大波長を有する近赤外線吸収化合物と、
 芳香族炭化水素環および複素環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を有し、波長650~1,000nmの範囲に吸収極大波長を有さない凝集抑制剤とを含む、組成物。
<2> 凝集抑制剤は、ベンゼン環、ベンゼン環を含む縮合環および含窒素複素環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を含む、<1>に記載の組成物。
<3> 凝集抑制剤は、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、ピリジン環、キノリン環、イソキノリン環、イミダゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、ピラゾール環、チアゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、トリアゾール環、ベンゾトリアゾール環、オキサゾール環、ベンゾオキサゾール環、イミダゾリン環、ピラジン環、キノキサリン環、ピリミジン環、キナゾリン環、ピリダジン環、トリアジン環、ピロール環、インドール環、イソインドール環、フルオレン環およびカルバゾール環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を含む、<1>または<2>に記載の組成物。
<4> 近赤外線吸収化合物が有するπ共役平面は、単環または縮合環の芳香族環を2個以上含む、<1>~<3>のいずれかに記載の組成物。
<5> 近赤外線吸収化合物が、ピロロピロール化合物、シアニン化合物およびスクアリリウム化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種である、<1>~<4>のいずれかに記載の組成物。
<6> さらに、樹脂を含む、<1>~<5>のいずれかに記載の組成物。
<7> さらに、重合性化合物および光重合開始剤を含む、<1>~<6>のいずれかに記載の組成物。
<8> さらに、近赤外領域の光の少なくとも一部を透過し、かつ、可視領域の光を遮光する色材を含む、<1>~<7>のいずれかに記載の組成物。
<9> <1>~<8>のいずれかに記載の組成物を用いた、膜。
<10> <9>に記載の膜を有する、光学フィルタ。
<11> 光学フィルタが、近赤外線カットフィルタまたは赤外線透過フィルタである、<10>に記載の光学フィルタ。
<12> <9>に記載の膜の画素と、
 赤、緑、青、マゼンタ、黄、シアン、黒および無色から選ばれる少なくとも1種の画素とを有する、<10>または<11>に記載の光学フィルタ。
<13> <9>に記載の膜と、有彩色着色剤を含むカラーフィルタとを有する積層体。
<14> <9>に記載の膜を有する、固体撮像素子。
<15> <9>に記載の膜を有する、画像表示装置。
<16> <9>に記載の膜を有する、赤外線センサ。
The present inventor has conducted intensive studies on a near-infrared absorbing compound having a π-conjugated plane including a monocyclic or condensed aromatic ring and having an absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm. By using an infrared absorbing compound in combination with a compound having at least one ring selected from an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and a heterocyclic ring and having no absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm, It has been found that aggregation of the above-mentioned near-infrared absorbing compound can be suppressed, and the present invention has been completed. The present invention provides the following.
<1> a near-infrared absorbing compound having a π-conjugated plane including a monocyclic or condensed aromatic ring and having an absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm;
A composition comprising an aggregation inhibitor having at least one ring selected from an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and a heterocyclic ring and having no absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm.
<2> The composition according to <1>, wherein the aggregation inhibitor includes at least one ring selected from a benzene ring, a condensed ring including a benzene ring, and a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring.
<3> The aggregation inhibitor is a benzene ring, naphthalene ring, pyridine ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, imidazole ring, benzimidazole ring, pyrazole ring, thiazole ring, benzothiazole ring, triazole ring, benzotriazole ring, oxazole ring, Includes at least one ring selected from a benzoxazole ring, imidazoline ring, pyrazine ring, quinoxaline ring, pyrimidine ring, quinazoline ring, pyridazine ring, triazine ring, pyrrole ring, indole ring, isoindole ring, fluorene ring and carbazole ring <1> or <2>.
<4> The composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the π-conjugated plane of the near-infrared absorbing compound includes two or more monocyclic or condensed aromatic rings.
<5> The composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the near-infrared absorbing compound is at least one selected from a pyrrolopyrrole compound, a cyanine compound, and a squarylium compound.
<6> The composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, further comprising a resin.
<7> The composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, further comprising a polymerizable compound and a photopolymerization initiator.
<8> The composition according to any one of <1> to <7>, further comprising a colorant that transmits at least part of light in the near infrared region and shields light in the visible region.
<9> A film using the composition according to any one of <1> to <8>.
<10> An optical filter having the film according to <9>.
<11> The optical filter according to <10>, wherein the optical filter is a near-infrared cut filter or an infrared transmission filter.
<12> A pixel of the film according to <9>,
The optical filter according to <10> or <11>, having at least one pixel selected from red, green, blue, magenta, yellow, cyan, black, and colorless.
<13> A laminate having the film according to <9> and a color filter containing a chromatic colorant.
<14> A solid-state imaging device having the film according to <9>.
<15> An image display device having the film according to <9>.
<16> An infrared sensor having the film according to <9>.
 本発明によれば、近赤外領域の分光に優れ、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集が抑制された膜を製造可能な組成物、膜、光学フィルタ、積層体、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置および赤外線センサを提供することが可能になった。 According to the present invention, a composition, a film, an optical filter, a laminate, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and an infrared ray that are capable of producing a film excellent in near-infrared spectroscopy and suppressed from aggregation of near-infrared absorbing compounds. It became possible to provide a sensor.
赤外線センサの一実施形態を示す概略図である。It is the schematic which shows one Embodiment of an infrared sensor.
 以下において、本発明の内容について詳細に説明する。
 本明細書において、「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さない基(原子団)と共に置換基を有する基(原子団)をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。
 本明細書において、「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた描画も含む。また、露光に用いられる光としては、一般的に、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線または放射線が挙げられる。
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレートおよびメタクリレートを表し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリルおよびメタクリルを表し、「(メタ)アリル」は、アリルおよびメタリルを表し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルを表す。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量および数平均分子量は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)により測定したポリスチレン換算値として定義される。
 本明細書において、近赤外線とは、極大吸収波長領域が波長700~2,500nmの光(電磁波)をいう。
 本明細書において、「工程」との語は、独立した工程を表すだけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本明細書において、染料とは、溶剤に対して溶解する化合物を意味する。本発明に用いられる染料は、23℃のシクロペンタノン、シクロヘキサノン、および、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートから選ばれる少なくとも1種の溶剤100gに対する溶解度が、1g以上であることが好ましく、2g以上であることがより好ましく、5g以上であることがさらに好ましい。
 本明細書において、顔料とは、溶剤に対して溶解しにくい化合物を意味する。例えば、顔料は、23℃のシクロペンタノン、シクロヘキサノン、および、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートのいずれかの溶剤100gに対する溶解度が、0.1g以下であることが好ましく、0.01g以下であることがより好ましい。
Hereinafter, the contents of the present invention will be described in detail.
In the present specification, a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
In the notation of a group (atomic group) in the present specification, the notation in which neither substitution nor substitution is described includes a group (atomic group) having a substituent together with a group (atomic group) having no substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In this specification, “exposure” includes not only exposure using light, but also drawing using particle beams such as an electron beam and an ion beam, unless otherwise specified. The light used for exposure generally includes active rays or radiation such as an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
In the present specification, “(meth) acrylate” represents acrylate and methacrylate, “(meth) acryl” represents acryl and methacryl, “(meth) allyl” represents allyl and methallyl, and “(meth) ) "Acryloyl" represents acryloyl and methacryloyl.
In this specification, a weight average molecular weight and a number average molecular weight are defined as a polystyrene conversion value measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
In the present specification, near-infrared light refers to light (electromagnetic wave) having a maximum absorption wavelength region of 700 to 2,500 nm.
In this specification, the term “process” not only indicates an independent process, but also if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes, include.
In this specification, a dye means a compound that dissolves in a solvent. The dye used in the present invention has a solubility in 100 g of at least one solvent selected from cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate at 23 ° C., preferably 1 g or more. Is more preferably 5 g or more.
In the present specification, the pigment means a compound that is difficult to dissolve in a solvent. For example, the pigment preferably has a solubility in 100 g of any of cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate at 23 ° C. of 0.1 g or less, more preferably 0.01 g or less. preferable.
<組成物>
 本発明の組成物は、
 単環または縮合環の芳香族環を含むπ共役平面を有し、波長650~1,000nmの範囲に吸収極大波長を有する、近赤外線吸収化合物と、
 芳香族炭化水素環および複素環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を有し、波長650~1,000nmの範囲に吸収極大波長を有さない凝集抑制剤とを含む。
 本発明の組成物によれば、近赤外領域の分光に優れ、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集が抑制された膜を製造することができる。また、本発明によれば、近赤外線吸収化合物の濃度を高めても、膜中における近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集を効果的に抑制することができる。このため、本発明によれば、近赤外線吸収化合物の濃度を高めつつ、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集が抑制された膜を効果的に製造することができる。
 このような効果が得られるメカニズムは、詳細な理由は不明であるが、凝集抑制剤の芳香族炭化水素環および/または複素環と、近赤外線吸収化合物のπ共役平面における芳香族環との相互作用によるものと推測される。すなわち、前述の相互作用により、膜中において、近赤外線吸収化合物のJ会合体の会合性を抑制しつつ、近赤外線吸収化合物のJ会合性が適度に保持され、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集サイズが小さくなったためであると推測される。このため、本発明の組成物を用いることで、近赤外領域の分光に優れ、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集が抑制された膜を製造することができる。
 以下、本発明の組成物の各成分について説明する。
<Composition>
The composition of the present invention comprises:
A near-infrared absorbing compound having a π-conjugated plane containing a monocyclic or condensed aromatic ring and having an absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm;
And an aggregation inhibitor having at least one ring selected from an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and a heterocyclic ring and having no absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm.
According to the composition of the present invention, it is possible to produce a film that is excellent in near-infrared spectrum and in which aggregation of the near-infrared absorbing compound is suppressed. Moreover, according to this invention, even if the density | concentration of a near-infrared absorption compound is raised, aggregation of the near-infrared absorption compound in a film | membrane can be suppressed effectively. For this reason, according to this invention, the film | membrane with which aggregation of the near-infrared absorption compound was suppressed can be manufactured effectively, raising the density | concentration of a near-infrared absorption compound.
Although the detailed reason for the mechanism for obtaining such an effect is unknown, the mutual interaction between the aromatic hydrocarbon ring and / or the heterocyclic ring of the aggregation inhibitor and the aromatic ring in the π conjugate plane of the near-infrared absorbing compound. Presumably due to action. That is, the above-described interaction suppresses the association property of the J-aggregate of the near-infrared absorbing compound in the film, while appropriately maintaining the J-association property of the near-infrared absorbing compound, thereby reducing the aggregate size of the near-infrared absorbing compound. This is presumed to be due to the small size. Therefore, by using the composition of the present invention, it is possible to produce a film that is excellent in near-infrared spectrum and in which aggregation of near-infrared absorbing compounds is suppressed.
Hereinafter, each component of the composition of the present invention will be described.
<<近赤外線吸収化合物>>
 本発明の組成物は、単環または縮合環の芳香族環を含むπ共役平面を有し、波長650~1,000nmの範囲に吸収極大波長を有する近赤外線吸収化合物を含む。なお、本発明において、芳香族環は、芳香族炭化水素環および芳香族複素環を含む。
<< Near-infrared absorbing compound >>
The composition of the present invention includes a near-infrared absorbing compound having a π-conjugated plane including a monocyclic or condensed aromatic ring and having an absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm. In the present invention, the aromatic ring includes an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocyclic ring.
 本発明において、近赤外線吸収化合物は、顔料であってもよく、染料であってもよいが、染料であることが好ましい。染料タイプの近赤外線吸収化合物を用いた場合において、本発明の効果が特に顕著に得られる。 In the present invention, the near-infrared absorbing compound may be a pigment or a dye, but is preferably a dye. In the case where a dye type near-infrared absorbing compound is used, the effect of the present invention is particularly remarkably obtained.
 本発明において、近赤外線吸収化合物が有する芳香族環としては、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、ペンタレン環、インデン環、アズレン環、ヘプタレン環、インダセン環、ペリレン環、ペンタセン環、クアテリレン環、アセナフテン環、フェナントレン環、アントラセン環、ナフタセン環、クリセン環、トリフェニレン環、フルオレン環、ピリジン環、キノリン環、イソキノリン環、イミダゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、ピラゾール環、チアゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、トリアゾール環、ベンゾトリアゾール環、オキサゾール環、ベンゾオキサゾール環、イミダゾリン環、ピラジン環、キノキサリン環、ピリミジン環、キナゾリン環、ピリダジン環、トリアジン環、ピロール環、インドール環、イソインドール環、カルバゾール環、および、これらの環を有する縮合環が挙げられる。 In the present invention, the aromatic ring of the near-infrared absorbing compound includes a benzene ring, naphthalene ring, pentalene ring, indene ring, azulene ring, heptalene ring, indacene ring, perylene ring, pentacene ring, quaterylene ring, acenaphthene ring, phenanthrene. Ring, anthracene ring, naphthacene ring, chrysene ring, triphenylene ring, fluorene ring, pyridine ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, imidazole ring, benzimidazole ring, pyrazole ring, thiazole ring, benzothiazole ring, triazole ring, benzotriazole ring, Oxazole ring, benzoxazole ring, imidazoline ring, pyrazine ring, quinoxaline ring, pyrimidine ring, quinazoline ring, pyridazine ring, triazine ring, pyrrole ring, indole ring, isoindole ring, carbazole ring, And fused ring having these rings.
 近赤外線吸収化合物が有するπ共役平面は、単環または縮合環の芳香族環を2個以上含むことが好ましく、3個以上含むことがより好ましく、4個以上含むことがさらに好ましく、5個以上含むことが特に好ましい。上限は、100個以下が好ましく、50個以下がより好ましく、30個以下がさらに好ましい。 The π-conjugated plane of the near-infrared absorbing compound preferably contains 2 or more monocyclic or condensed aromatic rings, more preferably 3 or more, further preferably 4 or more, and more preferably 5 or more. It is particularly preferable to include it. The upper limit is preferably 100 or less, more preferably 50 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less.
 本発明において、近赤外線吸収化合物の極大吸収波長は、660~1,000nmの範囲に有することが好ましく、670~1,000nmの範囲に有することがより好ましく、700~1,000nmの範囲に有することがさらに好ましい。 In the present invention, the maximum absorption wavelength of the near-infrared absorbing compound is preferably in the range of 660 to 1,000 nm, more preferably in the range of 670 to 1,000 nm, and in the range of 700 to 1,000 nm. More preferably.
 なお、本明細書において、「波長650~1,000nmの範囲に極大吸収波長を有する」とは、近赤外線吸収化合物の溶液での吸収スペクトルにおいて、波長650~1,000nmの範囲に最大の吸光度を示す波長を有することを意味する。近赤外線吸収化合物の溶液での吸収スペクトルの測定に用いる測定溶媒としては、クロロホルム、メタノール、ジメチルスルホキシド、酢酸エチル、テトラヒドロフランが挙げられる。クロロホルムで溶解する化合物の場合は、クロロホルムを測定溶媒として用いる。クロロホルムで溶解しない化合物の場合は、メタノールを用いる。また、クロロホルムおよびメタノールのいずれにも溶解しない場合はジメチルスルホキシドを用いる。 In this specification, “having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm” means the maximum absorbance in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm in the absorption spectrum of the near-infrared absorbing compound solution. It means that it has the wavelength which shows. Examples of the measurement solvent used for measuring the absorption spectrum of the near-infrared absorbing compound solution include chloroform, methanol, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl acetate, and tetrahydrofuran. In the case of a compound dissolved in chloroform, chloroform is used as a measurement solvent. For compounds that do not dissolve in chloroform, use methanol. Also, dimethyl sulfoxide is used when it does not dissolve in either chloroform or methanol.
 本発明において、近赤外線吸収化合物は、波長500nmにおける吸光度A1と、極大吸収波長における吸光度A2との比率A1/A2が、0.08以下であることが好ましく、0.04以下であることがより好ましい。この態様によれば、本発明の組成物から可視透明性と赤外線遮蔽性に優れた膜を製造しやすい。なお、波長500nmにおける吸光度A1、および、極大吸収波長における吸光度A2は、近赤外線吸収化合物の溶液での吸収スペクトルから求めた値である。 In the present invention, in the near-infrared absorbing compound, the ratio A1 / A2 between the absorbance A1 at a wavelength of 500 nm and the absorbance A2 at the maximum absorption wavelength is preferably 0.08 or less, more preferably 0.04 or less. preferable. According to this aspect, it is easy to produce a film having excellent visible transparency and infrared shielding properties from the composition of the present invention. The absorbance A1 at a wavelength of 500 nm and the absorbance A2 at the maximum absorption wavelength are values obtained from an absorption spectrum of a near-infrared absorbing compound solution.
 本発明において、近赤外線吸収化合物は、極大吸収波長の異なる少なくとも2種の化合物を用いることも好ましい。この態様によれば、膜の吸収スペクトルの波形が、1種類の近赤外線吸収化合物を使用した場合に比べて広がり、幅広い波長範囲の近赤外線を遮蔽することができる。極大吸収波長の異なる少なくとも2種の化合物を用いる場合、波長650~1,000nmの範囲に極大吸収波長を有する第1の近赤外線吸収化合物と、第1の近赤外線吸収化合物の極大吸収波長よりも短波長側であって、波長650~1000nmの範囲に極大吸収波長を有する第2の近赤外線吸収化合物とを少なくとも含み、第1の近赤外線吸収化合物の極大吸収波長と、第2の近赤外線吸収化合物の極大吸収波長との差が、1~150nmであることが好ましい。 In the present invention, it is also preferable to use at least two compounds having different maximum absorption wavelengths as the near-infrared absorbing compound. According to this aspect, the waveform of the absorption spectrum of the film is wider than when one kind of near-infrared absorbing compound is used, and near-infrared rays in a wide wavelength range can be shielded. When using at least two compounds having different maximum absorption wavelengths, the first near-infrared absorbing compound having the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm, and the maximum absorption wavelength of the first near-infrared absorbing compound At least a second near-infrared absorbing compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength range of 650 to 1000 nm, the maximum absorption wavelength of the first near-infrared absorption compound, and the second near-infrared absorption The difference from the maximum absorption wavelength of the compound is preferably 1 to 150 nm.
 本発明において、近赤外線吸収化合物は、ピロロピロール化合物、シアニン化合物、スクアリリウム化合物、フタロシアニン化合物、ナフタロシアニン化合物、クアテリレン化合物、メロシアニン化合物、クロコニウム化合物、オキソノール化合物、ジイモニウム化合物、ジチオール化合物、トリアリールメタン化合物、ピロメテン化合物、アゾメチン化合物、アントラキノン化合物およびジベンゾフラノン化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましく、ピロロピロール化合物、シアニン化合物、スクアリリウム化合物、フタロシアニン化合物、ナフタロシアニン化合物およびクアテリレン化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種がより好ましく、ピロロピロール化合物、シアニン化合物およびスクアリリウム化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種がさらに好ましく、ピロロピロール化合物が特に好ましい。
 ピロロピロール化合物としては、例えば、特開2009-263614号公報の段落番号0016~0058に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。フタロシアニン化合物としては、オキシチタニウムフタロシアニン顔料などが挙げられる。フタロシアニン化合物、ナフタロシアニン化合物、イモニウム化合物、シアニン化合物、スクアリリウム化合物およびクロコニウム化合物として、特開2010-111750号公報の段落番号0010~0081に記載の化合物を使用してもよく、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、シアニン化合物は、例えば、「機能性色素、大河原信/松岡賢/北尾悌次郎/平嶋恒亮・著、講談社サイエンティフィック」を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
In the present invention, the near-infrared absorbing compound is a pyrrolopyrrole compound, cyanine compound, squarylium compound, phthalocyanine compound, naphthalocyanine compound, quaterylene compound, merocyanine compound, croconium compound, oxonol compound, diimonium compound, dithiol compound, triarylmethane compound, At least one selected from a pyromethene compound, an azomethine compound, an anthraquinone compound and a dibenzofuranone compound is preferable, and at least one selected from a pyrrolopyrrole compound, a cyanine compound, a squarylium compound, a phthalocyanine compound, a naphthalocyanine compound and a quaterrylene compound is more preferable. At least one selected from a pyrrolopyrrole compound, a cyanine compound, and a squarylium compound But more preferably, pyrrolo-pyrrole compounds are particularly preferred.
Examples of the pyrrolopyrrole compound include compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0016 to 0058 of JP-A-2009-263614. Examples of the phthalocyanine compound include oxytitanium phthalocyanine pigments. As the phthalocyanine compound, naphthalocyanine compound, imonium compound, cyanine compound, squarylium compound, and croconium compound, the compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0010 to 0081 of JP 2010-1111750 A may be used. Incorporated into. In addition, as for the cyanine compound, for example, “functional pigment, Nobu Okawara / Ken Matsuoka / Kojiro Kitao / Kensuke Hirashima, Kodansha Scientific”, the contents of which are incorporated herein. .
(ピロロピロール化合物)
 近赤外線吸収化合物として用いるピロロピロール化合物としては、下記式(I)で表される化合物が好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
 式(I)中、AおよびAは、それぞれ独立にヘテロアリール基を表し、
 BおよびBは、それぞれ独立に-BR基を表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に置換基を表し、RとRは互いに結合して環を形成してよく、
 CおよびCは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 DおよびDは、それぞれ独立に置換基を表す。
(Pyrrolopyrrole compound)
As the pyrrolopyrrole compound used as the near-infrared absorbing compound, a compound represented by the following formula (I) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
In formula (I), A 1 and A 2 each independently represent a heteroaryl group,
B 1 and B 2 each independently represent a —BR 1 R 2 group, R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring ,
C 1 and C 2 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group,
D 1 and D 2 each independently represent a substituent.
 式(I)において、AおよびAは、それぞれ独立に、ヘテロアリール基を表す。AとAは、同一の基であってもよく、異なる基であってもよい。AとAは、同一の基であることが好ましい。
 ヘテロアリール基は、単環、または、縮合環が好ましく、単環、または、縮合数が2~8の縮合環がより好ましく、単環、または、縮合数が2~4の縮合環がさらに好ましい。ヘテロアリール基を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基を構成するヘテロ原子は、窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基を構成する炭素原子の数は3~30が好ましく、3~18がより好ましく、3~12がさらに好ましく、3~10が特に好ましい。ヘテロアリール基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。
In formula (I), A 1 and A 2 each independently represents a heteroaryl group. A 1 and A 2 may be the same group or different groups. A 1 and A 2 are preferably the same group.
The heteroaryl group is preferably a single ring or a condensed ring, more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having a condensation number of 2 to 8, more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having a condensation number of 2 to 4. . The number of heteroatoms constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3. The hetero atom constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. The number of carbon atoms constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, still more preferably 3 to 12, and particularly preferably 3 to 10. The heteroaryl group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
 ヘテロアリール基は、下記式(A-1)で表される基、および、下記式(A-2)で表される基が好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
The heteroaryl group is preferably a group represented by the following formula (A-1) and a group represented by the following formula (A-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 式(A-1)において、Xは、それぞれ独立に、O、S、NRX1またはCRX2X3を表し、RX1~RX3は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または置換基を表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または置換基を表し、RとRは、互いに結合して環を形成してよい。*は、式(I)との結合位置を表す。
 R、RおよびRX1~RX3が表す置換基は、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、ヘテロアリールオキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、アミノ基、アシルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、ヘテロアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルホニルアミノ基、スルファモイル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロアリールチオ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、ヘテロアリールスルホニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、ヘテロアリールスルフィニル基、ウレイド基、リン酸アミド基、メルカプト基、スルホ基、カルボキシル基、ニトロ基、ヒドロキサム酸基、スルフィノ基、ヒドラジノ基、イミノ基、シリル基、ヒドロキシル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基などが挙げられ、アルキル基、アリール基およびハロゲン原子が好ましい。
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~8がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有してもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、上述した基が挙げられ、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アリール基等が挙げられる。
 アリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12がさらに好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有してもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、上述した基が挙げられ、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基等が挙げられる。
 ハロゲン原子は、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子などが挙げられる。
In the formula (A-1), X 1 each independently represents O, S, NR X1 or CR X2 R X3 , R X1 to R X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 1 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 3 and R 4 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. * Represents a bonding position with the formula (I).
The substituents represented by R 3 , R 4 and R X1 to R X3 are alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, heteroaryloxy groups, acyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, aryls. Oxycarbonyl group, heteroaryloxycarbonyl group, acyloxy group, amino group, acylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, heteroaryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfonylamino group, sulfamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylthio group, Arylthio group, heteroarylthio group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, heteroarylsulfonyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, heteroarylsulfinyl group, urea Group, phosphoric acid amide group, mercapto group, sulfo group, carboxyl group, nitro group, hydroxamic acid group, sulfino group, hydrazino group, imino group, silyl group, hydroxyl group, halogen atom, cyano group, etc. Groups, aryl groups and halogen atoms are preferred.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched. The alkyl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the groups described above, and examples thereof include a halogen atom and an aryl group.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the groups described above, and examples include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.
Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
 RとRが結合して形成する環は、芳香族環が好ましい。RとRとが環を形成する場合、式(A-1)で表される基として、式(A-1-1)で表される基、式(A-1-2)で表される基などが挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 式中、Xは、それぞれ独立に、O、S、NRX1またはCRX2X3を表し、RX1~RX3は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または置換基を表し、R101~R109は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または置換基を表す。*は、式(I)との結合位置を表す。
The ring formed by combining R 3 and R 4 is preferably an aromatic ring. When R 3 and R 4 form a ring, the group represented by the formula (A-1) is a group represented by the formula (A-1-1) or a group represented by the formula (A-1-2). And the like.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
In the formula, each of X 1 independently represents O, S, NR X1 or CR X2 R X3 , each of R X1 to R X3 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 101 to R 109 represent Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. * Represents a bonding position with the formula (I).
 式(A-2)において、Y~Yは、それぞれ独立に、NまたはCRY1を表し、Y~Yの少なくとも2つはCRY1であり、RY1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、隣接するRY1同士は互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。*は、式(I)との結合位置を表す。
 RY1が表す置換基としては、上述した置換基が挙げられ、アルキル基、アリール基およびハロゲン原子が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~8がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有してもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基が挙げられ、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アリール基等が挙げられる。
 アリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12がさらに好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有してもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基が挙げられ、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基等が挙げられる。
 ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子などが挙げられる。
In formula (A-2), Y 1 to Y 4 each independently represent N or CR Y1 , at least two of Y 1 to Y 4 are CR Y1 , and R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent And adjacent R Y1 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. * Represents a bonding position with the formula (I).
Examples of the substituent represented by R Y1 include the substituents described above, and an alkyl group, an aryl group, and a halogen atom are preferable. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched. The alkyl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the substituents described above, and examples thereof include a halogen atom and an aryl group.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents, and examples thereof include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.
Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
 Y~Yの少なくとも2つはCRY1であり、隣接するRY1同士は互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。隣接するRY1同士が結合して形成する環は、芳香族環が好ましい。隣接するRY1同士が環を形成する場合、式(A-2)で表される基として、式(A-2-1)~(A-2-5)で表される基などが挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 式中、R201~R227は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または置換基を表し、*は、式(I)との結合位置を表す。
At least two of Y 1 to Y 4 are CR Y1 , and adjacent R Y1 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. The ring formed by combining adjacent R Y1 is preferably an aromatic ring. When adjacent R Y1 form a ring, examples of the group represented by the formula (A-2) include groups represented by the formulas (A-2-1) to (A-2-5). .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
In the formula, R 201 to R 227 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and * represents a bonding position with the formula (I).
 AおよびAの具体例としては、以下が挙げられる。以下において、Buはブチル基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Specific examples of A 1 and A 2 include the following. In the following, Bu represents a butyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 式(I)において、BおよびBは、それぞれ独立に-BR基を表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に置換基を表す。RとRは互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。置換基としては、上述したAおよびAで説明した基が挙げられ、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基が好ましく、ハロゲン原子、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基がより好ましく、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基がさらに好ましい。RとRは同一の基であってもよく、異なる基であってもよい。RとRは、同一の基であることが好ましい。また、BとBは同一の基であってもよく、異なる基であってもよい。BとBは同一の基であることが好ましい。 In formula (I), B 1 and B 2 each independently represent a —BR 1 R 2 group, and R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a substituent. R 1 and R 2 may combine with each other to form a ring. Examples of the substituent include the groups described above for A 1 and A 2. A halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group is preferable, and a halogen atom, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group is preferable. Are more preferable, and an aryl group or a heteroaryl group is more preferable. R 1 and R 2 may be the same group or different groups. R 1 and R 2 are preferably the same group. B 1 and B 2 may be the same group or different groups. B 1 and B 2 are preferably the same group.
 ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子が好ましく、フッ素原子が特に好ましい。
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~40が好ましい。下限は、例えば、3以上がより好ましい。上限は、例えば、30以下がより好ましく、25以下がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。
 アルケニル基の炭素数は、2~40が好ましい。下限は、例えば、3以上がより好ましく、5以上がさらに好ましく、8以上が一層好ましく、10以上が特に好ましい。上限は、35以下がより好ましく、30以下がさらに好ましい。アルケニル基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。
 アルコキシ基の炭素数は、1~40が好ましい。下限は、例えば、3以上がより好ましい。上限は、例えば、30以下がより好ましく、25以下がさらに好ましい。アルコキシ基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。
 アリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子などが挙げられる。これらの詳細については、前述したものが挙げられる。
 ヘテロアリール基は、単環であっても多環であってもよい。ヘテロアリール基を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基を構成するヘテロ原子は、窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基を構成する炭素原子の数は3~30が好ましく、3~18がより好ましく、3~12がさらに好ましく、3~5が特に好ましい。ヘテロアリール基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子などが挙げられる。これらの詳細については、前述したものが挙げられる。
As the halogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom are preferable, and a fluorine atom is particularly preferable.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 40 carbon atoms. For example, the lower limit is more preferably 3 or more. For example, the upper limit is more preferably 30 or less, and further preferably 25 or less. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched.
The alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 40 carbon atoms. For example, the lower limit is preferably 3 or more, more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and particularly preferably 10 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less. The alkenyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The alkoxy group preferably has 1 to 40 carbon atoms. For example, the lower limit is more preferably 3 or more. For example, the upper limit is more preferably 30 or less, and further preferably 25 or less. The alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, and a halogen atom. About these details, what was mentioned above is mentioned.
The heteroaryl group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. The number of heteroatoms constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3. The hetero atom constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. The number of carbon atoms constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, still more preferably 3 to 12, and particularly preferably 3 to 5. The heteroaryl group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The heteroaryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, and a halogen atom. About these details, what was mentioned above is mentioned.
 -BR基のRとRは、互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。例えば、下記(B-1)~(B-4)に示す構造などが挙げられる。以下において、Rは置換基を表し、Ra1~Ra4は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または置換基を表し、m1~m3は、それぞれ独立に、0~4の整数を表し、*は、式(I)との結合位置を表す。RおよびRa1~Ra4が表す置換基としては、RおよびRで説明した置換基が挙げられ、ハロゲン原子およびアルキル基が好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
R 1 and R 2 of the —BR 1 R 2 group may be bonded to each other to form a ring. Examples thereof include the structures shown in the following (B-1) to (B-4). In the following, R represents a substituent, R a1 to R a4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, m1 to m3 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 4, and * represents a formula This represents the binding position with (I). Examples of the substituent represented by R and R a1 to R a4 include the substituents described for R 1 and R 2 , and a halogen atom and an alkyl group are preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 BおよびBの具体例としては、以下が挙げられる。以下において、Meはメチル基を表し、Buはブチル基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Specific examples of B 1 and B 2 include the following. In the following, Me represents a methyl group and Bu represents a butyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 式(I)において、CおよびCは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロアリール基を表す。CとCは、同一の基であってもよく、異なる基であってもよい。CとCは、同一の基であることが好ましい。CおよびCは、それぞれ独立に、アリール基、またはヘテロアリール基が好ましく、アリール基がより好ましい。
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~40が好ましく、1~30がより好ましく、1~25が特に好ましい。アルキル基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、分岐が特に好ましい。
 アリール基は、炭素数6~20のアリール基が好ましく、炭素数6~12のアリール基がより好ましい。フェニル基またはナフチル基が特に好ましい。
 ヘテロアリール基は、単環であっても多環であってもよい。ヘテロアリール基を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基を構成するヘテロ原子は、窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基を構成する炭素原子の数は3~30が好ましく、3~18がより好ましく、3~12がさらに好ましい。
In formula (I), C 1 and C 2 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group. C 1 and C 2 may be the same group or different groups. C 1 and C 2 are preferably the same group. C 1 and C 2 are each independently preferably an aryl group or a heteroaryl group, and more preferably an aryl group.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 25 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, particularly preferably branched.
The aryl group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. A phenyl group or a naphthyl group is particularly preferred.
The heteroaryl group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. The number of heteroatoms constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3. The hetero atom constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. The number of carbon atoms constituting the heteroaryl group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, and still more preferably 3 to 12.
 上述したアルキル基、アリール基およびヘテロアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基を有していることが好ましい。
 置換基としては、酸素原子を含んでもよい炭化水素基、アミノ基、アシルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、ヘテロアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルホニルアミノ基、スルファモイル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロアリールチオ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、ヘテロアリールスルホニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、ヘテロアリールスルフィニル基、ウレイド基、リン酸アミド基、メルカプト基、スルホ基、カルボキシル基、ニトロ基、ヒドロキサム酸基、スルフィノ基、ヒドラジノ基、イミノ基、シリル基、ヒドロキシル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基等が挙げられる。
The alkyl group, aryl group, and heteroaryl group described above may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. It preferably has a substituent.
Examples of the substituent include a hydrocarbon group which may contain an oxygen atom, an amino group, an acylamino group, an alkoxycarbonylamino group, an aryloxycarbonylamino group, a heteroaryloxycarbonylamino group, a sulfonylamino group, a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkylthio group. Group, arylthio group, heteroarylthio group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, heteroarylsulfonyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, heteroarylsulfinyl group, ureido group, phosphoric acid amide group, mercapto group, sulfo group, Examples thereof include a carboxyl group, a nitro group, a hydroxamic acid group, a sulfino group, a hydrazino group, an imino group, a silyl group, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, and a cyano group.
 ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子などが挙げられる。
 炭化水素基としては、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基などが挙げられる。
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~40が好ましい。下限は、3以上がより好ましく、5以上がさらに好ましく、8以上が一層好ましく、10以上が特に好ましい。上限は、35以下がより好ましく、30以下がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、分岐が特に好ましい。分岐のアルキル基の炭素数は、3~40が好ましい。下限は、例えば、5以上がより好ましく、8以上がさらに好ましく、10以上が一層好ましい。上限は、35以下がより好ましく、30以下がさらに好ましい。分岐のアルキル基の分岐数は、例えば、2~10が好ましく、2~8がより好ましい。
 アルケニル基の炭素数は、2~40が好ましい。下限は、例えば、3以上がより好ましく、5以上がさらに好ましく、8以上が一層好ましく、10以上が特に好ましい。上限は、35以下がより好ましく、30以下がさらに好ましい。アルケニル基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、分岐が特に好ましい。分岐のアルケニル基の炭素数は、3~40が好ましい。下限は、例えば、5以上がより好ましく、8以上がさらに好ましく、10以上が一層好ましい。上限は、35以下がより好ましく、30以下がさらに好ましい。分岐のアルケニル基の分岐数は、2~10が好ましく、2~8がより好ましい。
 アリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12がさらに好ましい。
 酸素原子を含む炭化水素基としては、-L-Rx1で表される基が挙げられる。
 Lは、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-(ORx2-または-(Rx2O)-を表す。Rx1は、アルキル基、アルケニル基またはアリール基を表す。Rx2は、アルキレン基またはアリーレン基を表す。mは2以上の整数を表し、m個のRx2は、同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
 Lは、-O-、-(ORx2-または-(Rx2O)-が好ましく、-O-がより好ましい。
 Rx1が表すアルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基は上述したものと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。Rx1は、アルキル基またはアルケニル基が好ましく、アルキル基がより好ましい。
 Rx2が表すアルキレン基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~5がさらに好ましい。アルキレン基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。Rx2が表すアリーレン基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。Rx2はアルキレン基が好ましい。
 mは2以上の整数を表し、2~20が好ましく、2~10がより好ましい。
Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
Examples of the hydrocarbon group include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, and an aryl group.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 40 carbon atoms. The lower limit is more preferably 3 or more, further preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and particularly preferably 10 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, particularly preferably branched. The branched alkyl group preferably has 3 to 40 carbon atoms. For example, the lower limit is more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and still more preferably 10 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less. The number of branches of the branched alkyl group is preferably 2 to 10, for example, and more preferably 2 to 8.
The alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 40 carbon atoms. For example, the lower limit is preferably 3 or more, more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and particularly preferably 10 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less. The alkenyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, particularly preferably branched. The branched alkenyl group preferably has 3 to 40 carbon atoms. For example, the lower limit is more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and still more preferably 10 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less. The number of branches of the branched alkenyl group is preferably 2 to 10, and more preferably 2 to 8.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
Examples of the hydrocarbon group containing an oxygen atom include a group represented by -LR x1 .
L represents —O—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, — (OR x2 ) m — or — (R x2 O) m —. R x1 represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, or an aryl group. R x2 represents an alkylene group or an arylene group. m represents an integer of 2 or more, and the m R x2 may be the same or different.
L is preferably —O—, — (OR x2 ) m — or — (R x2 O) m —, more preferably —O—.
The alkyl group, alkenyl group and aryl group represented by R x1 have the same meanings as described above, and the preferred ranges are also the same. R x1 is preferably an alkyl group or an alkenyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group.
The alkylene group represented by R x2 preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms of the arylene group represented by R x2 is preferably 6 to 20, and more preferably 6 to 12. R x2 is preferably an alkylene group.
m represents an integer of 2 or more, preferably 2 to 20, and more preferably 2 to 10.
 アルキル基、アリール基およびヘテロアリール基が有してもよい置換基は、分岐アルキル構造を有する基が好ましい。また、置換基は、酸素原子を含んでもよい炭化水素基が好ましく、酸素原子を含む炭化水素基がより好ましい。酸素原子を含む炭化水素基は、-O-Rx1で表される基が好ましい。Rx1は、アルキル基またはアルケニル基が好ましく、アルキル基がより好ましく、分岐のアルキル基が特に好ましい。すなわち、置換基は、アルコキシ基がより好ましく、分岐のアルコキシ基が特に好ましい。置換基が、アルコキシ基であることにより、耐熱性および耐光性にすぐれた膜が得られやすい。アルコキシ基の炭素数は、1~40が好ましい。下限は、例えば、3以上がより好ましく、5以上がさらに好ましく、8以上が一層好ましく、10以上が特に好ましい。上限は、35以下がより好ましく、30以下がさらに好ましい。アルコキシ基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、分岐が特に好ましい。分岐のアルコキシ基の炭素数は、3~40が好ましい。下限は、例えば、5以上がより好ましく、8以上がさらに好ましく、10以上が一層好ましい。上限は、35以下がより好ましく、30以下がさらに好ましい。分岐のアルコキシ基の分岐数は、2~10が好ましく、2~8がより好ましい。 The substituent which the alkyl group, aryl group and heteroaryl group may have is preferably a group having a branched alkyl structure. The substituent is preferably a hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom, and more preferably a hydrocarbon group containing an oxygen atom. The hydrocarbon group containing an oxygen atom is preferably a group represented by —O—R x1 . R x1 is preferably an alkyl group or an alkenyl group, more preferably an alkyl group, and particularly preferably a branched alkyl group. That is, the substituent is more preferably an alkoxy group, and particularly preferably a branched alkoxy group. When the substituent is an alkoxy group, a film having excellent heat resistance and light resistance can be easily obtained. The alkoxy group preferably has 1 to 40 carbon atoms. For example, the lower limit is preferably 3 or more, more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and particularly preferably 10 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less. The alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, particularly preferably branched. The number of carbon atoms of the branched alkoxy group is preferably 3 to 40. For example, the lower limit is more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and still more preferably 10 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less. The number of branched alkoxy groups is preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 8.
 CおよびCの具体例としては、以下が挙げられる。以下において、Meはメチル基を表し、Buはブチル基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Specific examples of C 1 and C 2 include the following. In the following, Me represents a methyl group and Bu represents a butyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 式(I)において、DおよびDは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を表す。DとDは、同一の基であってもよく、異なる基であってもよい。DとDは、同一の基であることが好ましい。
 置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、ヘテロアリールオキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、アミノ基、アシルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、ヘテロアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルホニルアミノ基、スルファモイル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロアリールチオ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、ヘテロアリールスルホニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、ヘテロアリールスルフィニル基、ウレイド基、リン酸アミド基、メルカプト基、スルホ基、カルボキシル基、ニトロ基、ヒドロキサム酸基、スルフィノ基、ヒドラジノ基、イミノ基、シリル基、ヒドロキシル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基などが挙げられる。DおよびDは、電子求引性基が好ましい。
In formula (I), D 1 and D 2 each independently represent a substituent. D 1 and D 2 may be the same group or different groups. D 1 and D 2 are preferably the same group.
Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heteroaryloxycarbonyl group, Acyloxy group, amino group, acylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, heteroaryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfonylamino group, sulfamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heteroarylthio group, alkylsulfonyl Group, arylsulfonyl group, heteroarylsulfonyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, heteroarylsulfinyl group, ureido group, phosphoric acid amide group, Mercapto group, a sulfo group, a carboxyl group, a nitro group, a hydroxamic acid group, sulfino group, a hydrazino group, an imino group, a silyl group, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, and a cyano group. D 1 and D 2 are preferably electron withdrawing groups.
 ハメット(Hammett)の置換基定数σ値(シグマパラ値)が正の置換基は、電子求引性基として作用する。本発明においては、ハメットのσ値が0.2以上の置換基を電子求引性基として例示することができる。置換基のσ値は、好ましくは0.25以上であり、より好ましくは0.3以上であり、特に好ましくは0.35以上である。上限は特に制限はないが、好ましくは0.80以下である。電子求引性基の具体例としては、シアノ基(0.66)、カルボキシル基(-COOH:0.45)、アルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、-COOMe:0.45)、アリールオキシカルボニル基(例えば、-COOPh:0.44)、カルバモイル基(例えば、-CONH:0.36)、アルキルカルボニル基(例えば、-COMe:0.50)、アリールカルボニル基(例えば、-COPh:0.43)、アルキルスルホニル基(例えば、-SOMe:0.72)、アリールスルホニル基(例えば、-SOPh:0.68)などが挙げられる。シアノ基、アルキルカルボニル基、アルキルスルホニル基およびアリールスルホニル基が好ましく、シアノ基がより好ましい。ここで、Meはメチル基を、Phはフェニル基を表し、かっこ内の数値はσ値である。ハメットのσ値については、特開2009-263614号公報の段落番号0024~0025を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 A substituent having a positive Hammett constant σ p value (sigma para value) acts as an electron-attracting group. In the present invention, a substituent having a Hammett's σ p value of 0.2 or more can be exemplified as an electron withdrawing group. The σ p value of the substituent is preferably 0.25 or more, more preferably 0.3 or more, and particularly preferably 0.35 or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.80 or less. Specific examples of the electron withdrawing group include a cyano group (0.66), a carboxyl group (—COOH: 0.45), an alkoxycarbonyl group (for example, —COOMe: 0.45), an aryloxycarbonyl group (for example, , —COOPh: 0.44), a carbamoyl group (eg, —CONH 2 : 0.36), an alkylcarbonyl group (eg, —COMe: 0.50), an arylcarbonyl group (eg, —COPh: 0.43) An alkylsulfonyl group (for example, —SO 2 Me: 0.72), an arylsulfonyl group (for example, —SO 2 Ph: 0.68), and the like. A cyano group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group and an arylsulfonyl group are preferred, and a cyano group is more preferred. Here, Me represents a methyl group, Ph represents a phenyl group, and the numerical values in parentheses are σ p values. As for Hammett's σ p value, paragraph numbers 0024 to 0025 of JP-A-2009-263614 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 DおよびDの具体例としては、以下が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Specific examples of D 1 and D 2 include the following.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 ピロロピロール化合物は、下記式(II)で表される化合物、または、下記式(III)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。この態様によれば、赤外線遮蔽性および耐光性に優れたパターンを形成しやすい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
The pyrrolopyrrole compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (II) or a compound represented by the following formula (III). According to this aspect, it is easy to form a pattern having excellent infrared shielding properties and light resistance.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 式(II)中、XおよびXは、それぞれ独立に、O、S、NRX1またはCRX2X3を表し、RX1~RX3は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または置換基を表し、
 R~Rは、それぞれ独立に水素原子または置換基を表し、
 RとR、または、RとRは互いに結合して環を形成してもよく、
 BおよびBは、それぞれ独立に-BR基を表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に置換基を表し、RとRは互いに結合して環を形成してもよく、
 CおよびCは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 DおよびDは、それぞれ独立に置換基を表す。
In the formula (II), X 1 and X 2 each independently represent O, S, NR X1 or CR X2 R X3 , R X1 to R X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
R 3 to R 6 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
R 3 and R 4 , or R 5 and R 6 may combine with each other to form a ring,
B 1 and B 2 each independently represent a —BR 1 R 2 group, R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. Often,
C 1 and C 2 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group,
D 1 and D 2 each independently represent a substituent.
 式(II)のB、B、C、C、DおよびDは、式(I)のB、B、C、C、DおよびDと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。式(II)のX、XおよびR~Rは、上述した式(A-1)のX、RおよびRと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 B 1, B 2, C 1 , C 2, D 1 and D 2 of formula (II) has the same meaning as B 1, B 2, C 1 , C 2, D 1 and D 2 of formula (I) The preferable range is also the same. X 1 , X 2 and R 3 to R 6 in formula (II) have the same meanings as X 1 , R 3 and R 4 in formula (A-1) described above, and preferred ranges are also the same.
 式(III)中、Y~Yは、それぞれ独立に、NまたはCRY1を表し、Y~Yの少なくとも2つはCRY1であり、Y~Yの少なくとも2つはCRY1であり、RY1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、隣接するRY1同士は互いに結合して環を形成してもよく、
 BおよびBは、それぞれ独立に-BR基を表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に置換基を表し、RとRは互いに結合して環を形成してもよく、
 CおよびCは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 DおよびDは、それぞれ独立に置換基を表す。
In formula (III), Y 1 to Y 8 each independently represent N or CR Y1 , at least two of Y 1 to Y 4 are CR Y1 , and at least two of Y 5 to Y 8 are CR Y 1 , R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and adjacent R Y1 may be bonded to each other to form a ring;
B 1 and B 2 each independently represent a —BR 1 R 2 group, R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. Often,
C 1 and C 2 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group,
D 1 and D 2 each independently represent a substituent.
 式(III)のB、B、C、C、DおよびDは、式(I)のB、B、C、C、DおよびDと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。式(III)のY~Yは、上述した式(A-2)のY~Yと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 B 1, B 2, C 1 , C 2, D 1 and D 2 of formula (III) has the same meaning as B 1, B 2, C 1 , C 2, D 1 and D 2 of formula (I) The preferable range is also the same. Y 1 to Y 8 in the formula (III) have the same meanings as Y 1 to Y 4 in the formula (A-2) described above, and preferred ranges are also the same.
 ピロロピロール化合物の具体例としては、下記化合物が挙げられる。以下の構造式において、Phはフェニル基を表し、Meはメチル基を表し、Buはブチル基を表す。また、ピロロピロール化合物の具体例としては、特開2009-263614号公報の段落番号0049~0058に記載の化合物も挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of the pyrrolopyrrole compound include the following compounds. In the following structural formulas, Ph represents a phenyl group, Me represents a methyl group, and Bu represents a butyl group. Specific examples of the pyrrolopyrrole compound include the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0049 to 0058 of JP-A-2009-263614, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
(スクアリリウム化合物)
 本発明において、近赤外線吸収化合物として用いるスクアリリウム化合物は、下記式(1)で表される化合物が好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 式(1)中、AおよびAは、それぞれ独立に、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、または下記式(2)で表される基を表す;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 式(2)中、Zは、含窒素複素環を形成する非金属原子団を表し、Rは、アルキル基、アルケニル基またはアラルキル基を表し、dは、0または1を表し、波線は式(1)との連結手を表す。
(Squarylium compound)
In the present invention, the squarylium compound used as the near-infrared absorbing compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
In formula (1), A 1 and A 2 each independently represent an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, or a group represented by the following formula (2);
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
In formula (2), Z 1 represents a nonmetallic atomic group forming a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, R 2 represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group or an aralkyl group, d represents 0 or 1, and a wavy line represents Represents a connecting hand with the formula (1).
 式(1)におけるAおよびAは、それぞれ独立に、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、または式(2)で表される基を表し、式(2)で表される基が好ましい。
 AおよびAが表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~48が好ましく、6~24がより好ましく、6~12がさらに好ましい。具体例としては、フェニル基、ナフチル基等が挙げられる。
 AおよびAが表すヘテロアリール基としては、5員環または6員環が好ましい。また、ヘテロアリール基は、単環または縮合環が好ましく、単環または縮合数が2~8の縮合環がより好ましく、単環または縮合数が2~4の縮合環がさらに好ましく、単環または縮合数が2または3の縮合環が特に好ましい。ヘテロ環基に含まれるヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子が例示され、窒素原子、硫黄原子が好ましい。ヘテロ原子の数は、1~3が好ましく、1~2がより好ましい。具体的には、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子の少なくとも一つを含有する5員環または6員環等の単環、多環芳香族環から誘導されるヘテロアリール基などが挙げられる。
A 1 and A 2 in Formula (1) each independently represent an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, or a group represented by Formula (2), and a group represented by Formula (2) is preferable.
The number of carbon atoms of the aryl group represented by A 1 and A 2 is preferably 6 to 48, more preferably 6 to 24, and even more preferably 6 to 12. Specific examples include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group.
The heteroaryl group represented by A 1 and A 2 is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The heteroaryl group is preferably a single ring or a condensed ring, more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 8 condensations, still more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 4 condensations, a single ring or A condensed ring having a condensation number of 2 or 3 is particularly preferred. As a hetero atom contained in a heterocyclic group, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom are illustrated, and a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom are preferable. The number of heteroatoms is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 to 2. Specific examples include a heteroaryl group derived from a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic ring such as a 5-membered or 6-membered ring containing at least one of a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom.
 アリール基およびヘテロアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。アリール基およびヘテロアリール基が置換基を2個以上有する場合、複数の置換基は同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。 The aryl group and heteroaryl group may have a substituent. When the aryl group and heteroaryl group have two or more substituents, the plurality of substituents may be the same or different.
 置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アラルキル基、-OR10、-COR11、-COOR12、-OCOR13、-NR1415、-NHCOR16、-CONR1718、-NHCONR1920、-NHCOOR21、-SR22、-SO23、-SOOR24、-NHSO25、および-SONR2627が挙げられる。R10~R27は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、またはアラルキル基を表す。なお、-COOR12のR12が水素の場合(すなわち、カルボキシル基)は、水素原子が解離していてもよく、塩の状態であってもよい。また、-SOOR24のR24が水素原子の場合(すなわち、スルホ基)は、水素原子が解離していてもよく、塩の状態であってもよい。 Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, cyano group, nitro group, alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aryl group, heteroaryl group, aralkyl group, —OR 10 , —COR 11 , —COOR 12 , —OCOR 13 , — NR 14 R 15 , —NHCOR 16 , —CONR 17 R 18 , —NHCONR 19 R 20 , —NHCOOR 21 , —SR 22 , —SO 2 R 23 , —SO 2 OR 24 , —NHSO 2 R 25 , and —SO 2 NR 26 R 27 is exemplified. R 10 to R 27 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, or an aralkyl group. When R 12 of —COOR 12 is hydrogen (that is, a carboxyl group), the hydrogen atom may be dissociated or may be in a salt state. When R 24 of —SO 2 OR 24 is a hydrogen atom (that is, a sulfo group), the hydrogen atom may be dissociated or may be in a salt state.
 ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子が挙げられる。 Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~8がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。
 アルケニル基の炭素数は、2~20が好ましく、2~12がより好ましく、2~8がさらに好ましい。アルケニル基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。
 アルキニル基の炭素数は、2~40が好ましく、2~30がより好ましく、2~25がさらに好ましい。アルキニル基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。
 アリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12がさらに好ましい。
 アラルキル基のアルキル部分は、上記アルキル基と同様である。アラルキル基のアリール部分は、上記アリール基と同様である。アラルキル基の炭素数は、7~40が好ましく、7~30がより好ましく、7~25がさらに好ましい。
 ヘテロアリール基は、単環または縮合環が好ましく、単環または縮合数が2~8の縮合環がより好ましく、単環または縮合数が2~4の縮合環がさらに好ましい。ヘテロアリール基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基の環を構成するヘテロ原子は、窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基の環を構成する炭素原子の数は3~30が好ましく、3~18がより好ましく、3~12がさらに好ましい。
 アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アラルキル基、アリール基およびヘテロアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基が挙げられる。
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched.
The alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkenyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched.
The alkynyl group preferably has 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 2 to 25 carbon atoms. The alkynyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
The alkyl part of the aralkyl group is the same as the above alkyl group. The aryl part of the aralkyl group is the same as the above aryl group. The number of carbon atoms in the aralkyl group is preferably 7 to 40, more preferably 7 to 30, and still more preferably 7 to 25.
The heteroaryl group is preferably a single ring or a condensed ring, more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 8 condensations, and further preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 4 condensations. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3. The hetero atom constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. The heteroaryl group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, and still more preferably 3 to 12.
The alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aralkyl group, aryl group and heteroaryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
 次に、AおよびAが表す式(2)で表される基について説明する。 Next, the group represented by Formula (2) represented by A 1 and A 2 will be described.
 式(2)において、Rは、アルキル基、アルケニル基またはアラルキル基を表し、アルキル基が好ましい。
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~12がさらに好ましく、2~8が特に好ましい。
 アルケニル基の炭素数は、2~30が好ましく、2~20がより好ましく、2~12がさらに好ましい。
 アルキル基およびアルケニル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。
 アラルキル基の炭素数は7~30が好ましく、7~20がより好ましい。
In the formula (2), R 2 represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group or an aralkyl group, and an alkyl group is preferable.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, still more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
The alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms.
The alkyl group and the alkenyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and are preferably linear or branched.
The aralkyl group preferably has 7 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 7 to 20 carbon atoms.
 式(2)において、Zにより形成される含窒素複素環としては、5員環または6員環が好ましい。また、含窒素複素環は、単環または縮合環が好ましく、単環または縮合数が2~8の縮合環がより好ましく、単環または縮合数が2~4の縮合環がさらに好ましく、縮合数が2または3の縮合環が特に好ましい。含窒素複素環は、窒素原子の他に、硫黄原子を含んでいてもよい。また、含窒素複素環は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基が挙げられる。例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、ヒドロキシル基、アミノ基、アシルアミノ基が好ましく、ハロゲン原子およびアルキル基がより好ましい。ハロゲン原子は、塩素原子が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~12がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。 In the formula (2), the nitrogen-containing heterocycle formed by Z 1 is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The nitrogen-containing heterocycle is preferably a single ring or a condensed ring, more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 8 condensations, more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 4 condensations, Is particularly preferably a fused ring of 2 or 3. The nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring may contain a sulfur atom in addition to the nitrogen atom. Moreover, the nitrogen-containing heterocycle may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents. For example, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an amino group, and an acylamino group are preferable, and a halogen atom and an alkyl group are more preferable. The halogen atom is preferably a chlorine atom. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms. The alkyl group is preferably linear or branched.
 式(2)で表される基は、下記式(3)または式(4)で表される基であることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 式(3)および(4)中、R11は、アルキル基、アルケニル基またはアラルキル基を表し、R12は、置換基を表し、mが2以上の場合は、R12同士は、連結して環を形成してもよく、Xは、窒素原子、または、CR1314を表し、R13およびR14は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または置換基を表し、mは、0~4の整数を表し、波線は式(1)との連結手を表す。
The group represented by the formula (2) is preferably a group represented by the following formula (3) or the formula (4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
In formulas (3) and (4), R 11 represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group or an aralkyl group, R 12 represents a substituent, and when m is 2 or more, R 12 are linked to each other. A ring may form, X represents a nitrogen atom or CR 13 R 14 , R 13 and R 14 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and m is an integer of 0 to 4 And a wavy line represents a connecting hand with the formula (1).
 式(3)および(4)におけるR11は、式(2)におけるRと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 式(3)および(4)におけるR12は、置換基を表す。置換基としては、上述した式(1)で説明した置換基が挙げられる。例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、ヒドロキシル基、アミノ基、アシルアミノ基が好ましく、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基がより好ましい。ハロゲン原子は塩素原子が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~12がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。
 mが2以上の場合、R12同士は、連結して環を形成してもよい。環としては、脂環(非芳香性の炭化水素環)、芳香族環、複素環などが挙げられる。環は単環であってもよく、多環であってもよい。置換基同士が連結して環を形成する場合の連結基としては、-CO-、-O-、-NH-、2価の脂肪族基、2価の芳香族基、2価の不飽和鎖式炭化水素基およびそれらの組み合わせが挙げられる。例えば、R12同士が連結してベンゼン環を形成していることが好ましい。
 式(3)におけるXは、窒素原子、または、CR1314を表し、R13およびR14は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または置換基を表す。置換基としては、上述した式(1)で説明した置換基が挙げられる。例えば、アルキル基などが挙げられる。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~5がさらに好ましく、1~3が特に好ましく、1が最も好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖が特に好ましい。
 mは、0~4の整数を表し、0~2が好ましい。
R 11 in formulas (3) and (4) has the same meaning as R 2 in formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same.
R 12 in the formulas (3) and (4) represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent described in the above formula (1). For example, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an amino group, and an acylamino group are preferable, and a halogen atom and an alkyl group are more preferable. The halogen atom is preferably a chlorine atom. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms. The alkyl group is preferably linear or branched.
When m is 2 or more, R 12 may be linked to form a ring. Examples of the ring include an alicyclic ring (non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring), an aromatic ring, and a heterocyclic ring. The ring may be monocyclic or polycyclic. When the substituents are linked to form a ring, the linking group includes —CO—, —O—, —NH—, a divalent aliphatic group, a divalent aromatic group, and a divalent unsaturated chain. Formula hydrocarbon groups and combinations thereof. For example, it is preferable that R 12 are connected to each other to form a benzene ring.
X in Formula (3) represents a nitrogen atom or CR 13 R 14 , and R 13 and R 14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent described in the above formula (1). For example, an alkyl group etc. are mentioned. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, particularly preferably 1 to 3, and most preferably 1. The alkyl group is preferably linear or branched, and particularly preferably linear.
m represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 to 2.
 なお、式(1)において、カチオンは、以下のように非局在化して存在している。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
In the formula (1), cations are delocalized and exist as follows.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 本発明において近赤外線吸収化合物として用いるスクアリリウム化合物は、下記式(5)で表される化合物が好ましい。
 環Aおよび環Bは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族環または複素芳香族環を表し、
 XおよびXはそれぞれ独立に置換基を表し、
 GおよびGはそれぞれ独立に置換基を表し、
 kAは0~n、kBは0~nの整数を表し、
 nおよびnはそれぞれ環Aまたは環Bに置換可能な最大の整数を表し、
 XとG、XとGは互いに結合して環を形成しても良く、GおよびGがそれぞれ複数存在する場合は、互いに結合して環構造を形成していても良い。
The squarylium compound used as the near-infrared absorbing compound in the present invention is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (5).
Ring A and Ring B each independently represent an aromatic ring or a heteroaromatic ring,
X A and X B each independently represent a substituent,
G A and G B independently represents a substituent,
kA represents an integer of 0 to n A , kB represents an integer of 0 to n B ,
n A and n B each represent the largest integer that can be substituted for ring A or ring B;
X A and G A, X B and G B may combine with each other to form a ring, if G A and G B are present in plural may be bonded to form a ring structure .
 GおよびGはそれぞれ独立に置換基を表す。置換基としては、上述した式(1)で説明した置換基が挙げられる。 G A and G B independently represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent described in the above formula (1).
 XおよびXはそれぞれ独立に置換基を表す。置換基は、上述した式(1)で説明した置換基が挙げられ、活性水素を有する基が好ましく、-OH、-SH、-COOH、-SOH、-NRX1X2、-NHCORX1、-CONRX1X2、-NHCONRX1X2、-NHCOORX1、-NHSOX1、-B(OH)および-PO(OH)がより好ましく、-OH、-SHおよび-NRX1X2がさらに好ましい。
 RX1およびRX1は、それぞれ独立に水素原子または置換基を表す。置換基としてはアルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、および、ヘテロアリール基が挙げられ、アルキル基が好ましい。アルキル基は直鎖または分岐が好ましい。アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、および、ヘテロアリール基の詳細については、上述した置換基の欄で説明した範囲と同義である。
X A and X B each independently represent a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent described in the above formula (1), and a group having active hydrogen is preferable. —OH, —SH, —COOH, —SO 3 H, —NR X1 R X2 , —NHCOR X1 , —CONR X1 R X2 , —NHCONR X1 R X2 , —NHCOOR X1 , —NHSO 2 R X1 , —B (OH) 2 and —PO (OH) 2 are more preferable, —OH, —SH and —NR X1 R X2 is more preferable.
R X1 and R X1 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, and a heteroaryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable. The alkyl group is preferably linear or branched. The details of the alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aryl group, and heteroaryl group are the same as those described in the above-mentioned substituent column.
 環Aおよび環Bは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族環または複素芳香族環を表す。
 芳香族環および複素芳香族環は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。
 芳香族環および複素芳香族環の具体例としては、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、ペンタレン環、インデン環、アズレン環、ヘプタレン環、インダセン環、ペリレン環、ペンタセン環、アセナフテン環、フェナントレン環、アントラセン環、ナフタセン環、クリセン環、トリフェニレン環、フルオレン環、ピロール環、フラン環、チオフェン環、イミダゾール環、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピリジン環、ピラジン環、ピリミジン環、ピリダジン環、インドリジン環、インドール環、ベンゾフラン環、ベンゾチオフェン環、イソベンゾフラン環、キノリジン環、キノリン環、フタラジン環、ナフチリジン環、キノキサリン環、キノキサゾリン環、イソキノリン環、カルバゾール環、フェナントリジン環、アクリジン環、フェナントロリン環、チアントレン環、クロメン環、キサンテン環、フェノキサチイン環、フェノチアジン環、および、フェナジン環が挙げられ、ベンゼン環またはナフタレン環が好ましい。
 芳香族環は、無置換であってもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述した式(1)で説明した置換基が挙げられる。
Ring A and ring B each independently represent an aromatic ring or a heteroaromatic ring.
The aromatic ring and heteroaromatic ring may be a single ring or a condensed ring.
Specific examples of the aromatic ring and heteroaromatic ring include benzene ring, naphthalene ring, pentalene ring, indene ring, azulene ring, heptalene ring, indacene ring, perylene ring, pentacene ring, acenaphthene ring, phenanthrene ring, anthracene ring, Naphthacene ring, chrysene ring, triphenylene ring, fluorene ring, pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyridazine ring, indolizine ring, indole ring, benzofuran Ring, benzothiophene ring, isobenzofuran ring, quinolidine ring, quinoline ring, phthalazine ring, naphthyridine ring, quinoxaline ring, quinoxazoline ring, isoquinoline ring, carbazole ring, phenanthridine ring, acridine ring, phenanthroline ring, Antoren ring, chromene ring, xanthene ring, phenoxathiin ring, a phenothiazine ring, and include phenazine ring, a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring is preferable.
The aromatic ring may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent described in the above formula (1).
 XとG、XとGは互いに結合して環を形成しても良く、GおよびGがそれぞれ複数存在する場合は、互いに結合して環を形成していても良い。
 環としては、5員環または6員環が好ましい。環は単環であってもよく、多環であってもよい。
 XとG、XとG、G同士またはG同士が結合して環を形成する場合、これらが直接結合して環を形成してもよく、アルキレン基、-CO-、-O-、-NH-、-BR-、またはそれらの組み合わせである2価の連結基を介して結合して環を形成してもよい。XとG、XとG、G同士またはG同士が、-BR-を介して結合して環を形成することが好ましい。
 Rは、水素原子または置換基を表す。置換基としては、上述した式(1)で説明した置換基が挙げられ、アルキル基またはアリール基が好ましい。
X A and G A, X B and G B may combine with each other to form a ring, if G A and G B are present in plural may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
The ring is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The ring may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
X A and G A, X B and G B, when forming a G A or between G B are bonded to each other rings, may be they are attached directly to form a ring, an alkylene group, -CO-, A ring may be formed by bonding via a divalent linking group which is —O—, —NH—, —BR—, or a combination thereof. X A and G A, X B and G B, G A or between G B each other, it is preferable to form a ring via -BR-.
R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent described in the above formula (1), and an alkyl group or an aryl group is preferable.
 kAは0~nAの整数を表し、kBは0~nBの整数を表し、nAは、A環に置換可能な最大の整数を表し、nBは、B環に置換可能な最大の整数を表す。
 kAおよびkBは、それぞれ独立に0~4が好ましく、0~2がより好ましく、0~1が特に好ましい。
kA represents an integer of 0 to nA, kB represents an integer of 0 to nB, nA represents the largest integer that can be substituted on the A ring, and nB represents the largest integer that can be substituted on the B ring.
kA and kB are each independently preferably 0 to 4, more preferably 0 to 2, and particularly preferably 0 to 1.
 スクアリリウム化合物の一実施形態として下記式(6)で表される化合物が挙げられる。この化合物は、耐熱性に優れている。
式(6)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 式中、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を表し、
 RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、または、アルキル基を表し、
 XおよびXは、それぞれ独立に、-O-、または、-N(R)-を表し、
 Rは、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表し、
 Y~Yは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を表し、YとY、および、YとYは、互いに結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 Y~Yは、それぞれ複数有する場合は、互いに結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 pおよびsは、それぞれ独立に0~3の整数を表し、
 qおよびrは、それぞれ独立に0~2の整数を表す。
One embodiment of the squarylium compound is a compound represented by the following formula (6). This compound is excellent in heat resistance.
Formula (6)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
In the formula, R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a substituent,
R 3 and R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group,
X 1 and X 2 each independently represent —O— or —N (R 5 ) —,
R 5 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group,
Y 1 to Y 4 each independently represent a substituent, Y 1 and Y 2 , and Y 3 and Y 4 may be bonded to each other to form a ring,
Y 1 to Y 4 may be bonded to each other to form a ring when there are a plurality of Y 1 to Y 4 .
p and s each independently represent an integer of 0 to 3,
q and r each independently represents an integer of 0 to 2.
 R、R、Y~Yが表す置換基は、上述した式(1)で説明した置換基が挙げられる。
 RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、メチル基またはエチル基であることが好ましく、水素原子またはメチル基がより好ましく、水素原子が特に好ましい。
Examples of the substituent represented by R 1 , R 2 , Y 1 to Y 4 include the substituents described in the above-described formula (1).
R 3 and R 4 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group or an ethyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and particularly preferably a hydrogen atom.
 XおよびXは、それぞれ独立に、-O-、または、-N(R)-を表す。XとXは同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよいが、同一であることが好ましい。
 Rは、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表す。
 Rは、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基が好ましい。Rが表すアルキル基、アリール基およびヘテロアリール基は、無置換であってもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述した式(1)で説明した置換基が挙げられる。
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~4がさらに好ましく、1~2が特に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐のいずれでもよい。
 アリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。
 ヘテロアリール基は、単環であっても多環であってもよい。ヘテロアリール基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基の環を構成するヘテロ原子は、窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子が好ましい。ヘテロアリール基の環を構成する炭素原子の数は3~30が好ましく、3~18がより好ましく、3~12がさらに好ましい。
X 1 and X 2 each independently represents —O— or —N (R 5 ) —. X 1 and X 2 may be the same or different, but are preferably the same.
R 5 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group.
R 5 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group. The alkyl group, aryl group and heteroaryl group represented by R 5 may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent described in the above formula (1).
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 4, and particularly preferably 1 to 2. The alkyl group may be linear or branched.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
The heteroaryl group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3. The hetero atom constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, and still more preferably 3 to 12.
 スクアリリウム化合物の具体例としては、以下に示す化合物が挙げられる。また、特開2011-208101号公報の段落番号0044~0049に記載の化合物が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Specific examples of the squarylium compound include the following compounds. Further, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0044 to 0049 of JP 2011-208101 A can be mentioned, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
(シアニン化合物)
 本発明において、近赤外線吸収化合物として用いるシアニン化合物は、下記式(C)で表される化合物が好ましい。
式(C)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 式(C)中、ZおよびZは、それぞれ独立に、縮環してもよい5員または6員の含窒素複素環を形成する非金属原子団であり、
 R101およびR102は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アラルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 Lは、奇数個のメチン基を有するメチン鎖を表し、
 aおよびbは、それぞれ独立に、0または1であり、
 aが0の場合は、炭素原子と窒素原子とが二重結合で結合し、bが0の場合は、炭素原子と窒素原子とが単結合で結合し、
 式中のCyで表される部位がカチオン部である場合、Xはアニオンを表し、cは電荷のバランスを取るために必要な数を表し、式中のCyで表される部位がアニオン部である場合、Xはカチオンを表し、cは電荷のバランスを取るために必要な数を表し、式中のCyで表される部位の電荷が分子内で中和されている場合、cは0である。
(Cyanine compound)
In the present invention, the cyanine compound used as the near-infrared absorbing compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (C).
Formula (C)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
In formula (C), Z 1 and Z 2 are each independently a nonmetallic atomic group that forms a 5-membered or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocycle that may be condensed,
R 101 and R 102 each independently represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aralkyl group or an aryl group,
L 1 represents a methine chain having an odd number of methine groups,
a and b are each independently 0 or 1,
When a is 0, a carbon atom and a nitrogen atom are bonded by a double bond, and when b is 0, a carbon atom and a nitrogen atom are bonded by a single bond,
When the site represented by Cy in the formula is a cation moiety, X 1 represents an anion, c represents a number necessary for balancing the charge, and the site represented by Cy in the formula is an anion moiety. X 1 represents a cation, c represents a number necessary to balance the charge, and when the charge of the site represented by Cy in the formula is neutralized in the molecule, c is 0.
 式(C)において、ZおよびZは、それぞれ独立に、縮環してもよい5員または6員の含窒素複素環を形成する非金属原子団を表す。含窒素複素環には、他の複素環、芳香族環または脂肪族環が縮合してもよい。含窒素複素環は、5員環が好ましい。5員の含窒素複素環に、ベンゼン環またはナフタレン環が縮合している構造がさらに好ましい。含窒素複素環の具体例としては、オキサゾール環、イソオキサゾール環、ベンゾオキサゾール環、ナフトオキサゾール環、オキサゾロカルバゾール環、オキサゾロジベンゾフラン環、チアゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、ナフトチアゾール環、インドレニン環、ベンゾインドレニン環、イミダゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、ナフトイミダゾール環、キノリン環、ピリジン環、ピロロピリジン環、フロピロール環、インドリジン環、イミダゾキノキサリン環、キノキサリン環等が挙げられ、キノリン環、インドレニン環、ベンゾインドレニン環、ベンゾオキサゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環が好ましく、インドレニン環、ベンゾチアゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環が特に好ましい。含窒素複素環およびそれに縮合している環は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、式(1)で説明した置換基が挙げられる。 In the formula (C), Z 1 and Z 2 each independently represent a nonmetallic atomic group that forms a 5-membered or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring that may be condensed. The nitrogen-containing heterocycle may be condensed with another heterocycle, aromatic ring or aliphatic ring. The nitrogen-containing heterocycle is preferably a 5-membered ring. A structure in which a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring is condensed to a 5-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring is more preferable. Specific examples of the nitrogen-containing heterocycle include an oxazole ring, an isoxazole ring, a benzoxazole ring, a naphthoxazole ring, an oxazolocarbazole ring, an oxazodibenzobenzofuran ring, a thiazole ring, a benzothiazole ring, a naphthothiazole ring, an indolenine ring, Examples include benzoindolenin ring, imidazole ring, benzimidazole ring, naphthimidazole ring, quinoline ring, pyridine ring, pyrrolopyridine ring, furopyrrole ring, indolizine ring, imidazoquinoxaline ring, quinoxaline ring, quinoline ring, indolenine ring Benzoindolenine ring, benzoxazole ring, benzothiazole ring and benzimidazole ring are preferable, and indolenine ring, benzothiazole ring and benzimidazole ring are particularly preferable. The nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring and the ring condensed thereto may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent described in Formula (1).
 式(C)において、R101およびR102は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アラルキル基またはアリール基を表す。
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~12がより好ましく、1~8がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。
 アルケニル基の炭素数は、2~20が好ましく、2~12がより好ましく、2~8がさらに好ましい。アルケニル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。
 アルキニル基の炭素数は、2~20が好ましく、2~12がより好ましく、2~8がさらに好ましい。アルキニル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。
 アリール基の炭素数は、6~25が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10がさらに好ましい。アリール基は無置換であってもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。
 アラルキル基のアルキル部分は、上記アルキル基と同様である。アラルキル基のアリール部分は、上記アリール基と同様である。アラルキル基の炭素数は、7~40が好ましく、7~30がより好ましく、7~25がさらに好ましい。
 アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アラルキル基およびアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシル基、カルボキシル基、スルホ基、アルコキシ基、アミノ基等が挙げられ、カルボキシル基およびスルホ基が好ましく、スルホ基が特に好ましい。カルボキシル基およびスルホ基は、水素原子が解離していてもよく、塩の状態であってもよい。
In the formula (C), R 101 and R 102 each independently represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aralkyl group or an aryl group.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkenyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The alkynyl group has preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms. The alkynyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 25 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent.
The alkyl part of the aralkyl group is the same as the above alkyl group. The aryl part of the aralkyl group is the same as the above aryl group. The number of carbon atoms in the aralkyl group is preferably 7 to 40, more preferably 7 to 30, and still more preferably 7 to 25.
The alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aralkyl group and aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, an alkoxy group, and an amino group. A carboxyl group and a sulfo group are preferable, and a sulfo group is particularly preferable. The carboxyl group and the sulfo group may have a hydrogen atom dissociated or a salt state.
 式(C)において、Lは、奇数個のメチン基を有するメチン鎖を表す。Lは、3個、5個または7個のメチン基を有するメチン鎖が好ましい。
 メチン基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基を有するメチン基は、中央の(メソ位の)メチン基であることが好ましい。置換基の具体例としては、ZおよびZの含窒素複素環が有してもよい置換基、および、下記式(a)で表される基などが挙げられる。また、メチン鎖の二つの置換基が結合して5または6員環を形成しても良い。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 式(a)中、*は、メチン鎖との連結手を表し、Aは、-O-を表す。
In the formula (C), L 1 represents a methine chain having an odd number of methine groups. L 1 is preferably a methine chain having 3, 5, or 7 methine groups.
The methine group may have a substituent. The methine group having a substituent is preferably a central (meso-position) methine group. Specific examples of the substituent include a substituent that the nitrogen-containing heterocycle of Z 1 and Z 2 may have, a group represented by the following formula (a), and the like. Further, two substituents of the methine chain may be bonded to form a 5- or 6-membered ring.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
In the formula (a), * represents a linkage with a methine chain, and A 1 represents —O—.
 式(C)において、aおよびbは、それぞれ独立に、0または1である。aが0の場合は、炭素原子と窒素原子とが二重結合で結合し、bが0の場合は、炭素原子と窒素原子とが単結合で結合する。aおよびbはともに0であることが好ましい。なお、aおよびbがともに0の場合は、式(C)は以下のように表される。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
In the formula (C), a and b are each independently 0 or 1. When a is 0, the carbon atom and the nitrogen atom are bonded by a double bond, and when b is 0, the carbon atom and the nitrogen atom are bonded by a single bond. Both a and b are preferably 0. When a and b are both 0, the formula (C) is expressed as follows.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 式(C)において、式中のCyで表される部位がカチオン部である場合、Xはアニオンを表し、cは電荷のバランスを取るために必要な数を表す。アニオンの例としては、ハライドイオン(Cl、Br、Iなど)、パラトルエンスルホン酸イオン、エチル硫酸イオン、PF 、BF 、ClO 、トリス(ハロゲノアルキルスルホニル)メチドアニオン(例えば、(CFSO)、ジ(ハロゲノアルキルスルホニル)イミドアニオン(例えば、(CFSO)、テトラシアノボレートアニオンなどが挙げられる。
 式(C)において、式中のCyで表される部位がアニオン部である場合、Xはカチオンを表し、cは電荷のバランスを取るために必要な数を表す。カチオンとしては、アルカリ金属イオン(Li、Na、Kなど)、アルカリ土類金属イオン(Mg2+、Ca2+、Ba2+、Sr2+など)、遷移金属イオン(Ag、Fe2+、Co2+、Ni2+、Cu2+、Zn2+など)、その他の金属イオン(Al3+など)、アンモニウムイオン、トリエチルアンモニウムイオン、トリブチルアンモニウムイオン、ピリジニウムイオン、テトラブチルアンモニウムイオン、グアニジニウムイオン、テトラメチルグアニジニウムイオン、ジアザビシクロウンデセニウムイオンなどが挙げられる。カチオンとしては、Na、K、Mg2+、Ca2+、Zn2+、ジアザビシクロウンデセニウムイオンが好ましい。
 式(C)において、式中のCyで表される部位の電荷が分子内で中和されている場合、Xは存在しない。すなわち、cは0である。
In the formula (C), when the site represented by Cy in the formula is a cation moiety, X 1 represents an anion, and c represents a number necessary for balancing the charge. Examples of anions include halide ions (Cl , Br , I −, etc.), paratoluenesulfonic acid ions, ethyl sulfate ions, PF 6 , BF 4 , ClO 4 , tris (halogenoalkylsulfonyl) methide anions ( For example, (CF 3 SO 2 ) 3 C ), di (halogenoalkylsulfonyl) imide anion (for example, (CF 3 SO 2 ) 2 N ), tetracyanoborate anion and the like can be mentioned.
In the formula (C), when the site represented by Cy in the formula is an anion portion, X 1 represents a cation, and c represents a number necessary for balancing the charge. Examples of the cation include alkali metal ions (Li + , Na + , K +, etc.), alkaline earth metal ions (Mg 2+ , Ca 2+ , Ba 2+ , Sr 2+, etc.), transition metal ions (Ag + , Fe 2+ , Co + 2+ , Ni 2+ , Cu 2+ , Zn 2+, etc.), other metal ions (such as Al 3+ ), ammonium ions, triethylammonium ions, tributylammonium ions, pyridinium ions, tetrabutylammonium ions, guanidinium ions, tetramethylguanidini. Um ion, diazabicycloundecenium ion, and the like. Examples of the cation, Na +, K +, Mg 2+, Ca 2+, Zn 2+, diazabicyclo undecenium ion.
In the formula (C), when the charge at the site represented by Cy in the formula is neutralized in the molecule, X 1 does not exist. That is, c is 0.
 シアニン化合物は、下記式(C-1)~(C-3)で表される化合物であることも好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 式中、R1A、R2A、R1BおよびR2Bは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アラルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 L1AおよびL1Bは、それぞれ独立に奇数個のメチン基を有するメチン鎖を表し、
 YおよびYは、それぞれ独立に、-S-、-O-、-NRX1-または-CRX2X3-を表し、
 RX1、RX2およびRX3は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、
 V1A、V2A、V1BおよびV2Bは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を表し、
 m1およびm2は、それぞれ独立に、0~4を表し、
 式中のCyで表される部位がカチオン部である場合、Xはアニオンを表し、cは電荷のバランスを取るために必要な数を表し、
式中のCyで表される部位がアニオン部である場合、Xはカチオンを表し、cは電荷のバランスを取るために必要な数を表し、
式中のCyで表される部位の電荷が分子内で中和されている場合、Xは存在しない。
The cyanine compound is also preferably a compound represented by the following formulas (C-1) to (C-3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
In the formula, R 1A , R 2A , R 1B and R 2B each independently represent an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aralkyl group or an aryl group,
L 1A and L 1B each independently represent a methine chain having an odd number of methine groups,
Y 1 and Y 2 each independently represent —S—, —O—, —NR X1 — or —CR X2 R X3
R X1 , R X2 and R X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group,
V 1A , V 2A , V 1B and V 2B each independently represent a substituent,
m1 and m2 each independently represents 0 to 4;
When the site represented by Cy in the formula is a cation moiety, X 1 represents an anion, c represents a number necessary for balancing the charge,
When the site represented by Cy in the formula is an anion moiety, X 1 represents a cation, c represents a number necessary for balancing electric charges,
When the charge at the site represented by Cy in the formula is neutralized in the molecule, X 1 does not exist.
 R1A、R2A、R1BおよびR2Bが表す基は、式(C)のR101およびR102で説明したアルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アラルキル基およびアリール基と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。これらの基は無置換であってもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシル基、カルボキシル基、スルホ基、アルコキシ基、アミノ基等が挙げられ、カルボキシル基およびスルホ基が好ましく、スルホ基が特に好ましい。カルボキシル基およびスルホ基は、水素原子が解離していてもよく、塩の状態であってもよい。R1A、R2A、R1BおよびR2Bがアルキル基を表す場合は、直鎖のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。 The groups represented by R 1A , R 2A , R 1B and R 2B are synonymous with the alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aralkyl group and aryl group described for R 101 and R 102 in formula (C), and are preferably in a preferred range. Is the same. These groups may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, an alkoxy group, and an amino group. A carboxyl group and a sulfo group are preferable, and a sulfo group is particularly preferable. The carboxyl group and the sulfo group may have a hydrogen atom dissociated or a salt state. When R 1A , R 2A , R 1B and R 2B represent an alkyl group, it is more preferably a linear alkyl group.
 YおよびYは、それぞれ独立に、-S-、-O-、-NRX1-または-CRX2X3-を表し、-NRX1-が好ましい。RX1、RX2およびRX3は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、アルキル基が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3が特に好ましい。アルキル基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖が特に好ましい。アルキル基は、メチル基またはエチル基が特に好ましい。 Y 1 and Y 2 are each independently, -S -, - O -, - NR X1 - or -CR X2 R X3 - represents, -NR X1 - is preferred. R X1 , R X2 and R X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, preferably an alkyl group. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, particularly preferably linear. The alkyl group is particularly preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group.
 L1AおよびL1Bは、式(C)のLと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 V1A、V2A、V1BおよびV2Bが表す置換基は、上述した置換基が挙げられ、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 m1およびm2は、それぞれ独立に、0~4を表し、0~2が好ましい。
 Xが表すアニオンおよびカチオンは、式(C)のXで説明した範囲と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
L 1A and L 1B have the same meaning as L 1 in formula (C), and the preferred range is also the same.
Examples of the substituent represented by V 1A , V 2A , V 1B, and V 2B include the substituents described above, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
m1 and m2 each independently represents 0 to 4, preferably 0 to 2.
The anion and cation represented by X 1 are synonymous with the range described for X 1 in formula (C), and the preferred range is also the same.
 シアニン化合物の具体例としては、以下に示す化合物が挙げられる。また、特開2015-172004号公報および特開2015-172102号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Specific examples of the cyanine compound include the following compounds. Further, compounds described in JP-A-2015-172004 and JP-A-2015-172102 may be mentioned.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 本発明の組成物において、近赤外線吸収化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、1~50質量%が好ましい。上限は、40質量%以下が好ましく、30質量%以下がより好ましい。下限は、5質量%以上が好ましく、10質量%以上がより好ましい。近赤外線吸収化合物は1種のみでもよく、2種以上でもよい。2種以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 In the composition of the present invention, the content of the near-infrared absorbing compound is preferably 1 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. The upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, and more preferably 30% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more. The near-infrared absorbing compound may be only one type or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<凝集抑制剤>>
 本発明の組成物は、凝集抑制剤を含有する。本発明において、凝集抑制剤としては、芳香族炭化水素環および複素環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を有し、波長650~1,000nmの範囲に吸収極大波長を有さない化合物を用いる。
<< Aggregation inhibitor >>
The composition of the present invention contains an aggregation inhibitor. In the present invention, as the aggregation inhibitor, a compound having at least one ring selected from an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and a heterocyclic ring and having no absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm is used.
 凝集抑制剤は、溶剤に溶解する化合物であることが好ましい。例えば、23℃のシクロペンタノン、シクロヘキサノン、および、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートから選ばれる少なくとも1種の溶剤100gに対する溶解度が、1g以上であることが好ましく、5g以上であることがより好ましい。 The aggregation inhibitor is preferably a compound that dissolves in a solvent. For example, the solubility in 100 g of at least one solvent selected from cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate at 23 ° C. is preferably 1 g or more, and more preferably 5 g or more.
 凝集抑制剤が有する芳香族炭化水素環および複素環は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。縮合環の縮合数は、2~8が好ましく、2~4がより好ましい。 The aromatic hydrocarbon ring and the heterocyclic ring possessed by the aggregation inhibitor may be a single ring or a condensed ring. The number of condensed rings is preferably 2 to 8, and more preferably 2 to 4.
 凝集抑制剤が有する複素環は、含窒素複素環であることが好ましい。また、複素環は、芳香族複素環であることが好ましい。また、複素環の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3個が好ましい。また、複素環の環を構成するヘテロ原子の種類としては、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子が挙げられる。凝集抑制剤が有する複素環は、含窒素複素環であることが好ましい。また、凝集抑制剤が有する複素環は、芳香族複素環であることが好ましい。 The heterocycle possessed by the aggregation inhibitor is preferably a nitrogen-containing heterocycle. The heterocyclic ring is preferably an aromatic heterocyclic ring. The number of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic ring is preferably 1 to 3. Moreover, as a kind of hetero atom which comprises the ring of a heterocyclic ring, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom are mentioned. The heterocycle possessed by the aggregation inhibitor is preferably a nitrogen-containing heterocycle. Moreover, it is preferable that the heterocyclic ring which the aggregation inhibitor has is an aromatic heterocyclic ring.
 本発明において、凝集抑制剤は、ベンゼン環、ベンゼン環を含む縮合環および含窒素複素環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を含むことが好ましく、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、ピリジン環、キノリン環、イソキノリン環、イミダゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、ピラゾール環、チアゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、トリアゾール環、ベンゾトリアゾール環、オキサゾール環、ベンゾオキサゾール環、イミダゾリン環、ピラジン環、キノキサリン環、ピリミジン環、キナゾリン環、ピリダジン環、トリアジン環、ピロール環、インドール環、イソインドール環、フルオレン環およびカルバゾール環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を含むことがより好ましく、ピリジン環、キノリン環、および、イソキノリン環がより好ましい。 In the present invention, the aggregation inhibitor preferably contains at least one ring selected from a benzene ring, a condensed ring containing a benzene ring, and a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, and includes a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, a pyridine ring, a quinoline ring, and an isoquinoline. Ring, imidazole ring, benzimidazole ring, pyrazole ring, thiazole ring, benzothiazole ring, triazole ring, benzotriazole ring, oxazole ring, benzoxazole ring, imidazoline ring, pyrazine ring, quinoxaline ring, pyrimidine ring, quinazoline ring, pyridazine ring , A triazine ring, a pyrrole ring, an indole ring, an isoindole ring, a fluorene ring, and a carbazole ring, and more preferably a pyridine ring, a quinoline ring, and an isoquinoline ring.
 また、凝集抑制剤が有する環は、近赤外線吸収化合物が有する芳香族炭化水素環または複素環と同様の芳香族炭化水素環または複素環を有することも好ましい。この態様によれば、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集を効果的に抑制することができる。 In addition, the ring of the aggregation inhibitor preferably has the same aromatic hydrocarbon ring or heterocyclic ring as the aromatic hydrocarbon ring or heterocyclic ring of the near-infrared absorbing compound. According to this aspect, the aggregation of the near-infrared absorbing compound can be effectively suppressed.
 凝集抑制剤として、上記の環を有する化合物を用いることが好ましい理由としては、下記の通りである。近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集を抑制するためには、近赤外線吸収化合物の会合を抑制することが必要である。凝集抑制剤として、構造内に近赤外線吸収化合物とπ-π相互作用する構造を少なくとも1か所以上有している化合物を用いることで、膜中での近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集を抑制でき、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集サイズを小さくすることができる。例として、近赤外線吸収化合物の具体例として挙げた上述のピロロピロール化合物は、π平面に芳香族炭化水素環および/または複素環と、ピロロピロール骨格を有する。ピロロピロール化合物と相互作用するには、芳香族炭化水素環および/または複素環(好ましくは、含窒素複素環)が必要となる。このため、上述の環を有する化合物を凝集抑制剤として用いることで、近赤外線吸収化合物の会合を効果的に抑制でき、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集サイズを効果的に抑制できる。 The reason why it is preferable to use a compound having the above ring as the aggregation inhibitor is as follows. In order to suppress aggregation of the near-infrared absorbing compound, it is necessary to suppress association of the near-infrared absorbing compound. By using a compound having at least one structure having a π-π interaction with the near infrared absorbing compound in the structure as an aggregation inhibitor, aggregation of the near infrared absorbing compound in the film can be suppressed, The aggregate size of the near-infrared absorbing compound can be reduced. As an example, the pyrrolopyrrole compound mentioned above as a specific example of the near-infrared absorbing compound has an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and / or a heterocyclic ring and a pyrrolopyrrole skeleton in the π plane. In order to interact with the pyrrolopyrrole compound, an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and / or a heterocyclic ring (preferably a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring) is required. For this reason, by using the above-mentioned compound having a ring as an aggregation inhibitor, the association of the near infrared absorbing compound can be effectively suppressed, and the aggregate size of the near infrared absorbing compound can be effectively suppressed.
 本発明において、凝集抑制剤は、下記式(b1-1)で表される化合物、および、下記式(b2-1)で表される部分構造を有する化合物、下記式(b3-1)で表される部分構造を有する化合物、および、下記式(b4-1)で表される部分構造を有する化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましい。 In the present invention, the aggregation inhibitor is a compound represented by the following formula (b1-1), a compound having a partial structure represented by the following formula (b2-1), or a compound represented by the following formula (b3-1). It is preferably at least one selected from a compound having a partial structure and a compound having a partial structure represented by the following formula (b4-1).
 B-(Rb1m1   ・・・(b1-1)
 式(b1-1)において、Bは、芳香族炭化水素環または複素環を表し、Rb1は置換基を表し、m1は0~mAの整数を表し、mAは、Bに置換可能な最大の整数を表す;m1が2以上の場合は、2個以上のRb1は同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
 *-B-(Rb2m2   ・・・(b2-1)
 式(b2-1)において、*は、化合物を構成する他の原子または原子団との連結手を表し、Bは、芳香族炭化水素環または複素環を表し、Rb2は置換基を表し、m2は0~mBの整数を表し、mBは、Bに置換可能な最大の整数を表す;m2が2以上の場合は、2個以上のRb2は同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 式(b3-1)において、*は、化合物を構成する他の原子または原子団との連結手を表し、
およびBは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族炭化水素環または複素環を表し、
b3およびRb3は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を表し、
は、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
m3は、0~mCの整数を表し、mCは、Bに置換可能な最大の整数を表し、
m4は、0~mDの整数を表し、mDは、Bに置換可能な最大の整数を表す。
m3が2以上の場合は、2個以上のRb3は同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
m4が2以上の場合は、2個以上のRb4は同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 式(b4-1)において、*および*は、化合物を構成する他の原子または原子団との連結手を表し、
およびBは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族炭化水素環または複素環を表し、
b5およびRb6は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を表し、
は、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
m5は、0~mEの整数を表し、mEは、Bに置換可能な最大の整数を表し、
m6は、0~mFの整数を表し、mFは、Bに置換可能な最大の整数を表す。
m5が2以上の場合は、2個以上のRb5は同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
m6が2以上の場合は、2個以上のRb6は同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
B 1- (R b1 ) m1 (b1-1)
In the formula (b1-1), B 1 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring, R b1 represents a substituent, m1 represents an integer of 0 to mA, and mA can be substituted with B 1 Represents the maximum integer; when m1 is 2 or more, two or more R b1 may be the same or different.
* -B 2- (R b2 ) m2 (b2-1)
In formula (b2-1), * represents a bond with another atom or atomic group constituting the compound, B 2 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring, and R b2 represents a substituent. , M2 represents an integer of 0 to mB, and mB represents the largest integer that can be substituted for B 2 ; when m2 is 2 or more, two or more R b2s may be the same or different May be.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
In the formula (b3-1), * represents a bond with another atom or atomic group constituting the compound,
B 3 and B 4 each independently represents an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring,
R b3 and R b3 each independently represent a substituent,
L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
m3 represents an integer of 0 to mC, mC represents the largest integer that can be substituted for B 3 ;
m4 is 0 to an integer of mD, mD represents the largest integer that can be replaced with B 4.
When m3 is 2 or more, two or more R b3 s may be the same or different.
When m4 is 2 or more, two or more Rb4s may be the same or different.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
In formula (b4-1), * 1 and * 2 represent a bond with another atom or atomic group constituting the compound,
B 5 and B 6 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring,
R b5 and R b6 each independently represent a substituent,
L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
m5 represents an integer of 0 to mE, mE represents the largest integer that can be substituted for B 5 ;
m6 is 0 to an integer of mF, mF represents the largest integer that can be replaced by B 6.
When m5 is 2 or more, two or more R b5 s may be the same or different.
When m6 is 2 or more, two or more Rb6s may be the same or different.
 Rb1~Rb6が表す置換基は、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、ヘテロアリールオキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、アミノ基、アシルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、ヘテロアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルホニルアミノ基、スルファモイル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロアリールチオ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、ヘテロアリールスルホニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、ヘテロアリールスルフィニル基、ウレイド基、リン酸アミド基、メルカプト基、スルホ基、カルボキシル基、ニトロ基、ヒドロキサム酸基、スルフィノ基、ヒドラジノ基、イミノ基、シリル基、ヒドロキシル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、エポキシ基などが挙げられる。これらの基は、さらに置換可能な基の場合、水素原子の一部または全部が置換基で置換されていてもよい。例えば、アルキル基の水素原子の一部または全部がハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよい。 The substituents represented by R b1 to R b6 are alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, heteroaryloxy groups, acyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, aryloxycarbonyl groups, heteroaryls. Oxycarbonyl group, acyloxy group, amino group, acylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, heteroaryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfonylamino group, sulfamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heteroarylthio Group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, heteroarylsulfonyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, heteroarylsulfinyl group, ureido group, phosphate phosphate Group, a mercapto group, a sulfo group, a carboxyl group, a nitro group, a hydroxamic acid group, sulfino group, a hydrazino group, an imino group, a silyl group, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an epoxy group. In the case where these groups are further substitutable groups, some or all of the hydrogen atoms may be substituted with substituents. For example, some or all of the hydrogen atoms in the alkyl group may be substituted with halogen atoms.
 B~Bが表す芳香族炭化水素環または複素環は、ベンゼン環、ベンゼン環を含む縮合環および含窒素複素環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を含むことが好ましく、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、ピリジン環、キノリン環、イソキノリン環、イミダゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、ピラゾール環、チアゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、トリアゾール環、ベンゾトリアゾール環、オキサゾール環、ベンゾオキサゾール環、イミダゾリン環、ピラジン環、キノキサリン環、ピリミジン環、キナゾリン環、ピリダジン環、トリアジン環、ピロール環、インドール環、イソインドール環、フルオレン環およびカルバゾール環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を含むことがより好ましく、ピリジン環、キノリン環、および、イソキノリン環がより好ましい。また、B~Bは、ベンゼン環であることがさらに好ましい。B~Bが表す芳香族炭化水素環または複素環は、無置換であってもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基が挙げられる。 The aromatic hydrocarbon ring or heterocyclic ring represented by B 1 to B 6 preferably includes at least one ring selected from a benzene ring, a condensed ring including a benzene ring, and a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, and includes a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring. Pyridine ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, imidazole ring, benzimidazole ring, pyrazole ring, thiazole ring, benzothiazole ring, triazole ring, benzotriazole ring, oxazole ring, benzoxazole ring, imidazoline ring, pyrazine ring, quinoxaline ring, More preferably, it includes at least one ring selected from a pyrimidine ring, a quinazoline ring, a pyridazine ring, a triazine ring, a pyrrole ring, an indole ring, an isoindole ring, a fluorene ring, and a carbazole ring, a pyridine ring, a quinoline ring, and More isoquinoline ring Masui. B 3 to B 6 are more preferably a benzene ring. The aromatic hydrocarbon ring or heterocyclic ring represented by B 1 to B 6 may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
 Lが表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、-CO-、-O-、-NH-、-OCO-、-COO-およびこれらの組み合わせからなる基が挙げられる。 Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L 1 include an alkylene group, —CO—, —O—, —NH—, —OCO—, —COO—, and a group consisting of a combination thereof.
 式(b1-1)において、m1は1以上の整数が好ましい。また、式(b2-1)において、m1は1以上の整数が好ましい。また、式(b3-1)において、m3およびm4は、1以上の整数が好ましい。また、式(b4-1)において、m5およびm6は、1以上の整数が好ましい。 In the formula (b1-1), m1 is preferably an integer of 1 or more. In the formula (b2-1), m1 is preferably an integer of 1 or more. In the formula (b3-1), m3 and m4 are preferably integers of 1 or more. In the formula (b4-1), m5 and m6 are preferably integers of 1 or more.
 式(b2-1)で表される部分構造を有する化合物としては、(1)複数の式(b2-1)で表される部分構造が連結基を介して結合した化合物;(2)式(b2-1)で表される部分構造が、単結合または連結基を介してポリマーの繰り返し単位に結合した化合物などが挙げられる。 The compound having a partial structure represented by the formula (b2-1) includes (1) a compound in which a plurality of partial structures represented by the formula (b2-1) are bonded via a linking group; Examples thereof include compounds in which the partial structure represented by b2-1) is bonded to a repeating unit of the polymer through a single bond or a linking group.
 式(b2-1)で表される部分構造を有する化合物が、複数の式(b2-1)で表される部分構造が連結基を介して結合した化合物である場合、連結基としては、1~100個の炭素原子、0~10個の窒素原子、0~50個の酸素原子、1~200個の水素原子、および0~20個の硫黄原子から成り立つ基が挙げられる。例えば、下記の構造単位または以下の構造単位が2個以上組み合わさって構成される基(環構造を形成していてもよい)を挙げることができる。 When the compound having a partial structure represented by the formula (b2-1) is a compound in which a plurality of partial structures represented by the formula (b2-1) are bonded via a linking group, the linking group includes 1 And groups consisting of ˜100 carbon atoms, 0-10 nitrogen atoms, 0-50 oxygen atoms, 1-200 hydrogen atoms, and 0-20 sulfur atoms. For example, a group composed of a combination of two or more of the following structural units or the following structural units (which may form a ring structure) may be mentioned.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 式(b2-1)で表される部分構造が、単結合または連結基を介してポリマーの繰り返し単位に結合した化合物(以下、ポリマー化合物ともいう)である場合、ポリマーの繰り返し単位としては、(メタ)アクリル系繰り返し単位、ビニル系繰り返し単位などが挙げられる。なお、(メタ)アクリル系繰り返し単位とは、(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する化合物に由来する繰り返し単位を意味する。ビニル系繰り返し単位とは、ビニル基を有する化合物に由来する繰り返し単位を意味する。 When the partial structure represented by the formula (b2-1) is a compound bonded to a polymer repeating unit via a single bond or a linking group (hereinafter, also referred to as a polymer compound), the polymer repeating unit includes: Examples thereof include a (meth) acrylic repeating unit and a vinylic repeating unit. The (meth) acrylic repeating unit means a repeating unit derived from a compound having a (meth) acryloyl group. The vinyl repeating unit means a repeating unit derived from a compound having a vinyl group.
 ポリマー化合物の具体例としては、例えば以下に示す繰り返し単位を有する化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Specific examples of the polymer compound include compounds having the following repeating units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
 上記式中、Rb100は、水素原子またはアルキル基を表す。Lb1は、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。Bは、芳香族炭化水素環または複素環を表し、Rb2は置換基を表し、m2は0~mBの整数を表し、mBは、Bに置換可能な最大の整数を表す;m2が2以上の場合は、2以上のRb2は同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。 In the above formula, R b100 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. L b1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. B 2 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring, R b2 represents a substituent, m 2 represents an integer of 0 to mB, and m B represents the largest integer that can be substituted for B 2 ; In the case of two or more, two or more R b2 may be the same or different.
 上記式における、B、Rb2およびm2は、(b2-1)のB、Rb2およびm2と同義である。 In the above formula, B 2 , R b2 and m2 have the same meanings as B 2 , R b2 and m2 in (b2-1).
 上記式におけるRb100が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましく、1がさらに好ましい。上記式において、Rb100は、水素原子またはメチル基が好ましい。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R b100 in the above formula is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3, and still more preferably 1. In the above formula, R b100 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
 上記式におけるLb1が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-SO-、-NR10-(R10は水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、水素原子が好ましい)、または、これらの組み合わせからなる基が挙げられる。アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10がさらに好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれであってもよい。また、環状のアルキレン基は、単環、多環のいずれであってもよい。 As the divalent linking group represented by L b1 in the above formula, an alkylene group, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —SO 2 —, —NR 10 — (R 10 Represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom), or a group consisting of a combination thereof. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. Further, the cyclic alkylene group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
 凝集抑制剤がポリマー化合物の場合、凝集抑制剤は、式(b2-1)で表される部分構造を有する繰り返し単位の他に、他の繰り返し単位をさらに有していてもよい。他の繰り返し単位としては、後述の樹脂で説明する繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 When the aggregation inhibitor is a polymer compound, the aggregation inhibitor may further include other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit having the partial structure represented by the formula (b2-1). Examples of the other repeating unit include the repeating units described in the resin described later.
 凝集抑制剤がポリマー化合物の場合、凝集抑制剤は、式(b2-1)で表される部分構造を有する繰り返し単位を、ポリマー化合物の全繰り返し単位の5~100モル%含むことが好ましく、15~100モル%含むことがより好ましく、30~100モル%含むことがさらに好ましい。 When the aggregation inhibitor is a polymer compound, the aggregation inhibitor preferably contains 5 to 100 mol% of repeating units having a partial structure represented by the formula (b2-1) based on the total repeating units of the polymer compound. More preferably, it is contained in an amount of ˜100 mol%, more preferably 30-100 mol%.
 式(b3-1)で表される部分構造を有する化合物としては、(1)複数の式(b3-1)で表される部分構造が連結基を介して結合した化合物;(2)式(b3-1)で表される部分構造が、単結合または連結基を介してポリマーの繰り返し単位に結合した化合物などが挙げられる。連結基、ポリマーの繰り返し単位については、上述した内容と同義である。 The compound having the partial structure represented by the formula (b3-1) includes (1) a compound in which a plurality of partial structures represented by the formula (b3-1) are bonded via a linking group; Examples thereof include compounds in which the partial structure represented by b3-1) is bonded to a repeating unit of the polymer through a single bond or a linking group. The linking group and the repeating unit of the polymer have the same meaning as described above.
 式(b4-1)で表される部分構造を有する化合物は、式(b4-1)で表される部分構造を1分子中に2以上有していてもよい。すなわち、複数の式(b4-1)で表される部分構造が、単結合または連結基を介して結合した構造を有する化合物であってもよい。また、*および*の一方が、単結合または連結基を介してポリマーの繰り返し単位に結合していてもよい。 The compound having a partial structure represented by the formula (b4-1) may have two or more partial structures represented by the formula (b4-1) in one molecule. That is, a compound having a structure in which a plurality of partial structures represented by the formula (b4-1) are bonded through a single bond or a linking group may be used. One of * 1 and * 2 may be bonded to the repeating unit of the polymer via a single bond or a linking group.
 本発明において、凝集抑制剤は、実質的に分子量分布を有さない化合物であってもよく、分子量分布を有する化合物であってもよい。 In the present invention, the aggregation inhibitor may be a compound having substantially no molecular weight distribution or a compound having a molecular weight distribution.
 凝集抑制剤として、実質的に分子量分布を有さない化合物を用いた場合、凝集抑制剤が近赤外線吸収化合物に近づきやすく、凝集抑制剤と近赤外線吸収化合物とが効果的に相互作用して、膜中における近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集を効果的に抑制することができる。
 また、凝集抑制剤として、分子量分布を有する化合物を用いた場合、製膜時の加熱による膜中からの凝集抑制剤の昇華などを抑制でき、膜中における近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集をより効果的に抑制することができる。
When a compound having substantially no molecular weight distribution is used as the aggregation inhibitor, the aggregation inhibitor tends to approach the near infrared absorbing compound, and the aggregation inhibitor and the near infrared absorbing compound interact effectively, Aggregation of the near infrared ray absorbing compound in the film can be effectively suppressed.
In addition, when a compound having a molecular weight distribution is used as an aggregation inhibitor, sublimation of the aggregation inhibitor from the film due to heating during film formation can be suppressed, and aggregation of near-infrared absorbing compounds in the film is more effective. Can be suppressed.
 ここで、分子量分布を有する化合物は、ポリマーなどの繰り返し単位を有する化合物が挙げられる。例えば、上述した(b2-1-1)~(b2-1-3)で表される繰り返し単位を有する化合物などが挙げられる。
 本発明において、分子量分布を実質的に有さない化合物は、分散度(重量平均分子量(Mw)/数平均分子量(Mn))が、1.00~2.00である化合物が好ましく、分散度が1.00~1.10である化合物がより好ましく、分散度が1.00~1.05である化合物がさらに好ましく、分散度が1.00である化合物が特に好ましい。また、実質的に分子量分布を有さない化合物は、構造式から分子量が算出できる化合物であることが好ましい。
Here, the compound having a molecular weight distribution includes a compound having a repeating unit such as a polymer. Examples thereof include compounds having the repeating units represented by the above (b2-1-1) to (b2-1-3).
In the present invention, the compound having substantially no molecular weight distribution is preferably a compound having a dispersity (weight average molecular weight (Mw) / number average molecular weight (Mn)) of 1.00 to 2.00. Are more preferable, compounds having a dispersity of 1.00 to 1.05 are more preferable, and compounds having a dispersity of 1.00 are particularly preferable. Further, the compound having substantially no molecular weight distribution is preferably a compound whose molecular weight can be calculated from the structural formula.
 凝集抑制剤が実質的に分子量分布を有さない化合物の場合、凝集抑制剤の分子量は、100~500が好ましい。下限は、130以上がより好ましい。上限は、450以下がより好ましい。分子量が上記範囲であれば、凝集抑制と高温でのベークによる昇華抑制を両立するという効果が期待できる。
 また、凝集抑制剤が実質的に分子量分布を有さない化合物の場合、芳香族炭化水素環および複素環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を、1分子中に1~10個有することが好ましく、1~8個有することがより好ましく、1~6個有することがさらに好ましく、1~4個有することが特に好ましい。
 凝集抑制剤の効果は、芳香族炭化水素環および複素環の数が多いほど顕著であるが、これらの環の数が多くなるに伴い、共役長が伸びる影響で可視領域に吸収を有してしまうため可視透明性が低下することがある。環の数が、上記範囲(特に1~4個)であることが、可視透明性および凝集抑制の観点から好ましい。
When the aggregation inhibitor is a compound having substantially no molecular weight distribution, the molecular weight of the aggregation inhibitor is preferably 100 to 500. The lower limit is more preferably 130 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 450 or less. If the molecular weight is in the above range, an effect of achieving both suppression of aggregation and suppression of sublimation by baking at high temperature can be expected.
In the case where the aggregation inhibitor is a compound having substantially no molecular weight distribution, it preferably has 1 to 10 rings in one molecule selected from aromatic hydrocarbon rings and heterocyclic rings. It is more preferably 1 to 8, more preferably 1 to 6, still more preferably 1 to 4.
The effect of the aggregation inhibitor is more prominent as the number of aromatic hydrocarbon rings and heterocyclic rings increases. Therefore, visible transparency may be reduced. The number of rings is preferably in the above range (particularly 1 to 4) from the viewpoint of visible transparency and aggregation suppression.
 凝集抑制剤が分子量分布を有する化合物の場合、凝集抑制剤の重量平均分子量は、3,000~50,000が好ましい。下限は、5,000以上がより好ましい。上限は、40,000以下がより好ましい。重量平均分子量が上記範囲であれば、J会合性と凝集抑制を両立できるという効果が期待できる。
 また、凝集抑制剤が分子量分布を有する化合物の場合、凝集抑制剤は、繰り返し単位を有する化合物であることが好ましい。また、前述の有する繰り返し単位は、芳香族炭化水素環および複素環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位であることが好ましく、前述の環を側鎖に1~10個有する繰り返し単位であることがさらに好ましく、前述の環を側鎖に1~8個有する繰り返し単位であることが一層好ましく、前述の環を側鎖に1~6個有する繰り返し単位であることが特に好ましく、前述の環を側鎖に1~4個有する繰り返し単位であることが最も好ましい。
When the aggregation inhibitor is a compound having a molecular weight distribution, the weight average molecular weight of the aggregation inhibitor is preferably 3,000 to 50,000. The lower limit is more preferably 5,000 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 40,000 or less. If a weight average molecular weight is the said range, the effect that J association property and aggregation suppression can be made compatible can be anticipated.
When the aggregation inhibitor is a compound having a molecular weight distribution, the aggregation inhibitor is preferably a compound having a repeating unit. The repeating unit described above is preferably a repeating unit having at least one ring selected from an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and a heterocyclic ring in the side chain, and has 1 to 10 rings in the side chain. It is more preferably a repeating unit, more preferably a repeating unit having 1 to 8 rings in the side chain, and particularly preferably a repeating unit having 1 to 6 rings in the side chain. The repeating unit having 1 to 4 rings in the side chain is most preferred.
 本発明において、凝集抑制剤の酸価は、100mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、80mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、50mgKOH/g以下がさらに好ましく、10mgKOH/g以下が特に好ましい。この態様によれば、現像液耐性が良化するという効果が期待できる。 In the present invention, the acid value of the aggregation inhibitor is preferably 100 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 80 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 50 mgKOH / g or less, and particularly preferably 10 mgKOH / g or less. According to this aspect, an effect of improving the developer resistance can be expected.
 本発明において、凝集抑制剤は、カルボキシル基を有さない化合物であることも好ましい。この態様によれば、現像液耐性が良化することという効果が期待できる。 In the present invention, the aggregation inhibitor is preferably a compound having no carboxyl group. According to this aspect, it is possible to expect an effect that the developer resistance is improved.
 本発明において、凝集抑制剤はラジカル重合性基を有さない化合物であることが好ましい。この態様によれば、露光後の高温でのベーク時におけるさらなる凝集が抑制されるという効果が期待できる。ラジカル重合性基としては、ビニル基、スチリル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基などのエチレン性不飽和結合を有する基が挙げられる。 In the present invention, the aggregation inhibitor is preferably a compound having no radical polymerizable group. According to this aspect, the effect that the further aggregation at the time of baking at high temperature after exposure is suppressed can be expected. Examples of the radical polymerizable group include groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, such as a vinyl group, a styryl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
 本発明において、凝集抑制剤は、酸化防止機能および/または重合禁止機能をさらに有していてもよい。 In the present invention, the aggregation inhibitor may further have an antioxidant function and / or a polymerization inhibition function.
 凝集抑制剤の具体例としては、例えば下記に示す化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Specific examples of the aggregation inhibitor include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 凝集抑制剤の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、0.5~20質量%が好ましい。上限は、10質量%以下がより好ましく、8質量%以下がさらに好ましい。下限は、1質量%以上がより好ましい。
 また、近赤外線吸収化合物の100質量部(近赤外線吸収化合物を2種類以上含む場合は、2種類以上の近赤外線吸収化合物の合計100質量部)に対し、凝集抑制剤を1~200質量部含むことが好ましい。上限は、100質量部以下がより好ましく、50質量部以下がさらに好ましく、40質量部以下が一層好ましく、38質量部以下がより一層好ましく、35質量部以下が特に好ましい。下限は、2質量部以上がより好ましく、3質量部以上がさらに好ましく、4.5質量部以上が一層好ましく、5質量部以上がより一層好ましく、10質量部以上が特に好ましい。
 凝集抑制剤の含有量が上記の下限値以上であれば、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集を効果的に抑制でき、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集サイズの粗大化をより効果的に抑制することができる。また、凝集抑制剤の含有量が上記の上限値以下であれば、近赤外線吸収化合物が膜中で適度に凝集して存在でき、良好な耐光性や耐熱性が得られる。
 凝集抑制剤は1種のみでもよく、2種以上でもよい。2種以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The content of the aggregation inhibitor is preferably 0.5 to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. The upper limit is more preferably 10% by mass or less, and still more preferably 8% by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 1% by mass or more.
Further, 1 to 200 parts by mass of an aggregation inhibitor is included with respect to 100 parts by mass of the near-infrared absorbing compound (when two or more near-infrared absorbing compounds are included, the total of two or more near-infrared absorbing compounds is 100 parts by mass). It is preferable. The upper limit is more preferably 100 parts by mass or less, still more preferably 50 parts by mass or less, still more preferably 40 parts by mass or less, still more preferably 38 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 35 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 2 parts by mass or more, further preferably 3 parts by mass or more, still more preferably 4.5 parts by mass or more, still more preferably 5 parts by mass or more, and particularly preferably 10 parts by mass or more.
If content of an aggregation inhibitor is more than said lower limit, aggregation of a near-infrared absorption compound can be suppressed effectively and coarsening of the aggregation size of a near-infrared absorption compound can be suppressed more effectively. Moreover, if content of an aggregation inhibitor is below said upper limit, a near-infrared absorptive compound can exist moderately aggregated in a film | membrane, and favorable light resistance and heat resistance are obtained.
The aggregation inhibitor may be only one type or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<有彩色着色剤>>
 本発明の組成物は、有彩色着色剤を含有することができる。本発明において、有彩色着色剤とは、白色着色剤および黒色着色剤以外の着色剤を意味する。有彩色着色剤は、波長400nm以上650nm未満の範囲に吸収を有する着色剤が好ましい。本発明において、有彩色着色剤は、顔料であってもよく、染料であってもよい。
<< Chromatic colorant >>
The composition of the present invention can contain a chromatic colorant. In the present invention, the chromatic colorant means a colorant other than the white colorant and the black colorant. The chromatic colorant is preferably a colorant having absorption in a wavelength range of 400 nm or more and less than 650 nm. In the present invention, the chromatic colorant may be a pigment or a dye.
 顔料は、有機顔料であることが好ましく、以下のものを挙げることができる。但し本発明で用いうる顔料は、これらに限定されるものではない。
 カラーインデックス(C.I.)Pigment Yellow1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214等(以上、黄色顔料)、
 C.I.Pigment Orange 2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73等(以上、オレンジ色顔料)、
 C.I.Pigment Red 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,270,272,279等(以上、赤色顔料)、
 C.I.Pigment Green 7,10,36,37,58,59等(以上、緑色顔料)、
 C.I.Pigment Violet 1,19,23,27,32,37,42等(以上、紫色顔料)、
 C.I.Pigment Blue 1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,60,64,66,79,80等(以上、青色顔料)、
 これら有機顔料は、単独または種々組合せて用いることができる。
The pigment is preferably an organic pigment, and examples thereof include the following. However, the pigment that can be used in the present invention is not limited to these.
Color Index (CI) Pigment Yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83, 86, 93 , 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129 , 137, 138, 139, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 161, 162, 164, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214 etc. (above, yellow pigment),
C. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, etc. (Orange pigment)
C. I. Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48: 4 49, 49: 1, 49: 2, 52: 1, 52: 2, 53: 1, 57: 1, 60: 1, 63: 1, 66, 67, 81: 1, 81: 2, 81: 3 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184 185, 187, 188, 190, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 216, 220, 224, 226, 242, 246, 254, 255, 264, 270, 272, 279, etc. (above, red Pigment)
C. I. Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, etc. (above, green pigment),
C. I. Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, etc. (above, purple pigment),
C. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 22, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80, etc. (above, blue pigment),
These organic pigments can be used alone or in various combinations.
 染料としては特に制限はなく、公知の染料が使用できる。化学構造としては、ピラゾールアゾ系、アニリノアゾ系、トリフェニルメタン系、アントラキノン系、アントラピリドン系、ベンジリデン系、オキソノール系、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ系、ピリドンアゾ系、シアニン系、フェノチアジン系、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン系、キサンテン系、フタロシアニン系、ベンゾピラン系、インジゴ系、ピロメテン系等の染料が使用できる。また、これらの染料の多量体を用いてもよい。また、特開2015-028144号公報、特開2015-34966号公報に記載の染料を用いることもできる。 The dye is not particularly limited, and a known dye can be used. The chemical structure includes pyrazole azo, anilino azo, triphenylmethane, anthraquinone, anthrapyridone, benzylidene, oxonol, pyrazolotriazole azo, pyridone azo, cyanine, phenothiazine, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine, Xanthene, phthalocyanine, benzopyran, indigo, and pyromethene dyes can be used. Moreover, you may use the multimer of these dyes. Further, the dyes described in JP-A-2015-028144 and JP-A-2015-34966 can also be used.
 本発明の組成物が、有彩色着色剤を含有する場合、有彩色着色剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して30質量%以下が好ましく、20質量%以下がより好ましく、15質量%以下がさらに好ましい。下限は、例えば、0.01質量%以上とすることができ、0.5質量%以上とすることもできる。
 また、本発明の組成物は、有彩色着色剤を実質的に含有しない態様とすることもできる。有彩色着色剤を実質的に含有しない場合、有彩色着色剤の含有量が、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、0.005質量%以下が好ましく、0.001質量%以下がより好ましく、有彩色着色剤を含有しないことがさらに好ましい。
When the composition of the present invention contains a chromatic colorant, the content of the chromatic colorant is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the composition, 15 A mass% or less is more preferable. For example, the lower limit may be 0.01% by mass or more, and may be 0.5% by mass or more.
Moreover, the composition of this invention can also be made into the aspect which does not contain a chromatic color agent substantially. When the chromatic colorant is not substantially contained, the content of the chromatic colorant is preferably 0.005% by mass or less, and 0.001% by mass or less based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. More preferably, no chromatic colorant is contained.
<<近赤外領域の光の少なくとも一部を透過し、かつ、可視領域の光を遮光する色材(可視光を遮光する色材)>>
 本発明の組成物は、近赤外領域の光の少なくとも一部を透過し、かつ、可視領域の光を遮光する色材(以下、可視光を遮光する色材ともいう)を含有することもできる。
<< Coloring material that transmits at least part of light in the near infrared region and shields light in the visible region (coloring material that blocks visible light) >>
The composition of the present invention may contain a colorant that transmits at least part of light in the near infrared region and shields light in the visible region (hereinafter also referred to as colorant that shields visible light). it can.
 可視光を遮光する色材は、以下の(1)および(2)の少なくとも一方の要件を満たすことが好ましく、(1)の要件を満たしていることがより好ましい。
(1):2種以上の有彩色着色剤を含む態様。
(2):有機系黒色着色剤を含む態様。
The colorant that blocks visible light preferably satisfies at least one of the following requirements (1) and (2), and more preferably satisfies the requirement (1).
(1): An embodiment containing two or more chromatic colorants.
(2): An embodiment containing an organic black colorant.
 有彩色着色剤としては、上述した有彩色着色剤が挙げられる。有機系黒色着色剤としては、例えば、ビスベンゾフラノン化合物、アゾメチン化合物、ペリレン化合物、アゾ化合物などが挙げられ、ビスベンゾフラノン化合物、ペリレン化合物が好ましい。ビスベンゾフラノン化合物としては、特表2010-534726号公報、特表2012-515233号公報、特表2012-515234号公報などに記載の化合物が挙げられる。例えば、BASF社製の「Irgaphor Black」が挙げられる。ペリレン化合物としては、C.I.Pigment Black31、32などが挙げられる。アゾメチン化合物としては、特開平1-170601号公報、特開平2-34664号公報などに記載の化合物が挙げられ、例えば、大日精化工業(株)製の「クロモファインブラックA1103」が挙げられる。 Examples of the chromatic colorant include the chromatic colorants described above. Examples of the organic black colorant include bisbenzofuranone compounds, azomethine compounds, perylene compounds, and azo compounds, and bisbenzofuranone compounds and perylene compounds are preferable. Examples of the bisbenzofuranone compounds include compounds described in JP-T 2010-534726, JP-2012-515233, JP-2012-515234, and the like. An example is “Irgaphor Black” manufactured by BASF. Examples of perylene compounds include C.I. I. Pigment Black 31, 32 and the like. Examples of the azomethine compound include compounds described in JP-A-1-170601 and JP-A-2-34664, and examples thereof include “Chromofine Black A1103” manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd.
 本発明において、可視光を遮光する色材は、例えば、波長450nm以上650nm未満の範囲における吸光度の最小値Aと、波長900~1,300nmの範囲における吸光度の最小値Bとの比であるA/Bが4.5以上であることが好ましい。
 上記の特性は、1種の素材で満たしていてもよく、複数の素材の組み合わせで満たしていてもよい。例えば、上記(1)の態様の場合、複数の有彩色着色剤を組み合わせて上記分光特性を満たしていることが好ましい。
In the present invention, the colorant that blocks visible light is, for example, a ratio between the minimum absorbance A in the wavelength range of 450 nm to less than 650 nm and the minimum absorbance B in the wavelength range of 900 to 1,300 nm. / B is preferably 4.5 or more.
The above characteristics may be satisfied with one kind of material, or may be satisfied with a combination of a plurality of materials. For example, in the case of the above aspect (1), it is preferable that a plurality of chromatic colorants are combined to satisfy the spectral characteristics.
 可視光を遮光する色材として2種以上の有彩色着色剤を含む場合、有彩色着色剤は、赤色着色剤、緑色着色剤、青色着色剤、黄色着色剤、紫色着色剤およびオレンジ色着色剤から選ばれる着色剤であることが好ましい。有彩色着色剤の組み合わせとしては、例えば以下が挙げられる。
(1)黄色着色剤、青色着色剤、紫色着色剤および赤色着色剤を含有する態様
(2)黄色着色剤、青色着色剤および赤色着色剤を含有する態様
(3)黄色着色剤、紫色着色剤および赤色着色剤を含有する態様
(4)黄色着色剤および紫色着色剤を含有する態様
(5)緑色着色剤、青色着色剤、紫色着色剤および赤色着色剤を含有する態様
(6)紫色着色剤およびオレンジ色着色剤を含有する態様
(7)緑色着色剤、紫色着色剤および赤色着色剤を含有する態様
(8)緑色着色剤および赤色着色剤を含有する態様。
When two or more kinds of chromatic colorants are included as a colorant that blocks visible light, the chromatic colorants are red colorants, green colorants, blue colorants, yellow colorants, purple colorants, and orange colorants. It is preferable that it is a coloring agent chosen from these. Examples of combinations of chromatic colorants include the following.
(1) Embodiment containing yellow colorant, blue colorant, purple colorant and red colorant (2) Embodiment containing yellow colorant, blue colorant and red colorant (3) Yellow colorant, purple colorant And (4) an embodiment containing a yellow colorant and a purple colorant (5) an embodiment containing a green colorant, a blue colorant, a purple colorant and a red colorant (6) a purple colorant And an embodiment containing an orange colorant (7) an embodiment containing a green colorant, a purple colorant and a red colorant (8) an embodiment containing a green colorant and a red colorant.
 各着色剤の比率(質量比)としては例えば以下が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035
Examples of the ratio (mass ratio) of each colorant include the following.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035
 本発明の組成物が、可視光を遮光する色材を含有する場合、可視光を遮光する色材の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して30質量%以下が好ましく、20質量%以下がより好ましく、15質量%以下がさらに好ましい。下限は、例えば、0.01質量%以上とすることができ、0.5質量%以上とすることもできる。
 また、本発明の組成物は、可視光を遮光する色材を実質的に含有しない態様とすることもできる。可視光を遮光する色材を実質的に含有しない場合、可視光を遮光する色材の含有量が、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、0.005質量%以下が好ましく、0.001質量%以下がより好ましく、可視光を遮光する色材を含有しないことがさらに好ましい。
When the composition of the present invention contains a colorant that blocks visible light, the content of the colorant that blocks visible light is preferably 30% by mass or less, and 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. The following is more preferable, and 15% by mass or less is more preferable. For example, the lower limit may be 0.01% by mass or more, and may be 0.5% by mass or more.
Moreover, the composition of this invention can also be made into the aspect which does not contain the coloring material which shields visible light substantially. When the coloring material that blocks visible light is not substantially contained, the content of the coloring material that blocks visible light is preferably 0.005% by mass or less based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. 0.001 mass% or less is more preferable, and it is further more preferable not to contain the color material which shields visible light.
<<顔料誘導体>>
 本発明の組成物は、顔料を含む場合は、さらに顔料誘導体を含有することができる。顔料誘導体としては、顔料の一部が、酸性基、塩基性基またはフタルイミドメチル基で置換した構造を有する化合物が好ましい。本発明の組成物が顔料誘導体を含有する場合、顔料誘導体の含有量は、組成物中に含まれる顔料100質量部に対し、1~50質量部が好ましい。下限値は、3質量部以上がより好ましく、5質量部以上がさらに好ましい。上限値は、40質量部以下がより好ましく、30質量部以下がさらに好ましい。顔料誘導体の含有量が上記範囲であれば、顔料の分散性を高めて、顔料の凝集を効率よく抑制できる。顔料誘導体は1種のみでも、2種以上でもよく、2種以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<< Pigment derivative >>
When the composition of this invention contains a pigment, it can contain a pigment derivative further. As the pigment derivative, a compound having a structure in which a part of the pigment is substituted with an acidic group, a basic group or a phthalimidomethyl group is preferable. When the composition of the present invention contains a pigment derivative, the content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 50 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment contained in the composition. The lower limit is more preferably 3 parts by mass or more, and still more preferably 5 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 40 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 30 parts by mass or less. If content of a pigment derivative is the said range, the dispersibility of a pigment can be improved and aggregation of a pigment can be suppressed efficiently. Only one pigment derivative or two or more pigment derivatives may be used, and in the case of two or more pigment derivatives, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<樹脂>>
 本発明の組成物は、樹脂を含むことが好ましい。なお、樹脂は、上述した凝集抑制剤以外の成分である。樹脂は、例えば、顔料などを組成物中で分散させる用途、バインダーの用途で配合される。なお、主に顔料などを分散させるために用いられる樹脂を分散剤ともいう。ただし、樹脂のこのような用途は一例であって、このような用途以外を目的で使用することもできる。
<< Resin >>
The composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin. In addition, resin is components other than the aggregation inhibitor mentioned above. The resin is blended, for example, for the purpose of dispersing a pigment or the like in the composition and the purpose of a binder. A resin used mainly for dispersing pigments is also called a dispersant. However, such use of the resin is merely an example, and the resin can be used for other purposes.
 樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、20,000~60,000が好ましい。下限は、25,000以上が好ましい。上限は、55,000以下が好ましい。
 樹脂の分散度(Mw/Mn)は、1.1~10.0が好ましい。下限は、1.3以上がより好ましく、1.5以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、8.0以下がより好ましく、6.0以下がさらに好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 20,000 to 60,000. The lower limit is preferably 25,000 or more. The upper limit is preferably 55,000 or less.
The resin dispersity (Mw / Mn) is preferably 1.1 to 10.0. The lower limit is more preferably 1.3 or more, and further preferably 1.5 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 8.0 or less, and even more preferably 6.0 or less.
 樹脂のガラス転移温度は、0~100℃が好ましい。下限は、10℃以上がより好ましく、20℃以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、95℃以下がより好ましく、90℃以下がさらに好ましい。なお、本発明において、樹脂のガラス転移温度は、示差走査熱量測定装置(セイコーインスツルメンツ製、DSC1000)を用い、サンプルパンに試料5mg秤量し、窒素気流中で-20℃から200℃まで10℃/分の昇温速度で昇温し測定した値である。ベースラインが偏奇し始める温度と、新たにべースラインに戻る温度との平均値を樹脂のガラス転移温度とした。 The glass transition temperature of the resin is preferably 0 to 100 ° C. The lower limit is more preferably 10 ° C. or higher, and further preferably 20 ° C. or higher. The upper limit is more preferably 95 ° C. or less, and still more preferably 90 ° C. or less. In the present invention, the glass transition temperature of the resin is determined by weighing 5 mg of sample in a sample pan using a differential scanning calorimeter (Seiko Instruments, DSC1000) and in a nitrogen stream from 10 ° C / 200 ° C to -20 ° C to 200 ° C. It is the value measured by raising the temperature at a temperature elevation rate of minutes. The average value of the temperature at which the baseline begins to deviate and the temperature at which the baseline returns to the base line was taken as the glass transition temperature of the resin.
 樹脂の種類としては、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルフォスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリシロキサン樹脂が挙げられ、(メタ)アクリル樹脂が好ましい。これらの樹脂から選択される1種を単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を混合して使用してもよい。 Types of resin include (meth) acrylic resin, ene / thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resin, polyimide resin, Polyamideimide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, and polysiloxane resin are exemplified, and (meth) acrylic resin is preferable. One kind selected from these resins may be used alone, or two or more kinds may be mixed and used.
 樹脂は、酸基を有していてもよい。酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシル基、リン酸基、スルホン酸基、フェノール性ヒドロキシル基などが挙げられる。これらの酸基は、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。酸基を有する樹脂はアルカリ可溶性樹脂として用いることもできる。以下、酸基を有する樹脂をアルカリ可溶性樹脂ともいう。 Resin may have an acid group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Resins having acid groups can also be used as alkali-soluble resins. Hereinafter, the resin having an acid group is also referred to as an alkali-soluble resin.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、側鎖にカルボキシル基を有するポリマーが好ましく、メタクリル酸共重合体、アクリル酸共重合体、イタコン酸共重合体、クロトン酸共重合体、マレイン酸共重合体、部分エステル化マレイン酸共重合体、ノボラック型樹脂などのアルカリ可溶性フェノール樹脂等、並びに側鎖にカルボキシル基を有する酸性セルロース誘導体、ヒドロキシル基を有するポリマーに酸無水物を付加させたものが挙げられる。特に、(メタ)アクリル酸と、これと共重合可能な他のモノマーとの共重合体が好適である。(メタ)アクリル酸と共重合可能な他のモノマーとしては、アルキル(メタ)アクリレート、アリール(メタ)アクリレート、ビニル化合物などが挙げられる。アルキル(メタ)アクリレートおよびアリール(メタ)アクリレートとしては、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、ペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、オクチル(メタ)アクリレート、フェニル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、トリル(メタ)アクリレート、ナフチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、グリシジルメタクリレート、テトラヒドロフルフリルメタクリレート等が挙げられ、ビニル化合物としては、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ビニルトルエン、アクリロニトリル、ビニルアセテート、N-ビニルピロリドン、ポリスチレンマクロモノマー、ポリメチルメタクリレートマクロモノマー等が挙げられる。また、他のモノマーとして、N-フェニルマレイミド、N-シクロヘキシルマレイミド等の、特開平10-300922号公報に記載のN位置換マレイミドモノマーを用いることもできる。これらの(メタ)アクリル酸と共重合可能な他のモノマーは1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。 As the alkali-soluble resin, a polymer having a carboxyl group in the side chain is preferable, and a methacrylic acid copolymer, an acrylic acid copolymer, an itaconic acid copolymer, a crotonic acid copolymer, a maleic acid copolymer, and a partial esterification are used. Examples include maleic acid copolymers, alkali-soluble phenol resins such as novolak resins, acidic cellulose derivatives having a carboxyl group in the side chain, and polymers having a hydroxyl group added with an acid anhydride. In particular, a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid and another monomer copolymerizable therewith is suitable. Examples of other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid include alkyl (meth) acrylates, aryl (meth) acrylates, and vinyl compounds. As alkyl (meth) acrylate and aryl (meth) acrylate, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate, Hexyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, tolyl (meth) acrylate, naphthyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl methacrylate, etc. Examples of the vinyl compound include styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyl toluene, acrylonitrile, vinyl acetate, N-vinyl pyrrolidone, Styrene macromonomer, polymethylmethacrylate macromonomer, and the like. As other monomers, N-substituted maleimide monomers described in JP-A-10-300922 such as N-phenylmaleimide and N-cyclohexylmaleimide can also be used. Only one kind of these other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid may be used, or two or more kinds may be used.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート/(メタ)アクリル酸共重合体、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート/(メタ)アクリル酸/2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート共重合体、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート/(メタ)アクリル酸/他のモノマーからなる多元共重合体を好ましく用いることができる。また、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートを共重合したもの、特開平7-140654号公報に記載の、2-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート/ポリスチレンマクロモノマー/ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体、2-ヒドロキシ-3-フェノキシプロピルアクリレート/ポリメチルメタクリレートマクロモノマー/ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート/ポリスチレンマクロモノマー/メチルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート/ポリスチレンマクロモノマー/ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体なども好ましく用いることができる。 Examples of the alkali-soluble resin include benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid copolymer, benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate copolymer, and benzyl (meth) acrylate. A multi-component copolymer composed of / (meth) acrylic acid / other monomers can be preferably used. Further, a copolymer of 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, a 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer described in JP-A-7-140654, 2 -Hydroxy-3-phenoxypropyl acrylate / polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / methyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate / polystyrene A macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer can also be preferably used.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、下記式(ED1)で示される化合物および/または下記式(ED2)で表される化合物(以下、これらの化合物を「エーテルダイマー」と称することもある。)を含むモノマー成分を重合してなるポリマーを含むことも好ましい。 The alkali-soluble resin includes a monomer component including a compound represented by the following formula (ED1) and / or a compound represented by the following formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as “ether dimers”). It is also preferable to include a polymer obtained by polymerization.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
 式(ED1)中、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
 式(ED2)中、Rは、水素原子または炭素数1~30の有機基を表す。式(ED2)の具体例としては、特開2010-168539号公報の記載を参酌できる。
In formula (ED1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
In the formula (ED2), R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. As a specific example of the formula (ED2), the description in JP 2010-168539 A can be referred to.
 式(ED1)中、RおよびRで表される置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基としては、特に制限はないが、例えば、メチル、エチル、n-プロピル、イソプロピル、n-ブチル、イソブチル、tert-ブチル、tert-アミル、ステアリル、ラウリル、2-エチルヘキシル等の直鎖状または分岐状のアルキル基;フェニル等のアリール基;シクロヘキシル、tert-ブチルシクロヘキシル、ジシクロペンタジエニル、トリシクロデカニル、イソボルニル、アダマンチル、2-メチル-2-アダマンチル等の脂環式基;1-メトキシエチル、1-エトキシエチル等のアルコキシで置換されたアルキル基;ベンジル等のアリール基で置換されたアルキル基;等が挙げられる。これらの中でも特に、メチル、エチル、シクロヘキシル、ベンジル等のような酸や熱で脱離しにくい1級または2級炭素の置換基が耐熱性の点で好ましい。 In the formula (ED1), the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent represented by R 1 and R 2 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include methyl, ethyl, n- Linear or branched alkyl groups such as propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, tert-amyl, stearyl, lauryl, 2-ethylhexyl; aryl groups such as phenyl; cyclohexyl, tert-butylcyclohexyl, Alicyclic groups such as dicyclopentadienyl, tricyclodecanyl, isobornyl, adamantyl and 2-methyl-2-adamantyl; alkyl groups substituted with alkoxy such as 1-methoxyethyl and 1-ethoxyethyl; benzyl and the like An alkyl group substituted with an aryl group of Among these, an acid such as methyl, ethyl, cyclohexyl, benzyl or the like, or a primary or secondary carbon substituent which is difficult to be removed by heat is preferable from the viewpoint of heat resistance.
 エーテルダイマーの具体例としては、例えば、特開2013-29760号公報の段落番号0317を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。エーテルダイマーは、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。 As a specific example of the ether dimer, for example, paragraph number 0317 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. Only one type of ether dimer may be used, or two or more types may be used.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、下記式(X)で示される化合物に由来する繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 式(X)において、Rは、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、Rは、炭素数2~10のアルキレン基を表し、Rは、水素原子、またはベンゼン環を含んでもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基を表す。nは1~15の整数を表す。
The alkali-soluble resin may contain a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the following formula (X).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
In the formula (X), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or a carbon atom that may contain a benzene ring. Represents an alkyl group of ˜20. n represents an integer of 1 to 15.
 上記式(X)において、Rのアルキレン基の炭素数は、2~3が好ましい。また、Rのアルキル基の炭素数は1~20であるが、より好ましくは1~10であり、Rのアルキル基はベンゼン環を含んでもよい。Rで表されるベンゼン環を含むアルキル基としては、ベンジル基、2-フェニル(イソ)プロピル基等を挙げることができる。 In the above formula (X), the alkylene group of R 2 preferably has 2 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group of R 3 has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, and the alkyl group of R 3 may contain a benzene ring. Examples of the alkyl group containing a benzene ring represented by R 3 include a benzyl group and a 2-phenyl (iso) propyl group.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、特開2012-208494号公報の段落番号0558~0571(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/0235099号明細書の段落番号0685~0700)の記載、および特開2012-198408号公報の段落番号0076~0099の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。アルカリ可溶性樹脂の具体例としては、下記の樹脂が挙げられる。以下の構造式中Meはメチル基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Examples of alkali-soluble resins include paragraphs 0558 to 0571 in JP2012-208494A (paragraph numbers 0685 to 0700 in the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099), and JP2012-198408. The description of paragraph numbers 0076 to 0099 of the publication can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. Specific examples of the alkali-soluble resin include the following resins. In the following structural formulas, Me represents a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の酸価は、30~200mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、50mgKOH/g以上がより好ましく、70mgKOH/g以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、150mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、120mgKOH/g以下がさらに好ましい。 The acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 30 to 200 mgKOH / g. The lower limit is more preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more. The upper limit is more preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, and still more preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less.
 樹脂(アルカリ可溶性樹脂を含む)は、硬化性基を有していてもよい。硬化性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基、エポキシ基、メチロール基、アルコキシシリル基等が挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基などが挙げられる。アルコキシシリル基としては、モノアルコキシシリル基、ジアルコキシシリル基、トリアルコキシシリル基が挙げられる。 Resin (including alkali-soluble resin) may have a curable group. Examples of the curable group include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an epoxy group, a methylol group, and an alkoxysilyl group. Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group, and a (meth) acryloyloxy group. Examples of the alkoxysilyl group include a monoalkoxysilyl group, a dialkoxysilyl group, and a trialkoxysilyl group.
 硬化性基を有する繰り返し単位としては、下記式(A2-1)~(A2-4)で表される繰り返し単位などが挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Examples of the repeating unit having a curable group include repeating units represented by the following formulas (A2-1) to (A2-4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 Rは、水素原子またはアルキル基を表す。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましく、1がさらに好ましい。Rは、水素原子またはメチル基が好ましい。 R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 5 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1. R 1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
 L51は、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-SO-、-NR10-(R10は、水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、水素原子が好ましい)、または、これらの組み合わせからなる基が挙げられ、アルキレン基、アリーレン基およびアルキレン基の少なくとも1つと-O-との組み合わせからなる基が好ましい。アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10がさらに好ましい。アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよいが、無置換が好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれであってもよい。また、環状のアルキレン基は、単環、多環のいずれであってもよい。アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~18が好ましく、6~14がより好ましく、6~10がさらに好ましい。 L 51 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include an alkylene group, an arylene group, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —SO 2 —, —NR 10 — (R 10 represents a hydrogen atom Or a group consisting of a combination thereof, and a group consisting of at least one of an alkylene group, an arylene group and an alkylene group and —O— is preferable. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkylene group may have a substituent, but is preferably unsubstituted. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. Further, the cyclic alkylene group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. The number of carbon atoms of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 18, more preferably 6 to 14, and still more preferably 6 to 10.
 Pは、硬化性基を表す。硬化性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基、エポキシ基、メチロール基、アルコキシシリル基等が挙げられる。 P 1 represents a curable group. Examples of the curable group include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an epoxy group, a methylol group, and an alkoxysilyl group.
 硬化性基と酸基とを含有する樹脂(硬化性基を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂)としては、ダイヤナールNRシリーズ(三菱レイヨン株式会社製)、Photomer6173(COOH含有 polyurethane acrylic oligomer.Diamond Shamrock Co.,Ltd.製)、ビスコートR-264、KSレジスト106(いずれも大阪有機化学工業株式会社製)、サイクロマーPシリーズ(例えば、ACA230AA)、プラクセル CF200シリーズ(いずれも(株)ダイセル製)、Ebecryl3800(ダイセルユーシービー株式会社製)、アクリキュアRD-F8((株)日本触媒製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the resin containing a curable group and an acid group (an alkali-soluble resin having a curable group) include NR series (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Photomer 6173 (COOH-containing polyurethane acrylic oligomer. Diamond Shamrock Co., Ltd.). ), Biscote R-264, KS resist 106 (all manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Cyclomer P series (for example, ACA230AA), Plaxel CF200 series (all manufactured by Daicel Corporation), Ebecryl 3800 (Daicel) UC Bee Co., Ltd.), ACRYCURE RD-F8 (manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.), and the like.
 樹脂は、下記式(A3-1)~(A3-7)で表される繰り返し単位を有することも好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
 式中、Rは、水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、L~Lは、それぞれ独立に、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、R10~R13は、それぞれ独立に、炭化水素基を表す。R14およびR15は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または置換基を表す。
The resin preferably also has a repeating unit represented by the following formulas (A3-1) to (A3-7).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
In the formula, R 5 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, L 4 to L 7 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and R 10 to R 13 each independently represents a hydrocarbon. Represents a group. R 14 and R 15 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
 Rは、式(A2-1)~(A2-4)のRと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 L~Lは、式(A2-1)~(A2-4)のL51と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
R 5 has the same meaning as R 1 in formulas (A2-1) to (A2-4), and the preferred range is also the same.
L 4 to L 7 have the same meaning as L 51 in formulas (A2-1) to (A2-4), and the preferred ranges are also the same.
 R10~R13が表す炭化水素基としては、特に制限はないが、例えば、メチル、エチル、n-プロピル、イソプロピル、n-ブチル、イソブチル、tert-ブチル、tert-アミル、ステアリル、ラウリル、2-エチルヘキシル等の直鎖状または分岐状のアルキル基;フェニル等のアリール基;シクロヘキシル、tert-ブチルシクロヘキシル、ジシクロペンタジエニル、トリシクロデカニル、イソボルニル、アダマンチル、2-メチル-2-アダマンチル等の脂環式炭化水素基;1-メトキシエチル、1-エトキシエチル等のアルコキシで置換されたアルキル基;ベンジル等のアリール基で置換されたアルキル基(アラルキル基);等が挙げられる。
 R14およびR15が表す置換基は、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、ヘテロアリールオキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、アミノ基、アシルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、ヘテロアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルホニルアミノ基、スルファモイル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロアリールチオ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、ヘテロアリールスルホニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、ヘテロアリールスルフィニル基、ウレイド基、リン酸アミド基、メルカプト基、スルホ基、カルボキシル基、ニトロ基、ヒドロキサム酸基、スルフィノ基、ヒドラジノ基、イミノ基、シリル基、ヒドロキシル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基などが挙げられる。なかでも、R14およびR15の少なくとも一方は、シアノ基または、-COORaを表すことが好ましい。Raは、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基が好ましい。
The hydrocarbon group represented by R 10 to R 13 is not particularly limited. For example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, tert-amyl, stearyl, lauryl, 2 -Linear or branched alkyl groups such as ethylhexyl; aryl groups such as phenyl; cyclohexyl, tert-butylcyclohexyl, dicyclopentadienyl, tricyclodecanyl, isobornyl, adamantyl, 2-methyl-2-adamantyl, etc. And an alicyclic hydrocarbon group; an alkyl group substituted with alkoxy such as 1-methoxyethyl and 1-ethoxyethyl; an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group such as benzyl (aralkyl group); and the like.
The substituents represented by R 14 and R 15 are alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, heteroaryloxy groups, acyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, aryloxycarbonyl groups, heteroaryls. Oxycarbonyl group, acyloxy group, amino group, acylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, heteroaryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfonylamino group, sulfamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heteroarylthio Group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, heteroarylsulfonyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, heteroarylsulfinyl group, ureido group, phosphoric acid Bromide group, a mercapto group, a sulfo group, a carboxyl group, a nitro group, a hydroxamic acid group, sulfino group, a hydrazino group, an imino group, a silyl group, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, and a cyano group. Among these, at least one of R 14 and R 15 preferably represents a cyano group or —COORa. Ra is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
 本発明において、樹脂は、マープルーフG-0150M、G-0105SA、G-0130SP、G-0250SP、G-1005S、G-1005SA、G-1010S、G-2050M、G-01100、G-01758(日油(株)製、エポキシ基含有ポリマー)、ARTON F4520(JSR(株)製)、アクリベースFF-187(藤倉化成(株))などを使用することもできる。 In the present invention, the resin is a proof G-0150M, G-0105SA, G-0130SP, G-0250SP, G-1005S, G-1005SA, G-1010S, G-2050M, G-01100, G-01758 (day Oil Co., Ltd., epoxy group-containing polymer), ARTON F4520 (manufactured by JSR Co., Ltd.), Acrybase FF-187 (Fujikura Kasei Co., Ltd.) and the like can also be used.
 本発明の組成物において、樹脂の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対し、1~80質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、10質量%以上がより好ましく、20質量%以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、70質量%以下がより好ましく、60質量%以下がさらに好ましい。
 本発明において、樹脂の含有量は、上述した凝集抑制剤100質量部に対して、100~16000質量部が好ましい。上限は、10000質量部以下が好ましく、7000質量部以下がより好ましく、6000質量部以下がさらに好ましい。下限は、150質量部以上が好ましく、200質量部以上がより好ましく、300質量部以上がさらに好ましい。
In the composition of the present invention, the resin content is preferably 1 to 80% by mass relative to the total solid content of the composition. The lower limit is more preferably 10% by mass or more, and further preferably 20% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 70% by mass or less, and still more preferably 60% by mass or less.
In the present invention, the resin content is preferably 100 to 16000 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the aggregation inhibitor described above. The upper limit is preferably 10,000 parts by mass or less, more preferably 7000 parts by mass or less, and still more preferably 6000 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 150 parts by mass or more, more preferably 200 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 300 parts by mass or more.
<<重合性化合物>>
 本発明の組成物は、重合性化合物を含有することが好ましい。重合性化合物としては、ラジカルの作用により重合可能な化合物が好ましい。すなわち、重合性化合物は、ラジカル重合性化合物であることが好ましい。重合性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基を1個以上有する化合物が好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基を2個以上有する化合物がより好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基を3個以上有する化合物がさらに好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基の個数の上限は、たとえば、15個以下が好ましく、6個以下がより好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基としては、ビニル基、スチリル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基などが挙げられ、(メタ)アクリロイル基が好ましい。
<< polymerizable compound >>
The composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerizable compound. As the polymerizable compound, a compound that can be polymerized by the action of a radical is preferable. That is, the polymerizable compound is preferably a radical polymerizable compound. The polymerizable compound is preferably a compound having one or more groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, more preferably a compound having two or more groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, and 3 groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond. A compound having at least one is more preferable. The upper limit of the number of groups having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is, for example, preferably 15 or less, and more preferably 6 or less. Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a styryl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable.
 重合性化合物は、モノマー、ポリマーのいずれの形態であってもよいが、モノマーが好ましい。モノマータイプの重合性化合物は、分子量が200~3,000であることが好ましい。分子量の上限は、2、500以下がより好ましく、2,000以下がさらに好ましい。分子量の下限は、250以上がより好ましく、300以上がさらに好ましい。 The polymerizable compound may be in the form of either a monomer or a polymer, but is preferably a monomer. The monomer type polymerizable compound preferably has a molecular weight of 200 to 3,000. The upper limit of the molecular weight is more preferably 2,500 or less, and further preferably 2,000 or less. The lower limit of the molecular weight is more preferably 250 or more, and further preferably 300 or more.
 重合性化合物の例としては、特開2013-253224号公報の段落番号0033~0034の記載を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。上記化合物としては、エチレンオキシ変性ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としては、NKエステルATM-35E;新中村化学工業(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としては、KAYARAD D-330;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としては、KAYARAD D-320;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては、KAYARAD D-310;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては、KAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬(株)製、A-DPH-12E;新中村化学工業(株)製)、およびこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール残基を介して結合している構造が好ましい。またこれらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。また、特開2013-253224号公報の段落番号0034~0038の重合性化合物の記載を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、特開2012-208494号公報の段落番号0477(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/0235099号明細書の段落番号0585)に記載の重合性モノマー等が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 また、ジグリセリンEO(エチレンオキシド)変性(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては、M-460;東亞合成(株)製)が好ましい。ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製、A-TMMT)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(日本化薬(株)製、KAYARAD HDDA)も好ましい。これらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。例えば、RP-1040(日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。
As examples of the polymerizable compound, the description in paragraph numbers 0033 to 0034 of JP2013-253224A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. Examples of the compound include ethyleneoxy-modified pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available product is NK ester ATM-35E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD D-330; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available products are KAYARAD D-320; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available products are KAYARAD D -310; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available products are KAYARAD DPHA; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-DPH-12E; Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) ), And these (meth) acryloyl groups are ethylene A structure in which they are bonded via a glycol glycol or propylene glycol residue is preferred. These oligomer types can also be used. In addition, the description of polymerizable compounds in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0038 of JP2013-253224A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. In addition, polymerizable monomers described in paragraph No. 0477 of JP2012-208494A (paragraph No. 0585 of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099) and the like are described in the present specification. Incorporated into.
Diglycerin EO (ethylene oxide) modified (meth) acrylate (commercially available product is M-460; manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) is preferable. Pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., A-TMMT) and 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., KAYARAD HDDA) are also preferable. These oligomer types can also be used. Examples thereof include RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
 重合性化合物は、カルボキシル基、スルホ基、リン酸基等の酸基を有していてもよい。酸基を有する重合性化合物は、多官能アルコールの一部のヒドロキシル基を(メタ)アクリレート化し、残ったヒドロキシル基に酸無水物を付加反応させてカルボキシル基とするなどの方法で得られる。また、上述のヒドロキシル基に、非芳香族カルボン酸無水物などを反応させて酸基を導入しても良い。非芳香族カルボン酸無水物の具体例としては、無水テトラヒドロフタル酸、アルキル化無水テトラヒドロフタル酸、無水ヘキサヒドロフタル酸、アルキル化無水ヘキサヒドロフタル酸、無水コハク酸、無水マレイン酸が挙げられる。酸基を有する重合性化合物としては、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステルが好ましく、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物の未反応のヒドロキシル基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を付加した重合性化合物がより好ましく、上述のエステルにおいて、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物がペンタエリスリトールおよびジペンタエリスリトールのうちの少なくとも一方である化合物がさらに好ましい。市販品としては、アロニックスM-510、M-520(東亞合成(株)製)、CBX-0、CBX-1(新中村化学工業(株)製)などが挙げられる。酸基を有する重合性化合物の酸価は、0.1~40mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は5mgKOH/g以上がより好ましい。上限は、30mgKOH/g以下がより好ましい。 The polymerizable compound may have an acid group such as a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, or a phosphoric acid group. A polymerizable compound having an acid group can be obtained by a method in which a part of hydroxyl groups of a polyfunctional alcohol is (meth) acrylated, and an acid anhydride is added to the remaining hydroxyl groups to form carboxyl groups. Further, an acid group may be introduced by reacting the above hydroxyl group with a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride or the like. Specific examples of the non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride include tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, hexahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated hexahydrophthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, and maleic anhydride. As the polymerizable compound having an acid group, an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid is preferable, and a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride is reacted with an unreacted hydroxyl group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound. A polymerizable compound to which a group is added is more preferable, and in the above-described ester, a compound in which the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is at least one of pentaerythritol and dipentaerythritol is further preferable. Commercially available products include Aronix M-510, M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), CBX-0, CBX-1 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and the like. The acid value of the polymerizable compound having an acid group is preferably from 0.1 to 40 mgKOH / g. The lower limit is more preferably 5 mgKOH / g or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30 mgKOH / g or less.
 重合性化合物としては、カプロラクトン構造を有する重合性化合物も好ましい態様である。カプロラクトン構造を有する重合性化合物としては、分子内にカプロラクトン構造を有する限り特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、トリメチロールエタン、ジトリメチロールエタン、トリメチロールプロパン、ジトリメチロールプロパン、ペンタエリスリトール、ジペンタエリスリトール、トリペンタエリスリトール、グリセリン、ジグリセロール、トリメチロールメラミン等の多価アルコールと、(メタ)アクリル酸およびε-カプロラクトンをエステル化することにより得られる、ε-カプロラクトン変性多官能(メタ)アクリレートを挙げることができる。カプロラクトン構造を有する重合性化合物としては、下記式(Z-1)で表される化合物が好ましい。 As the polymerizable compound, a polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure is also a preferred embodiment. The polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure is not particularly limited as long as it has a caprolactone structure in the molecule. For example, trimethylolethane, ditrimethylolethane, trimethylolpropane, ditrimethylolpropane, pentaerythritol, dipenta Ε-caprolactone-modified polyfunctional (meth) acrylate obtained by esterifying polyhydric alcohol such as erythritol, tripentaerythritol, glycerin, diglycerol, trimethylolmelamine, (meth) acrylic acid and ε-caprolactone Can be mentioned. As the polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure, a compound represented by the following formula (Z-1) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
 式(Z-1)中、6個のRは、全てが式(Z-2)で表される基であるか、または6個のRのうち1~5個が式(Z-2)で表される基であり、残余が式(Z-3)で表される基である。 In formula (Z-1), all six Rs are groups represented by formula (Z-2), or 1 to 5 of the six Rs are represented by formula (Z-2). And the remainder is a group represented by the formula (Z-3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
 式(Z-2)中、Rは、水素原子またはメチル基を示し、mは1または2を示し、「*」は結合手であることを示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
In formula (Z-2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, m represents 1 or 2, and “*” represents a bond.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
 式(Z-3)中、Rは、水素原子またはメチル基を示し、「*」は結合手であることを示す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
In formula (Z-3), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and “*” represents a bond.
 カプロラクトン構造を有する重合性化合物は、例えば、日本化薬(株)からKAYARAD DPCAシリーズとして市販されており、DPCA-20(上記式(Z-1)~(Z-3)においてm=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=2、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-30(同式、m=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=3、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-60(同式、m=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=6、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-120(同式においてm=2、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=6、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)等が挙げられる。 Polymerizable compounds having a caprolactone structure are commercially available, for example, from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as the KAYARAD DPCA series, and DPCA-20 (m = 1 in the above formulas (Z-1) to (Z-3), Number of groups represented by (Z-2) = 2, a compound in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms), DPCA-30 (formula, m = 1, number of groups represented by formula (Z-2)) = 3, a compound in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms), DPCA-60 (same formula, m = 1, number of groups represented by formula (Z-2) = 6, a compound in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms ), DPCA-120 (a compound in which m = 2 in the formula, the number of groups represented by formula (Z-2) = 6, and all R 1 are hydrogen atoms).
 重合性化合物として、式(Z-4)または(Z-5)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。 As the polymerizable compound, a compound represented by the formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) can also be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
 式(Z-4)および(Z-5)中、Eは、それぞれ独立に、-((CHCHO)-、または-((CHCH(CH)O)-を表し、yは、それぞれ独立に0~10の整数を表し、Xは、それぞれ独立に、(メタ)アクリロイル基、水素原子、またはカルボキシル基を表す。
 式(Z-4)中、(メタ)アクリロイル基の合計は3個または4個であり、mはそれぞれ独立に0~10の整数を表し、各mの合計は0~40の整数である。
 式(Z-5)中、(メタ)アクリロイル基の合計は5個または6個であり、nはそれぞれ独立に0~10の整数を表し、各nの合計は0~60の整数である。
In formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5), each E independently represents — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O) —. And y independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and X independently represents a (meth) acryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxyl group.
In formula (Z-4), the total number of (meth) acryloyl groups is 3 or 4, each m independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each m is an integer of 0 to 40.
In formula (Z-5), the total number of (meth) acryloyl groups is 5 or 6, each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each n is an integer of 0 to 60.
 式(Z-4)中、mは、0~6の整数が好ましく、0~4の整数がより好ましい。
 また、各mの合計は、2~40の整数が好ましく、2~16の整数がより好ましく、4~8の整数が特に好ましい。
 式(Z-5)中、nは、0~6の整数が好ましく、0~4の整数がより好ましい。
 また、各nの合計は、3~60の整数が好ましく、3~24の整数がより好ましく、6~12の整数が特に好ましい。
 また、式(Z-4)または式(Z-5)中の-((CHCHO)-または-((CHCH(CH)O)-は、酸素原子側の末端がXに結合する形態が好ましい。
In the formula (Z-4), m is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
The total of each m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and particularly preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
In the formula (Z-5), n is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
The total of each n is preferably an integer of 3 to 60, more preferably an integer of 3 to 24, and particularly preferably an integer of 6 to 12.
In the formula (Z-4) or the formula (Z-5), — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O) — represents an oxygen atom side. A form in which the terminal of X is bonded to X is preferred.
 式(Z-4)または式(Z-5)で表される化合物は1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上併用してもよい。特に、式(Z-5)において、6個のX全てがアクリロイル基である形態が好ましい。 The compounds represented by formula (Z-4) or formula (Z-5) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In particular, in the formula (Z-5), a form in which all six Xs are acryloyl groups is preferable.
 式(Z-4)または式(Z-5)で表される化合物の中でも、ペンタエリスリトール誘導体および/またはジペンタエリスリトール誘導体がより好ましい。
 具体的には、下記式(a)~(f)で表される化合物(以下、「例示化合物(a)~(f)」とも称する。)が挙げられ、中でも、例示化合物(a)、(b)、(e)、(f)が好ましい。
Among the compounds represented by the formula (Z-4) or the formula (Z-5), a pentaerythritol derivative and / or a dipentaerythritol derivative are more preferable.
Specific examples include compounds represented by the following formulas (a) to (f) (hereinafter also referred to as “exemplary compounds (a) to (f)”). Among them, exemplary compounds (a), (f) b), (e) and (f) are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
 式(Z-4)、(Z-5)で表される重合性化合物の市販品としては、例えば、サートマー(株)製のエチレンオキシ鎖を4個有する4官能アクリレートであるSR-494、日本化薬(株)製のペンチレンオキシ鎖を6個有する6官能アクリレートであるDPCA-60、イソブチレンオキシ鎖を3個有する3官能アクリレートであるTPA-330などが挙げられる。 Examples of commercially available polymerizable compounds represented by the formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5) include SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains manufactured by Sartomer Co., Ltd., Japan Examples thereof include DPCA-60, which is a hexafunctional acrylate having six pentyleneoxy chains, and TPA-330, which is a trifunctional acrylate having three isobutyleneoxy chains, manufactured by Kayaku Co., Ltd.
 重合性化合物は、イソシアヌル酸エチレンオキシ変性(メタ)アクリレートも好ましい。市販品としては、アロニックスM-315、M-313(東亞合成(株)製)、NKエステルA-9300(新中村化学工業(株)製)、SR368(サートマー(株)製)などが挙げられる。また、下記化合物を用いることもできる。
The polymerizable compound is also preferably isocyanuric acid ethyleneoxy-modified (meth) acrylate. Examples of commercially available products include Aronix M-315, M-313 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), NK ester A-9300 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), SR368 (manufactured by Sartomer Co., Ltd.), and the like. . Also, the following compounds can be used.
 重合性化合物は、特公昭48-41708号公報、特開昭51-37193号公報、特公平2-32293号公報、特公平2-16765号公報に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類や、特公昭58-49860号公報、特公昭56-17654号公報、特公昭62-39417号公報、特公昭62-39418号公報に記載のエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物類も好適である。また、特開昭63-277653号公報、特開昭63-260909号公報、特開平1-105238号公報に記載される、分子内にアミノ構造やスルフィド構造を有する付加重合性化合物類を用いることができる。
 市販品としては、ウレタンオリゴマーUAS-10、UAB-140(山陽国策パルプ社製)、UA-7200(新中村化学社製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬社製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600、ライトアクリレートDCP―A(共栄社化学(株)製)などが挙げられる。
Polymerizable compounds include urethane acrylates such as those described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, and JP-B-2-16765. Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418 are also suitable. Further, addition polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are used. Can do.
Commercially available products include urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (manufactured by Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA- 306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600, and light acrylate DCP-A (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.).
 本発明の組成物において、重合性化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して0.01~50質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、0.1質量%以上がより好ましく、0.5質量%以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、30質量%以下がより好ましく、15質量%以下がさらに好ましい。本発明の組成物が重合性化合物を2種以上含む場合、それらの合計量は上記範囲内であることが好ましい。 In the composition of the present invention, the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 0.01 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. The lower limit is more preferably 0.1% by mass or more, and further preferably 0.5% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less, and further preferably 15% by mass or less. When the composition of this invention contains 2 or more types of polymeric compounds, it is preferable that those total amount exists in the said range.
<<光重合開始剤>>
 本発明の組成物は、光重合開始剤を含有することが好ましい。光重合開始剤としては、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外領域から可視領域の光線に対して感光性を有する化合物が好ましい。光重合開始剤は、光ラジカル重合開始剤が好ましい。また、光重合開始剤は、約300nm~800nm(330nm~500nmがより好ましい。)の範囲内に少なくとも約50のモル吸光係数を有する化合物を、少なくとも1種含有していることが好ましい。
<< photopolymerization initiator >>
The composition of the present invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator. There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a photoinitiator, It can select suitably from well-known photoinitiators. For example, a compound having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet region to the visible region is preferable. The photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molar extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 800 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 500 nm).
 光重合開始剤としては、例えば、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有するもの、オキサジアゾール骨格を有するものなど)、アシルホスフィンオキサイド等のアシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、ケトオキシムエーテル、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、ヒドロキシアセトフェノンなどが挙げられる。トリアジン骨格を有するハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体としては、例えば、若林ら著、Bull.Chem.Soc.Japan,42、2924(1969)に記載の化合物、英国特許1388492号明細書に記載の化合物、特開昭53-133428号公報に記載の化合物、独国特許3337024号明細書に記載の化合物、F.C.Schaefer著のJ.Org.Chem.;29、1527(1964)に記載の化合物、特開昭62-58241号公報に記載の化合物、特開平5-281728号公報に記載の化合物、特開平5-34920号公報に記載の化合物、米国特許第4212976号明細書に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。 Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazoles, oxime derivatives, etc. Oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, hydroxyacetophenones, and the like. Examples of the halogenated hydrocarbon derivative having a triazine skeleton include those described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan, 42, 2924 (1969), a compound described in GB 1388492, a compound described in JP-A-53-133428, a compound described in DE 3337024, F . C. J. Schaefer Org. Chem. 29, 1527 (1964), compounds described in JP-A-62-258241, compounds described in JP-A-5-281728, compounds described in JP-A-5-34920, Examples include the compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 4221976.
 光重合開始剤としては、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリールイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物および3-アリール置換クマリン化合物からなる群より選択される化合物が好ましい。α-アミノケトン化合物の例としては、2-メチル-1-フェニル-2-モルフォリノプロパン-1-オン、2-メチル-1-[4-(ヘキシル)フェニル]-2-モルフォリノプロパン-1-オン、2-エチル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルフォリノフェニル)-ブタノン-1、2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルフォリノフェニル)-ブタノン-1、2-(ジメチルアミノ)-2-[(4-メチルフェニル)メチル]-1-[4-(4-モルホリニル)フェニル]-1-ブタノン等が挙げられる。α-アミノケトン化合物の市販品としては、IRGACURE907、IRGACURE369、および、IRGACURE379(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)などが挙げられる。α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物の市販品としては、IRGACURE184、DAROCUR1173、IRGACURE500、IRGACURE2959、IRGACURE127(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)などが挙げられる。アシルホスフィン化合物の市販品としては、IRGACURE819やIRGACURE TPO(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)が挙げられる。 As photopolymerization initiators, from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, tria. A compound selected from the group consisting of a reel imidazole dimer, an onium compound, a benzothiazole compound, a benzophenone compound, an acetophenone compound, a cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complex, a halomethyloxadiazole compound and a 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compound is preferred. Examples of α-aminoketone compounds include 2-methyl-1-phenyl-2-morpholinopropan-1-one, 2-methyl-1- [4- (hexyl) phenyl] -2-morpholinopropane-1- ON, 2-ethyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -butanone-1,2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -butanone-1,2- And (dimethylamino) -2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1- [4- (4-morpholinyl) phenyl] -1-butanone. Examples of commercially available products of α-aminoketone compounds include IRGACURE907, IRGACURE369, and IRGACURE379 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF). Examples of commercially available α-hydroxyketone compounds include IRGACURE184, DAROCUR1173, IRGACURE500, IRGACURE2959, IRGACURE127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF). Examples of commercially available acylphosphine compounds include IRGACURE 819 and IRGACURE TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF).
 光重合開始剤は、オキシム化合物を用いることも好ましい。オキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2001-233842号公報に記載の化合物、特開2000-80068号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物、特開2016-21012号公報に記載の化合物を用いることができる。 It is also preferable to use an oxime compound as the photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples of the oxime compound include compounds described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, compounds described in JP-A No. 2006-342166, and JP-A No. 2016-21012. The compounds described in the publication can be used.
 本発明において、好適に用いることのできるオキシム化合物としては、例えば、3-ベンゾイルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、および2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オンなどが挙げられる。また、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.1653~1660、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.156~162、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年)pp.202~232、特開2000-66385号公報、特開2000-80068号公報、特表2004-534797号公報、特開2006-342166号公報の各公報に記載の化合物等も挙げられる。市販品ではIRGACURE OXE01、IRGACURE OXE02、IRGACURE OXE03、IRGACURE OXE04(以上、BASF社製)も好適に用いられる。また、TR-PBG-304(常州強力電子新材料有限公司製)、アデカアークルズNCI-930((株)ADEKA製)、アデカオプトマーN-1919((株)ADEKA製、特開2012-14052号公報に記載の光重合開始剤2)を用いることができる。 Examples of oxime compounds that can be preferably used in the present invention include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, -Acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3- (4-toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutane-2 -One, and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one. In addition, J.H. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 1653-1660, J.A. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995) pp. Examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A Nos. 202 to 232, JP-A 2000-66385, JP-A 2000-80068, JP-T 2004-534797, and JP-A 2006-342166. As commercially available products, IRGACURE OXE01, IRGACURE OXE02, IRGACURE OXE03, IRGACURE OXE04 (manufactured by BASF) are also preferably used. Also, TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Powerful Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.), Adeka Arkles NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), Adeka Optomer N-1919 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), JP 2012-14052 A Can be used.
 また上記記載以外のオキシム化合物として、カルバゾール環のN位にオキシムが連結した特表2009-519904号公報に記載の化合物、ベンゾフェノン部位にヘテロ置換基が導入された米国特許第7626957号公報に記載の化合物、色素部位にニトロ基が導入された特開2010-15025号公報および米国特許公開2009-292039号明細書に記載の化合物、国際公開WO2009/131189号公報に記載のケトオキシム化合物、トリアジン骨格とオキシム骨格を同一分子内に含有する米国特許7556910号明細書に記載の化合物、405nmに吸収極大波長を有し、g線光源に対して良好な感度を有する特開2009-221114号公報に記載の化合物、特開2014-137466号公報の段落番号0076~0079に記載の化合物などを用いてもよい。
 好ましくは、例えば、特開2013-29760号公報の段落番号0274~0275を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 具体的には、オキシム化合物としては、下記式(OX-1)で表される化合物が好ましい。オキシム化合物は、オキシムのN-O結合が(E)体のオキシム化合物であってもよく、オキシムのN-O結合が(Z)体のオキシム化合物であってもよく、(E)体と(Z)体との混合物であってもよい。
Further, as oxime compounds other than those described above, compounds described in JP-T 2009-519904, in which an oxime is linked to the N-position of the carbazole ring, and those described in US Pat. Compounds, compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-15025 and US Patent Publication No. 2009-292039 in which a nitro group is introduced at the dye site, ketoxime compounds described in International Publication WO2009 / 131189, triazine skeleton and oxime A compound described in US Pat. No. 7,556,910 containing a skeleton in the same molecule, a compound described in JP2009-221114A having an absorption maximum wavelength at 405 nm and good sensitivity to a g-ray light source Paragraph No. 00 of JP 2014-137466 A The like may be used compounds described in 6-0079.
Preferably, for example, paragraph numbers 0274 to 0275 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
Specifically, the oxime compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (OX-1). The oxime compound may be an oxime compound in which the oxime N—O bond is an (E) isomer, or the oxime N—O bond may be a (Z) oxime compound. Z) It may be a mixture with the body.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
 式(OX-1)中、RおよびBは各々独立に一価の置換基を表し、Aは二価の有機基を表し、Arはアリール基を表す。
 式(OX-1)中、Rで表される一価の置換基としては、一価の非金属原子団であることが好ましい。
 一価の非金属原子団としては、アルキル基、アリール基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、複素環基、アルキルチオカルボニル基、アリールチオカルボニル基等が挙げられる。また、これらの基は、1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。また、前述した置換基は、さらに他の置換基で置換されていてもよい。
 置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、アシル基、アルキル基、アリール基等が挙げられる。
 式(OX-1)中、Bで表される一価の置換基としては、アリール基、複素環基、アリールカルボニル基、または、複素環カルボニル基が好ましい。これらの基は1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、前述した置換基が例示できる。
 式(OX-1)中、Aで表される二価の有機基としては、炭素数1~12のアルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルキニレン基が好ましい。これらの基は1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、前述した置換基が例示できる。
In formula (OX-1), R and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent, A represents a divalent organic group, and Ar represents an aryl group.
In the formula (OX-1), the monovalent substituent represented by R is preferably a monovalent nonmetallic atomic group.
Examples of the monovalent nonmetallic atomic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, and an arylthiocarbonyl group. Moreover, these groups may have one or more substituents. Moreover, the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkyl group, and an aryl group.
In the formula (OX-1), the monovalent substituent represented by B is preferably an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an arylcarbonyl group, or a heterocyclic carbonyl group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
In the formula (OX-1), the divalent organic group represented by A is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkylene group, or an alkynylene group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
 本発明は、光重合開始剤として、フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2014-137466号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 In the present invention, an oxime compound having a fluorene ring can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorene ring include compounds described in JP-A-2014-137466. This content is incorporated herein.
 本発明は、光重合開始剤として、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2010-262028号公報に記載の化合物、特表2014-500852号公報に記載の化合物24、36~40、特開2013-164471号公報に記載の化合物(C-3)などが挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 In the present invention, an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP 2010-262028 A, compounds 24 and 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP-A 2013-164471. Compound (C-3). This content is incorporated herein.
 本発明は、光重合開始剤として、ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物を用いることができる。ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物は、二量体とすることも好ましい。ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2013-114249号公報の段落番号0031~0047、特開2014-137466号公報の段落番号0008~0012および0070~0079、特許4223071号公報の段落番号0007~0025に記載されている化合物、アデカアークルズNCI-831((株)ADEKA製)が挙げられる。 In the present invention, an oxime compound having a nitro group can be used as a photopolymerization initiator. The oxime compound having a nitro group is also preferably a dimer. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a nitro group include paragraph numbers 0031 to 0047 of JP2013-114249A, paragraph numbers 0008 to 0012 and 0070 to 0079 of JP2014-137466A, paragraph of JP4223071. No. 0007 to 0025, Adeka Arcles NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) can be mentioned.
 本発明は、光重合開始剤として、ベンゾフラン骨格を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。具体例としては、国際公開WO2015/036910号公報に記載されるOE-01~OE-75が挙げられる。 In the present invention, an oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples include OE-01 to OE-75 described in International Publication No. WO2015 / 036910.
 本発明において好ましく使用されるオキシム化合物の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of oxime compounds that are preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
 オキシム化合物は、350~500nmの波長領域に極大吸収波長を有する化合物が好ましく、360~480nmの波長領域に極大吸収波長を有する化合物がより好ましく、365nmおよび405nmの吸光度が高い化合物が特に好ましい。 The oxime compound is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 350 to 500 nm, more preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 360 to 480 nm, and particularly preferably a compound having high absorbance at 365 nm and 405 nm.
 オキシム化合物の365nmまたは405nmにおけるモル吸光係数は、感度の観点から、1,000~300,000であることが好ましく、2,000~300,000であることがより好ましく、5,000~200,000であることが特に好ましい。化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法を用いて測定することができるが、具体的には、例えば、紫外可視分光光度計(Varian社製Cary-5 spectrophotometer)にて、酢酸エチル溶媒を用い、0.01g/Lの濃度で測定することが好ましい。 The molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably 2,000 to 300,000, and more preferably 5,000 to 200,000 from the viewpoint of sensitivity. 000 is particularly preferred. The molar extinction coefficient of the compound can be measured using a known method. Specifically, for example, using an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian) using an ethyl acetate solvent, It is preferable to measure at a concentration of 0.01 g / L.
 光重合開始剤は、オキシム化合物とα-アミノケトン化合物とを含むことも好ましい。両者を併用することで、現像性が向上し、矩形性に優れたパターンを形成しやすい。オキシム化合物とα-アミノケトン化合物とを併用する場合、オキシム化合物100質量部に対して、α-アミノケトン化合物が50~600質量部であることが好ましく、150~400質量部がより好ましい。 The photopolymerization initiator preferably contains an oxime compound and an α-aminoketone compound. By using both in combination, the developability is improved and a pattern having excellent rectangularity can be easily formed. When the oxime compound and the α-aminoketone compound are used in combination, the α-aminoketone compound is preferably 50 to 600 parts by mass, more preferably 150 to 400 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the oxime compound.
 光重合開始剤の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対し、0.1~50質量%であることが好ましく、より好ましくは0.5~30質量%であり、さらに好ましくは1~20質量%である。この範囲で、より良好な感度とパターン形成性が得られる。本発明の組成物は、光重合開始剤を、1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 30% by mass, and still more preferably based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. 1 to 20% by mass. Within this range, better sensitivity and pattern formability can be obtained. The composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more kinds. When 2 or more types are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<連鎖移動剤>>
 本発明の組成物は、連鎖移動剤を含有することが好ましい。この態様によれば、パターン形成時の露光において、露光による膜表面(パターン表面)の硬化を促進できる。このため、露光時に膜の厚さが減少することなどを抑制でき、矩形性に優れたパターンを形成しやすい。
<< Chain transfer agent >>
The composition of the present invention preferably contains a chain transfer agent. According to this aspect, in exposure at the time of pattern formation, hardening of the film surface (pattern surface) by exposure can be promoted. For this reason, it can suppress that the thickness of a film | membrane reduces at the time of exposure, and it is easy to form the pattern excellent in the rectangularity.
 連鎖移動剤としては、N,N-ジアルキルアミノ安息香酸アルキルエステルや、チオール化合物などが挙げられ、チオール化合物が好ましい。チオール化合物としては、分子内に2個以上(好ましくは2~8個、より好ましくは3~6個)のチオール基を有する化合物が好ましい。チオール化合物の具体例としては、2-メルカプトベンゾチアゾール、2-メルカプトベンゾオキサゾール、2-メルカプトベンゾイミダゾール、N-フェニルメルカプトベンゾイミダゾール、1,3,5-トリス(3-メルカプトブチルオキシエチル)-1,3,5-トリアジン-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-トリオンなどの複素環を有するチオール化合物、ペンタエリスリトールテトラキス(3-メルカプトブチレート)、1,4-ビス(3-メルカプトブチリルオキシ)ブタンなどの脂肪族系のチオール化合物などが挙げられる。また、下記化合物を用いることも好ましい。また、連鎖移動剤の市販品としては、PEMP(長瀬産業(株)製、チオール化合物)、サンセラーM(三新化学工業(株)製、チオール化合物)、カレンズMT BD1(昭和電工社(株)製、チオール化合物)などが挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Examples of chain transfer agents include N, N-dialkylaminobenzoic acid alkyl esters and thiol compounds, with thiol compounds being preferred. The thiol compound is preferably a compound having 2 or more (preferably 2 to 8, more preferably 3 to 6) thiol groups in the molecule. Specific examples of the thiol compound include 2-mercaptobenzothiazole, 2-mercaptobenzoxazole, 2-mercaptobenzimidazole, N-phenylmercaptobenzimidazole, 1,3,5-tris (3-mercaptobutyloxyethyl) -1 , 3,5-triazine-2,4,6 (1H, 3H, 5H) -trione and other thiol compounds having a heterocyclic ring, pentaerythritol tetrakis (3-mercaptobutyrate), 1,4-bis (3-mercapto) And aliphatic thiol compounds such as butyryloxy) butane. Moreover, it is also preferable to use the following compound. Commercially available chain transfer agents include PEMP (manufactured by Nagase Sangyo Co., Ltd., thiol compound), Sunseller M (manufactured by Sanshin Chemical Co., Ltd., thiol compound), Karenz MT BD1 (Showa Denko Co., Ltd.) And thiol compounds).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
 連鎖移動剤の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、0.2~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.4~3.0質量%がより好ましい。
 また、連鎖移動剤の含有量は、重合性化合物の100質量部に対し、1~40質量部が好ましく、2~20質量部がより好ましい。
The content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.2 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.4 to 3.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
In addition, the content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 1 to 40 parts by mass, and more preferably 2 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound.
<<エポキシ基を有する化合物>>
 本発明の組成物は、エポキシ基を有する化合物を含有することもできる。エポキシ基を有する化合物は、1分子内にエポキシ基を1つ以上有する化合物が挙げられ、2つ以上有する化合物が好ましい。エポキシ基は、1分子内に2~100個有することが好ましい。エポキシ基の上限は、例えば、10個以下とすることもでき、5個以下とすることもできる。
<< Compound having epoxy group >>
The composition of this invention can also contain the compound which has an epoxy group. As for the compound which has an epoxy group, the compound which has 1 or more of epoxy groups in 1 molecule is mentioned, The compound which has 2 or more is preferable. It is preferable to have 2 to 100 epoxy groups in one molecule. The upper limit of the epoxy group can be, for example, 10 or less, or 5 or less.
 エポキシ基を有する化合物は、エポキシ当量(=エポキシ基を有する化合物の分子量/エポキシ基の数)が500g/当量以下であることが好ましく、100~400g/当量であることがより好ましく、100~300g/当量であることがさらに好ましい。 The compound having an epoxy group preferably has an epoxy equivalent (= molecular weight of the compound having an epoxy group / number of epoxy groups) of 500 g / equivalent or less, more preferably 100 to 400 g / equivalent, and 100 to 300 g. / Equivalent is more preferable.
 エポキシ基を有する化合物は、低分子化合物(例えば、分子量1,000未満)でもよいし、高分子化合物(macromolecule)(例えば、分子量1,000以上、ポリマーの場合は、重量平均分子量が1,000以上)のいずれでもよい。エポキシ基を有する化合物の分子量(ポリマーの場合は重量平均分子量)は、200~100,000が好ましく、500~50,000がより好ましい。 The compound having an epoxy group may be a low molecular weight compound (for example, a molecular weight of less than 1,000) or a high molecular weight compound (for example, a molecular weight of 1,000 or more, and in the case of a polymer, the weight average molecular weight is 1,000). Any of the above). The molecular weight of the compound having an epoxy group (weight average molecular weight in the case of a polymer) is preferably 200 to 100,000, and more preferably 500 to 50,000.
 エポキシ基を有する化合物は、特開2013-011869号公報の段落番号0034~0036、特開2014-043556号公報の段落番号0147~0156、特開2014-089408号公報の段落番号0085~0092に記載された化合物を用いることもできる。これらの内容は、本明細書に組み込まれる。市販品としては、例えば、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂としては、jER825、jER827、jER828、jER834、jER1001、jER1002、jER1003、jER1055、jER1007、jER1009、jER1010(以上、三菱化学(株)製)、EPICLON860、EPICLON1050、EPICLON1051、EPICLON1055(以上、DIC(株)製)等が挙げられる。ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂としては、jER806、jER807、jER4004、jER4005、jER4007、jER4010(以上、三菱化学(株)製)、EPICLON830、EPICLON835(以上、DIC(株)製)、LCE-21、RE-602S(以上、日本化薬(株)製)等が挙げられる。フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂としては、jER152、jER154、jER157S70、jER157S65(以上、三菱化学(株)製)、EPICLON N-740、EPICLON N-770、EPICLON N-775(以上、DIC(株)製)等が挙げられる。クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂としては、EPICLON N-660、EPICLON N-665、EPICLON N-670、EPICLON N-673、EPICLON N-680、EPICLON N-690、EPICLON N-695(以上、DIC(株)製)、EOCN-1020(日本化薬(株)製)等が挙げられる。脂肪族エポキシ樹脂としては、ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S、同EP-4085S、同EP-4088S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、セロキサイド2021P、セロキサイド2081、セロキサイド2083、セロキサイド2085、EHPE3150、EPOLEAD PB 3600、同PB 4700(以上、(株)ダイセル製)、デナコール EX-212L、EX-214L、EX-216L、EX-321L、EX-850L(以上、ナガセケムテックス(株)製)等が挙げられる。その他にも、ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S、同EP-4003S、同EP-4010S、同EP-4011S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、NC-2000、NC-3000、NC-7300、XD-1000、EPPN-501、EPPN-502(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、jER1031S(三菱化学(株)製)、OXT-221(東亞合成(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Compounds having an epoxy group are described in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0036 of JP2013-011869A, paragraph numbers 0147 to 0156 of JP2014043556A, and paragraphs 0085 to 0092 of JP2014089408A. The prepared compounds can also be used. These contents are incorporated herein. As commercial products, for example, as bisphenol A type epoxy resin, jER825, jER827, jER828, jER834, jER1001, jER1002, jER1003, jER1055, jER1007, jER1009, jER1010 (above, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON860, EPICLON1050 , EPICLON 1051, EPICLON 1055 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation) and the like. Examples of the bisphenol F type epoxy resin include jER806, jER807, jER4004, jER4005, jER4007, jER4010 (above, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON830, EPICLON835 (above, made by DIC Corporation), LCE-21, RE-602S. (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and the like. As phenol novolac type epoxy resins, jER152, jER154, jER157S70, jER157S65 (Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.), EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-770, EPICLON N-775 (above, DIC Corporation), etc. Is mentioned. Cresol novolac type epoxy resins include EPICLON N-660, EPICLON N-665, EPICLON N-670, EPICLON N-673, EPICLON N-680, EPICLON N-690, EPICLON N-695 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation) ), EOCN-1020 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), and the like. Aliphatic epoxy resins include ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S, EP-4085S, EP-4088S (manufactured by ADEKA), Celoxide 2021P, Celoxide 2081, Celoxide 2083, Celoxide 2085, EHPE3150, EPOLEAD PB 3600, PB 4700 (above, manufactured by Daicel Corporation), Denacol EX-212L, EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L (above, manufactured by Nagase ChemteX Corporation), and the like. In addition, ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S, EP-4003S, EP-4010S, EP-4010S, EP-4011S (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), NC-2000, NC-3000, NC-7300, XD-1000, EPPN-501, EPPN-502 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), jER1031S (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), OXT-221 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 エポキシ基を有する化合物は、特開2009-265518号公報の段落番号0045等に記載された化合物を用いることもできる。 As the compound having an epoxy group, a compound described in paragraph No. 0045 of JP-A-2009-265518 can also be used.
 エポキシ基を有する化合物の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して0.5~20質量%が好ましい。下限は1質量%以上がより好ましく、2質量%以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、15質量%以下がより好ましく、10質量%以下がさらに好ましい。 The content of the compound having an epoxy group is preferably 0.5 to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. The lower limit is more preferably 1% by mass or more, and further preferably 2% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 15% by mass or less, and further preferably 10% by mass or less.
<<溶剤>>
 本発明の組成物は、溶剤を含有することができる。溶剤としては、有機溶剤が挙げられる。溶剤は、各成分の溶解性や組成物の塗布性を満足すれば基本的には特に制限はないが、組成物の塗布性、安全性を考慮して選ばれることが好ましい。
<< Solvent >>
The composition of the present invention can contain a solvent. Examples of the solvent include organic solvents. The solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the applicability of the composition, but is preferably selected in consideration of the applicability and safety of the composition.
 有機溶剤の例としては、例えば、以下のものが挙げられる。エステル類として、例えば、酢酸エチル、酢酸-n-ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、酢酸シクロヘキシル、ギ酸アミル、酢酸イソアミル、プロピオン酸ブチル、酪酸イソプロピル、酪酸エチル、酪酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、アルコキシ酢酸アルキル(例えば、アルコキシ酢酸メチル、アルコキシ酢酸エチル、アルコキシ酢酸ブチル(例えば、メトキシ酢酸メチル、メトキシ酢酸エチル、メトキシ酢酸ブチル、エトキシ酢酸メチル、エトキシ酢酸エチル等))、3-アルコキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例えば、3-アルコキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-アルコキシプロピオン酸エチル等(例えば、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル等))、2-アルコキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例えば、2-アルコキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-アルコキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-アルコキシプロピオン酸プロピル等(例えば、2-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル))、2-アルコキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチルおよび2-アルコキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル(例えば、2-メトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル等)、ピルビン酸メチル、ピルビン酸エチル、ピルビン酸プロピル、アセト酢酸メチル、アセト酢酸エチル、2-オキソブタン酸メチル、2-オキソブタン酸エチル等が挙げられる。エーテル類として、例えば、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノプロピルエーテルアセテート等が挙げられる。ケトン類として、例えば、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、2-ヘプタノン、3-ヘプタノン等が挙げられる。芳香族炭化水素類として、例えば、トルエン、キシレン等が挙げられる。ただし溶剤としての芳香族炭化水素類(ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン、エチルベンゼン等)は、環境面等の理由により低減したほうがよい場合がある(例えば、有機溶剤全量に対して、50質量ppm(parts per million)以下とすることもでき、10質量ppm以下とすることもでき、1質量ppm以下とすることもできる)。 Examples of organic solvents include the following. Examples of esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, cyclohexyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, alkyl alkoxyacetate ( For example, methyl alkoxyacetate, ethyl alkoxyacetate, butyl alkoxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate, etc.), alkyl esters of 3-alkoxypropionic acid (eg, Methyl 3-alkoxypropionate, ethyl 3-alkoxypropionate, etc. (for example, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, 3-ethoxypropio) 2-alkoxypropionic acid alkyl esters (for example, methyl 2-alkoxypropionate, ethyl 2-alkoxypropionate, propyl 2-alkoxypropionate, etc. (for example, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, 2- Ethyl methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)), methyl 2-alkoxy-2-methylpropionate and ethyl 2-alkoxy-2-methylpropionate ( For example, methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.), methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoacetate, 2-oxobutanoic acid Methyl, - ethyl oxobutanoate, and the like. Examples of ethers include diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, propylene glycol Examples thereof include monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, and propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate. Examples of ketones include methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, and 3-heptanone. Examples of aromatic hydrocarbons include toluene and xylene. However, aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) as a solvent may be better reduced for environmental reasons (for example, 50 ppm by weight per part of organic solvent). (million) or less, or 10 mass ppm or less, or 1 mass ppm or less).
 有機溶剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。有機溶剤を2種以上組み合わせて用いる場合、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテル、およびプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテートから選択される2種以上で構成される混合溶液が好ましい。 Organic solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more organic solvents are used in combination, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone A mixed solution composed of two or more selected from ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate is preferable.
 本発明において、金属含有量の少ない溶剤を用いることが好ましく、溶剤の金属含有量は、例えば10質量ppb(parts per billion)以下であることが好ましい。必要に応じて質量ppt(parts per trillion)レベルの溶剤を用いてもよく、そのような高純度溶剤は、例えば、東洋合成社が提供している(化学工業日報、2015年11月13日)。 In the present invention, it is preferable to use a solvent having a low metal content, and the metal content of the solvent is preferably 10 mass ppb (parts per billion) or less, for example. If necessary, a solvent having a mass ppt (parts per trillation) level may be used, and such a high-purity solvent is provided, for example, by Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (Chemical Industry Daily, November 13, 2015). .
 溶剤から金属等の不純物を除去する方法としては、例えば、蒸留(分子蒸留や薄膜蒸留等)やフィルタを用いたろ過を挙げることができる。ろ過に用いるフィルタのフィルタ孔径としては、10nm以下が好ましく、5nm以下がより好ましく、3nm以下がさらに好ましい。フィルタの材質は、ポリテトラフロロエチレン、ポリエチレンまたはナイロンが好ましい。 Examples of the method for removing impurities such as metals from the solvent include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter. The filter pore size of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 nm or less, more preferably 5 nm or less, and even more preferably 3 nm or less. The filter material is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon.
 溶剤は、異性体(同じ原子数で異なる構造の化合物)が含まれていてもよい。また、異性体は、1種のみが含まれていてもよいし、複数種含まれていてもよい。 The solvent may contain isomers (compounds having the same number of atoms and different structures). Moreover, only 1 type may be included and the isomer may be included multiple types.
 本発明において、有機溶剤は、過酸化物の含有率が0.8mmol/L以下であることが好ましく、過酸化物を実質的に含まないことがより好ましい。 In the present invention, the organic solvent preferably has a peroxide content of 0.8 mmol / L or less, and more preferably contains substantially no peroxide.
 溶剤の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全量に対し、10~90質量%であることが好ましく、20~80質量%であることがより好ましく、25~75質量%であることがさらに好ましい。 The content of the solvent is preferably 10 to 90% by mass, more preferably 20 to 80% by mass, and further preferably 25 to 75% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present invention. .
<<シランカップリング剤>>
 本発明の組成物は、さらに、シランカップリング剤を含有することができる。なお、本発明において、シランカップリング剤は、上述した重合性化合物とは異なる成分である。本発明において、シランカップリング剤とは、加水分解性基とそれ以外の官能基とを有するシラン化合物を意味する。また、加水分解性基とは、ケイ素原子に直結し、加水分解反応および縮合反応の少なくともいずれかによってシロキサン結合を生じ得る置換基をいう。加水分解性基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基などが挙げられ、アルコキシ基が好ましい。すなわち、シランカップリング剤は、アルコキシシリル基を有する化合物が好ましい。また、加水分解性基以外の官能基としては、樹脂との間で相互作用もしくは結合を形成して親和性を示す基が好ましい。例えば、ビニル基、スチリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、メルカプト基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、アミノ基、ウレイド基、スルフィド基、イソシアネート基などが挙げられ、(メタ)アクリロイル基およびエポキシ基が好ましい。即ち、シランカップリング剤は、アルコキシシリル基と、(メタ)アクリロイル基およびエポキシ基のうちの少なくとも一方とを有する化合物が好ましい。
<< Silane coupling agent >>
The composition of the present invention can further contain a silane coupling agent. In the present invention, the silane coupling agent is a component different from the polymerizable compound described above. In the present invention, the silane coupling agent means a silane compound having a hydrolyzable group and other functional groups. The hydrolyzable group refers to a substituent that is directly bonded to a silicon atom and can generate a siloxane bond by at least one of a hydrolysis reaction and a condensation reaction. As a hydrolysable group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group etc. are mentioned, for example, An alkoxy group is preferable. That is, the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group. Further, as the functional group other than the hydrolyzable group, a group that exhibits an affinity by forming an interaction or bond with the resin is preferable. Examples thereof include a vinyl group, a styryl group, a (meth) acryloyl group, a mercapto group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, an amino group, a ureido group, a sulfide group, and an isocyanate group, and a (meth) acryloyl group and an epoxy group are preferable. That is, the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group and at least one of a (meth) acryloyl group and an epoxy group.
 シランカップリング剤の具体例としては、例えば、ビニルトリメトキシシラン、ビニルトリエトキシシラン、2-(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシル)エチルトリメトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルメチルジエトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、パラスチリルトリメトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルメチルジエトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-アクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-トリエトキシシリル-N-(1,3-ジメチル-ブチリデン)プロピルアミン、N-フェニル-3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、N-(ビニルベンジル)-2-アミノエチル-3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシランの塩酸塩、トリス-(トリメトキシシリルプロピル)イソシアヌレート、3-ウレイドプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-メルカプトプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-メルカプトプロピルトリメトキシシラン、ビス(トリエトキシシリルプロピル)テトラスルフィド、3-イソシアネートプロピルトリエトキシシランなどが挙げられる。また、上記以外にアルコキシオリゴマーを用いることができる。また、下記化合物を用いることもできる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Specific examples of the silane coupling agent include, for example, vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane, 2- (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-glycol. Sidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, parastyryltrimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxy Silane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, N-2- (aminoethyl) -3-aminopropylmethyldi Toxisilane, N-2- (aminoethyl) -3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, 3-triethoxysilyl-N- (1,3-dimethyl- Butylidene) propylamine, N-phenyl-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, N- (vinylbenzyl) -2-aminoethyl-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane hydrochloride, tris- (trimethoxysilylpropyl) isocyanurate , 3-ureidopropyltriethoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane, bis (triethoxysilylpropyl) tetrasulfide, 3-isocyanatopropyltriethoxysilane, etc. . In addition to the above, alkoxy oligomers can be used. Also, the following compounds can be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
 市販品としては、信越シリコーン社製のKBM-13、KBM-22、KBM-103、KBE-13、KBE-22、KBE-103、KBM-3033、KBE-3033、KBM-3063、KBM-3066、KBM-3086、KBE-3063、KBE-3083、KBM-3103、KBM-7103、SZ-31、KPN-3504、KBM-1003、KBE-1003、KBM-303、KBM-402、KBM-403、KBE-402、KBE-403、KBM-1403、KBM-502、KBM-503、KBE-502、KBE-503、KBM-5103、KBM-602、KBM-603、KBM-903、KBE-903、KBE-9103、KBM-573、KBM-575、KBM-9659、KBE-585、KBM-802、KBM-803、KBE-846、KBE-9007、X-40-1053、X-41-1059A、X-41-1056、X-41-1805、X-41-1818、X-41-1810、X-40-2651、X-40-2655A、KR-513、KC-89S、KR-500、X-40-9225、X-40-9246、X-40-9250、KR-401N、X-40-9227、X-40-9247、KR-510、KR-9218、KR-213、X-40-2308、X-40-9238などが挙げられる。また、シランカップリング剤として、特開2009-288703号公報の段落番号0018~0036に記載の化合物、特開2009-242604号公報の段落番号0056~0066に記載の化合物が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Commercially available products include Shin-Etsu Silicone's KBM-13, KBM-22, KBM-103, KBE-13, KBE-22, KBE-103, KBM-3033, KBE-3033, KBM-3063, KBM-3066, KBM-3086, KBE-3063, KBE-3083, KBM-3103, KBM-7103, SZ-31, KPN-3504, KBM-1003, KBE-1003, KBM-303, KBM-402, KBM-403, KBE- 402, KBE-403, KBM-1403, KBM-502, KBM-503, KBE-502, KBE-503, KBM-5103, KBM-602, KBM-603, KBM-903, KBE-903, KBE-9103, KBM-573, KBM-575, KBM-9659, BE-585, KBM-802, KBM-803, KBE-846, KBE-9007, X-40-1053, X-41-1059A, X-41-1056, X-41-1805, X-41-1818, X-41-1810, X-40-2651, X-40-2655A, KR-513, KC-89S, KR-500, X-40-9225, X-40-9246, X-40-9250, KR- 401N, X-40-9227, X-40-9247, KR-510, KR-9218, KR-213, X-40-2308, X-40-9238, and the like. Examples of the silane coupling agent include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0018 to 0036 of JP-A-2009-288703, and compounds described in paragraph numbers 0056 to 0066 of JP-A-2009-242604. Incorporated herein.
 シランカップリング剤の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~15.0質量%が好ましく、0.05~10.0質量%がより好ましい。シランカップリング剤は、1種のみでもよく、2種以上でもよい。2種以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the silane coupling agent is preferably 0.01 to 15.0 mass%, more preferably 0.05 to 10.0 mass%, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. The silane coupling agent may be only one type or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<界面活性剤>>
 本発明の組成物は、塗布性をより向上させる観点から、各種の界面活性剤を含有させてもよい。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用できる。
<< Surfactant >>
The composition of the present invention may contain various surfactants from the viewpoint of further improving applicability. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
 上記組成物にフッ素系界面活性剤を含有させることで、塗布液として調製したときの液特性(特に、流動性)がより向上し、塗布厚の均一性や省液性をより改善することができる。即ち、フッ素系界面活性剤を含有する組成物を適用した塗布液を用いて膜を形成する場合においては、被塗布面と塗布液との界面張力が低下して、被塗布面への濡れ性が改善され、被塗布面への塗布性が向上する。このため、厚さのムラが小さい均一な厚さの膜をより好適に形成することができる。 By including a fluorosurfactant in the above composition, the liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid can be further improved, and the uniformity of coating thickness and liquid saving can be further improved. it can. That is, when a film is formed using a coating liquid to which a composition containing a fluorosurfactant is applied, the interfacial tension between the surface to be coated and the coating liquid is reduced, and the wettability to the surface to be coated is reduced. Is improved, and the coating property to the coated surface is improved. For this reason, it is possible to more suitably form a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness.
 フッ素系界面活性剤中のフッ素含有率は、3~40質量%であることが好適であり、より好ましくは5~30質量%であり、特に好ましくは7~25質量%である。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、組成物中における溶解性も良好である。 The fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass. A fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in the composition.
 フッ素系界面活性剤として具体的には、特開2014-41318号公報の段落番号0060~0064(対応する国際公開WO2014/17669号公報の段落番号0060~0064)等に記載の界面活性剤、特開2011-132503号公報の段落番号0117~0132に記載の界面活性剤が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。フッ素系界面活性剤の市販品としては、例えば、メガファックF171、同F172、同F173、同F176、同F177、同F141、同F142、同F143、同F144、同R30、同F437、同F475、同F479、同F482、同F554、同F780(以上、DIC(株)製)、フロラードFC430、同FC431、同FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-382、同SC-101、同SC-103、同SC-104、同SC-105、同SC1068、同SC-381、同SC-383、同S393、同KH-40(以上、旭硝子(株)製)、PolyFox PF636、PF656、PF6320、PF6520、PF7002(以上、OMNOVA社製)等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the fluorosurfactant include surfactants described in JP 2014-41318 A, paragraphs 0060 to 0064 (paragraph numbers 0060 to 0064 of the corresponding international publication WO 2014/17669), and the like. Examples include surfactants described in paragraphs 0117 to 0132 of JP2011-132503A, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Commercially available fluorosurfactants include, for example, Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, F780 (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, Same SC-103, Same SC-104, Same SC-105, Same SC1068, Same SC-381, Same SC-383, Same S393, Same KH-40 (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PolyFox PF636, PF656, PF6320, PF6520, PF7002 (above, the product made by OMNOVA) etc. are mentioned.
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を含有する官能基を持つ分子構造で、熱を加えるとフッ素原子を含有する官能基の部分が切断されてフッ素原子が揮発するアクリル系化合物も好適に使用できる。このようなフッ素系界面活性剤としては、DIC(株)製のメガファックDSシリーズ(化学工業日報、2016年2月22日)(日経産業新聞、2016年2月23日)、例えばメガファックDS-21が挙げられ、これらを用いることができる。 In addition, the fluorine-based surfactant has a molecular structure having a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and an acrylic compound in which the fluorine atom is volatilized by cleavage of the functional group containing the fluorine atom when heated is suitably used. Can be used. Examples of such a fluorosurfactant include Megafac DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (Chemical Industry Daily, February 22, 2016) (Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun, February 23, 2016). -21, which can be used.
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、ブロックポリマーを用いることもできる。例えば特開2011-89090号公報に記載された化合物が挙げられる。フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、を含む含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましく用いることができる。下記化合物も本発明で用いられるフッ素系界面活性剤として例示される。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
 上記の化合物の重量平均分子量は、好ましくは3,000~50,000であり、例えば、14,000である。上記の化合物中、繰り返し単位の割合を示す%は質量%である。
As the fluorosurfactant, a block polymer can be used. Examples thereof include compounds described in JP2011-89090A. The fluorine-based surfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy group or propyleneoxy group) (meth). A fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used. The following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorosurfactant used in the present invention.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
The weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3,000 to 50,000, for example, 14,000. % Which shows the ratio of a repeating unit in said compound is the mass%.
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤、エチレン性不飽和基を側鎖に有する含フッ素重合体を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2010-164965号公報の段落番号0050~0090および0289~0295に記載された化合物、例えばDIC(株)製のメガファックRS-101、RS-102、RS-718K、RS-72-K等が挙げられる。フッ素系界面活性剤は、特開2015-117327号公報の段落番号0015~0158に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。 Further, a fluorosurfactant and a fluoropolymer having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain can also be used. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A 2010-164965, paragraph numbers 0050 to 0090 and 0289 to 0295, for example, Megafac RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, RS manufactured by DIC Corporation. -72-K and the like. As the fluorine-based surfactant, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0015 to 0158 of JP-A No. 2015-117327 can also be used.
 ノニオン系界面活性剤としては、グリセロール、トリメチロールプロパン、トリメチロールエタンならびにそれらのエトキシレートおよびプロポキシレート(例えば、グリセロールプロポキシレート、グリセロールエトキシレート等)、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル、プルロニックL10、L31、L61、L62、10R5、17R2、25R2(BASF社製)、テトロニック304、701、704、901、904、150R1(BASF社製)、ソルスパース20000(日本ルーブリゾール(株)製)、NCW-101、NCW-1001、NCW-1002(和光純薬工業(株)製)、パイオニンD-6112、D-6112-W、D-6315(竹本油脂(株)製)、オルフィンE1010、サーフィノール104、400、440(日信化学工業(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane and their ethoxylates and propoxylates (eg, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, Polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octyl phenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonyl phenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester, Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2 (BASF ), Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1 (B SF), Solsperse 20000 (Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.), NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002 (Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Pionein D-6112, D-6112-W, D-6315 (manufactured by Takemoto Yushi Co., Ltd.), Olphine E1010, Surfynol 104, 400, 440 (manufactured by Nissin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 カチオン系界面活性剤としては、オルガノシロキサンポリマーKP341(信越化学工業(株)製)、(メタ)アクリル酸系(共)重合体ポリフローNo.75、No.90、No.95(共栄社化学(株)製)、W001(裕商(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Examples of cationic surfactants include organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid (co) polymer polyflow No. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 アニオン系界面活性剤としては、W004、W005、W017(裕商(株)製)、サンデットBL(三洋化成(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Examples of the anionic surfactant include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.), Sandet BL (manufactured by Sanyo Chemical Co., Ltd.), and the like.
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、トーレシリコーンDC3PA、トーレシリコーンSH7PA、トーレシリコーンDC11PA、トーレシリコーンSH21PA、トーレシリコーンSH28PA、トーレシリコーンSH29PA、トーレシリコーンSH30PA、トーレシリコーンSH8400(以上、東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)、TSF-4440、TSF-4300、TSF-4445、TSF-4460、TSF-4452(以上、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製)、KP341、KF6001、KF6002(以上、信越シリコーン株式会社製)、BYK307、BYK323、BYK330(以上、ビックケミー社製)等が挙げられる。 Examples of silicone-based surfactants include Torre Silicone DC3PA, Torre Silicone SH7PA, Torre Silicone DC11PA, Torresilicone SH21PA, Torree Silicone SH28PA, Torree Silicone SH29PA, Torree Silicone SH30PA, Torree Silicone SH8400 (above, Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.) )), TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4442 (above, manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP341, KF6001, KF6002 (above, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) , BYK307, BYK323, BYK330 (above, manufactured by BYK Chemie) and the like.
 界面活性剤は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種以上を組み合わせてもよい。
 界面活性剤の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、0.001~2.0質量%が好ましく、0.005~1.0質量%がより好ましい。
Only one surfactant may be used, or two or more surfactants may be combined.
The content of the surfactant is preferably from 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably from 0.005 to 1.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
<<紫外線吸収剤>>
 本発明の組成物は、紫外線吸収剤を含有することが好ましい。
 紫外線吸収剤は、共役ジエン系化合物およびジケトン化合物が挙げられ、共役ジエン系化合物が好ましい。共役ジエン系化合物は、下記式(UV-1)で表される化合物がより好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
<< UV absorber >>
It is preferable that the composition of this invention contains a ultraviolet absorber.
Examples of the ultraviolet absorber include conjugated diene compounds and diketone compounds, and conjugated diene compounds are preferable. The conjugated diene compound is more preferably a compound represented by the following formula (UV-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
 式(UV-1)において、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基、または炭素原子数6~20のアリール基を表し、RとRとは互いに同一でも異なっていてもよいが、同時に水素原子を表すことはない。
 RおよびRは、RおよびRが結合する窒素原子とともに、環状アミノ基を形成してもよい。環状アミノ基としては、例えば、ピペリジノ基、モルホリノ基、ピロリジノ基、ヘキサヒドロアゼピノ基、ピペラジノ基等が挙げられる。
 RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基がより好ましく、炭素原子数1~5のアルキル基がさらに好ましい。
 RおよびRは、電子求引性基を表す。RおよびRは、アシル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、スルホニルオキシ基、スルファモイル基が好ましく、アシル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、シアノ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、スルホニルオキシ基、スルファモイル基が好ましい。また、RおよびRは、互いに結合して環状の電子求引性基を形成してもよい。RおよびRが互いに結合して形成する環状の電子求引性基としては、例えば、2個のカルボニル基を含む6員環を挙げることができる。
 上記のR、R、R、およびRの少なくとも1つは、連結基を介して、ビニル基と結合したモノマーより導かれるポリマーの形になっていてもよい。他のモノマーとの共重合体であっても良い。
In the formula (UV-1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 1 and R 2 May be the same as or different from each other, but do not represent a hydrogen atom at the same time.
R 1 and R 2 may form a cyclic amino group together with the nitrogen atom to which R 1 and R 2 are bonded. Examples of the cyclic amino group include piperidino group, morpholino group, pyrrolidino group, hexahydroazepino group, piperazino group and the like.
R 1 and R 2 are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and still more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
R 3 and R 4 represent an electron withdrawing group. R 3 and R 4 are preferably acyl, carbamoyl, alkyloxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, cyano, nitro, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonyloxy, sulfamoyl, acyl, carbamoyl Group, alkyloxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, cyano group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, sulfonyloxy group, sulfamoyl group are preferred. R 3 and R 4 may be bonded to each other to form a cyclic electron withdrawing group. Examples of the cyclic electron withdrawing group formed by combining R 3 and R 4 with each other include a 6-membered ring containing two carbonyl groups.
At least one of the above R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 may be in the form of a polymer derived from a monomer bonded to a vinyl group via a linking group. It may be a copolymer with another monomer.
 式(UV-1)で示される紫外線吸収剤の具体例としては、下記化合物が挙げられる。式(UV-1)で示される紫外線吸収剤の置換基の説明は、国際公開WO2009/123109号公報の段落番号0024~0033(対応する米国特許出願公開第2011/0039195号明細書の段落番号0040~0059)の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。式(UV-1)で表される化合物の好ましい具体例は、国際公開WO2009/123109号公報の段落番号0034~0037(対応する米国特許出願公開第2011/0039195号明細書の段落番号0060)の例示化合物(1)~(14)の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。式(UV-1)で示される紫外線吸収剤の市販品としては、例えば、UV503(大東化学(株)製)などが挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
Specific examples of the ultraviolet absorber represented by the formula (UV-1) include the following compounds. The description of the substituent of the ultraviolet absorber represented by the formula (UV-1) is given in paragraph numbers 0024 to 0033 of the international publication WO2009 / 123109 (paragraph number 0040 of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2011/0039195). To 0059), the contents of which are incorporated herein. Preferable specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (UV-1) include those described in paragraph Nos. 0034 to 0037 (paragraph number 0060 of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2011/0039195) of International Publication No. WO2009 / 123109. Descriptions of exemplary compounds (1) to (14) can be taken into account, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein. Examples of commercially available ultraviolet absorbers represented by the formula (UV-1) include UV503 (manufactured by Daito Chemical Co., Ltd.).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
 紫外線吸収剤として用いるジケトン化合物は、下記式(UV-2)で表される化合物が好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
 式(UV-2)において、R101およびR102は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を表し、m1およびm2は、それぞれ独立に0~4を表す。置換基は、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、ヘテロアリールオキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、アミノ基、アシルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、ヘテロアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルホニルアミノ基、スルファモイル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロアリールチオ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、ヘテロアリールスルホニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、ヘテロアリールスルフィニル基、ウレイド基、リン酸アミド基、メルカプト基、スルホ基、カルボキシル基、ニトロ基、ヒドロキサム酸基、スルフィノ基、ヒドラジノ基、イミノ基、シリル基、ヒドロキシル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基などが挙げられ、アルキル基およびアルコキシ基が好ましい。
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状が挙げられ、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、分岐がより好ましい。
 アルコキシ基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましい。アルコキシ基は、直鎖、分岐、環状が挙げられ、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、分岐がより好ましい。
 R101およびR102の一方がアルキル基で、他方がアルコキシ基である組み合わせが好ましい。
 m1およびm2は、それぞれ独立に0~4を表す。m1およびm2は、それぞれ独立に0~2が好ましく、0~1がより好ましく、1が特に好ましい。
The diketone compound used as the ultraviolet absorber is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (UV-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
In the formula (UV-2), R 101 and R 102 each independently represent a substituent, and m1 and m2 each independently represent 0 to 4. Substituents are alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, heteroaryloxy groups, acyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, aryloxycarbonyl groups, heteroaryloxycarbonyl groups, acyloxy groups, Amino group, acylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, heteroaryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfonylamino group, sulfamoyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heteroarylthio group, alkylsulfonyl group, aryl Sulfonyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, arylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfinyl, ureido, phosphate amide, mercapto, E group, a carboxyl group, a nitro group, a hydroxamic acid group, sulfino group, a hydrazino group, an imino group, a silyl group, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, or a cyano group, an alkyl group and alkoxy group are preferred.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group include linear, branched, and cyclic, and linear or branched is preferable, and branched is more preferable.
The number of carbon atoms of the alkoxy group is preferably 1-20. Examples of the alkoxy group include straight chain, branched, and cyclic, and straight chain or branched is preferable, and branched is more preferable.
A combination in which one of R 101 and R 102 is an alkyl group and the other is an alkoxy group is preferable.
m1 and m2 each independently represents 0-4. m1 and m2 are each independently preferably 0 to 2, more preferably 0 to 1, and particularly preferably 1.
 式(UV-2)で表される化合物としては、下記化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
Examples of the compound represented by the formula (UV-2) include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
 紫外線吸収剤は、ユビナールA(BASF社製)を用いることもできる。また、紫外線吸収剤は、アミノジエン化合物、サリシレート化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、アクリロニトリル化合物、トリアジン化合物等の紫外線吸収剤を用いることができ、具体例としては特開2013-68814号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としてはミヨシ油脂(株)製のMYUAシリーズ(化学工業日報、2016年2月1日)を用いてもよい。 As the UV absorber, Yubinal A (manufactured by BASF) can be used. As the ultraviolet absorber, an ultraviolet absorber such as an aminodiene compound, a salicylate compound, a benzophenone compound, a benzotriazole compound, an acrylonitrile compound, a triazine compound, or the like can be used. Specific examples include the compounds described in JP2013-68814A. Is mentioned. As the benzotriazole compound, MYUA series (Chemical Industry Daily, February 1, 2016) manufactured by Miyoshi Oil & Fats Co., Ltd. may be used.
 紫外線吸収剤の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.01~5質量%がより好ましい。
 紫外線吸収剤は、重合性化合物の100質量部に対し、5~100質量部含有することが好ましい。上限は、80質量部以下が好ましく、60質量部以下がより好ましい。下限は、10質量部以上が好ましく、20質量部以上がより好ましい。
The content of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably from 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably from 0.01 to 5% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
The ultraviolet absorber is preferably contained in an amount of 5 to 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound. The upper limit is preferably 80 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 60 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 20 parts by mass or more.
<<重合禁止剤>>
 本発明の組成物は、組成物の製造中または保存中において、重合性化合物の不要な熱重合を阻止するために、重合禁止剤を含有させてもよい。重合禁止剤としては、例えば、フェノール系ヒドロキシル基含有化合物類、N-オキシド化合物類、ピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル化合物類、ピロリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル化合物類、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミン類、ジアゾニウム化合物類、カチオン染料類、スルフィド基含有化合物類、ニトロ基含有化合物類、リン系化合物類、ラクトン系化合物類、遷移金属化合物類(FeCl、CuCl等)が挙げられる。また、これらの化合物類においては、フェノール骨格やリン含有骨格などの重合禁止機能を発現する構造が同一分子内に複数存在する複合系化合物であってもよい。例えば特開平10-46035号公報に記載の化合物なども好適に用いられる。重合禁止剤の具体例は、ハイドロキノン、パラメトキシフェノール、ジ-tert-ブチル-パラクレゾール、ピロガロール、tert-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4’-チオビス(3-メチル-6-tert-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-tert-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミン塩(アンモニウム塩、第一セリウム塩等)が挙げられる。中でも、パラメトキシフェノールが好ましい。
 重合禁止剤の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~5質量%が好ましい。
 重合禁止剤は、重合性化合物の100質量部に対し、0.001~1質量部含有することが好ましい。上限は、0.5質量部以下が好ましく、0.2質量部以下がより好ましい。下限は、0.01質量部以上が好ましく、0.03質量部以上がより好ましい。
<< Polymerization inhibitor >>
The composition of the present invention may contain a polymerization inhibitor in order to prevent unnecessary thermal polymerization of the polymerizable compound during the production or storage of the composition. Examples of polymerization inhibitors include phenolic hydroxyl group-containing compounds, N-oxide compounds, piperidine 1-oxyl free radical compounds, pyrrolidine 1-oxyl free radical compounds, N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamines, diazonium compounds , Cationic dyes, sulfide group-containing compounds, nitro group-containing compounds, phosphorus compounds, lactone compounds, transition metal compounds (FeCl 3 , CuCl 2 etc.). In addition, these compounds may be composite compounds in which a plurality of structures that exhibit a polymerization inhibiting function such as a phenol skeleton and a phosphorus-containing skeleton are present in the same molecule. For example, the compounds described in JP-A-10-46035 are also preferably used. Specific examples of the polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone, paramethoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-paracresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine salts (ammonium salt, primary cerium salt, etc.) can be mentioned. Of these, paramethoxyphenol is preferred.
The content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
The polymerization inhibitor is preferably contained in an amount of 0.001 to 1 part by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound. The upper limit is preferably 0.5 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 0.2 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 0.01 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 0.03 parts by mass or more.
<<酸化防止剤>>
 本発明の組成物は、酸化防止剤を含有することが好ましい。酸化防止剤としては、フェノール化合物、亜リン酸エステル化合物、チオエーテル化合物、ヒンダードアミン化合物などが挙げられ、フェノール化合物、ヒンダードアミン化合物が好ましい。酸化防止剤の分子量は500以上が好ましい。
<< Antioxidant >>
The composition of the present invention preferably contains an antioxidant. Examples of the antioxidant include a phenol compound, a phosphite compound, a thioether compound, a hindered amine compound, and the like, and a phenol compound and a hindered amine compound are preferable. The molecular weight of the antioxidant is preferably 500 or more.
 フェノール化合物としては、フェノール系酸化防止剤として知られる任意のフェノール化合物を使用することができる。好ましいフェノール化合物としては、ヒンダードフェノール化合物が挙げられる。特に、フェノール性ヒドロキシル基に隣接する部位(オルト位)に置換基を有する化合物が好ましい。前述の置換基としては炭素数1~22の置換または無置換のアルキル基が好ましく、メチル基、エチル基、プロピオニル基、イソプロピオニル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、イソペンチル基、t-ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、イソオクチル基、2-エチルへキシル基がより好ましい。また、同一分子内にフェノール基と亜リン酸エステル基を有する化合物も好ましい。 As the phenol compound, any phenol compound known as a phenol-based antioxidant can be used. Preferable phenolic compounds include hindered phenolic compounds. In particular, a compound having a substituent at a site (ortho position) adjacent to the phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable. As the above-mentioned substituent, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon atoms is preferable, and a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propionyl group, an isopropionyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a t-butyl group, a pentyl group, an isopentyl group. Group, t-pentyl group, hexyl group, octyl group, isooctyl group and 2-ethylhexyl group are more preferable. A compound having a phenol group and a phosphite group in the same molecule is also preferred.
 フェノール化合物は、多置換フェノール系化合物が好ましい。多置換フェノール系化合物は、大きく分けてその置換位置および構造の違う3種類(下記式(A)ヒンダードタイプ、下記式(B)セミヒンダードタイプ、下記式(C)レスヒンダードタイプ)がある。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
 式(A)~(C)において、Rは、水素原子または置換基を表す。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アミノ基、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、アリールアミノ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基などが挙げられる。アミノ基、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、アリールアミノ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基は、さらに置換基を有していてもよい。
The phenol compound is preferably a polysubstituted phenol compound. Multi-substituted phenolic compounds are roughly classified into three types (substitution position and structure below) (following formula (A) hindered type, following formula (B) semi-hindered type, and following formula (C) less hindered type). is there.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
In the formulas (A) to (C), R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, amino group, alkyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, alkylamino group, arylamino group, alkylsulfonyl group, and arylsulfonyl group. The amino group, alkyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, alkylamino group, arylamino group, alkylsulfonyl group, and arylsulfonyl group may further have a substituent.
 フェノール化合物は、上記式(A)~(C)で表される構造が同一分子内に複数存在する化合物が好ましく、上記式(A)~(C)で表される構造が同一分子内に2~4個存在する化合物がより好ましい。 The phenol compound is preferably a compound in which a plurality of structures represented by the formulas (A) to (C) are present in the same molecule, and the structure represented by the formulas (A) to (C) is 2 in the same molecule. More preferred are compounds having ˜4.
 フェノール化合物としては、例えばp-メトキシフェノール、ジ-tert-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、tert-ブチルカテコール、4,4-チオビス(3-メチル-6-tert-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、フェノール樹脂類、およびクレゾール樹脂類からなる群より選択される化合物などが挙げられる。
 市販品として入手できる代表例には、上記式(A)の化合物としては、Sumilizer BHT(住友化学(株)製)、Irganox 1010、1222(BASF社製)、アデカスタブAO-20、AO-50、AO-50F、AO-60、AO-60G、AO-330((株)ADEKA製)などがあり、上記式(B)の化合物としては、Sumilizer BBM-S(住友化学(株)製)、Irganox 245(BASF社製)、アデカスタブAO-80((株)ADEKA製)などがあり、上記式(C)の化合物としてはアデカスタブAO-30、AO-40((株)ADEKA製)などがある。
Examples of the phenol compound include p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, 4,4-thiobis (3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2′- Examples thereof include compounds selected from the group consisting of methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), phenol resins, and cresol resins.
Representative examples that can be obtained as a commercially available product include Sumitizer BHT (manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.), Irganox 1010, 1222 (manufactured by BASF), Adekastab AO-20, AO-50, AO-50F, AO-60, AO-60G, AO-330 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.) and the like. As the compound of the above formula (B), Sumilizer BBM-S (manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.), Irganox H.245 (manufactured by BASF), Adeka Stub AO-80 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.) and the like, and examples of the compound of the above formula (C) include Adeka Stub AO-30 and AO-40 (manufactured by ADEKA).
 ヒンダードアミン化合物は、下記式(HA)で表される部分構造を一分子中に1個以上有する化合物が挙げられる。
式(HA)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
 式(HA)において、波線は、ヒンダードアミン化合物を構成する他の原子または原子団との連結手を表す。R~Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、Rは、水素原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基を表す。
 ヒンダードアミン化合物は、上記式(HA)で表される部分構造を一分子中に2個以上有する化合物が好ましい。上限は、100個以下が好ましく、50個以下がより好ましく、20個以下がさらに好ましく、10個以下が特に好ましい。
 ヒンダードアミン化合物としては、アデカスタブLA-52、LA-57、LA-63P、LA-68、LA-72、LA-77Y、LA-77G、LA-81、LA-82、LA-87((株)ADEKA製)などが挙げられる。
Examples of the hindered amine compound include compounds having one or more partial structures represented by the following formula (HA) in one molecule.
Formula (HA)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
In the formula (HA), a wavy line represents a bond with another atom or atomic group constituting the hindered amine compound. R 1 to R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and R 5 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or an aryloxycarbonyl group.
The hindered amine compound is preferably a compound having two or more partial structures represented by the above formula (HA) in one molecule. The upper limit is preferably 100 or less, more preferably 50 or less, further preferably 20 or less, and particularly preferably 10 or less.
Examples of hindered amine compounds include ADK STAB LA-52, LA-57, LA-63P, LA-68, LA-72, LA-77Y, LA-77G, LA-81, LA-82, and LA-87 (ADEKA CORPORATION). Manufactured).
 亜リン酸エステル化合物としては、トリス[2-[[2,4,8,10-テトラキス(1,1-ジメチルエチル)ジベンゾ[d,f][1,3,2]ジオキサホスフェピン-6-イル]オキシ]エチル]アミン、トリス[2-[(4,6,9,11-テトラ-tert-ブチルジベンゾ[d,f][1,3,2]ジオキサホスフェピン-2-イル)オキシ]エチル]アミン、および亜リン酸エチルビス(2,4-ジ-tert-ブチル-6-メチルフェニル)からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の化合物が挙げられる。 As the phosphite compound, tris [2-[[2,4,8,10-tetrakis (1,1-dimethylethyl) dibenzo [d, f] [1,3,2] dioxaphosphine- 6-yl] oxy] ethyl] amine, tris [2-[(4,6,9,11-tetra-tert-butyldibenzo [d, f] [1,3,2] dioxaphosphin-2- Yl) oxy] ethyl] amine and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of ethyl bis (2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl) phosphite.
 酸化防止剤は、上述したもののほか、アデカスタブPEP-36A、アデカスタブAO-412S((株)ADEKA製)などを用いることもできる。 As the antioxidant, in addition to those described above, ADK STAB PEP-36A, ADK STAB AO-412S (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), and the like can also be used.
 酸化防止剤の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~20質量%が好ましく、0.3~15質量%がより好ましい。酸化防止剤は、1種のみでもよく、2種以上でもよい。2種以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the antioxidant is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.3 to 15% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. Only one type of antioxidant may be used, or two or more types may be used. In the case of two or more types, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<その他成分>>
 本発明の組成物は、必要に応じて、増感剤、硬化促進剤、フィラー、熱硬化促進剤、熱重合禁止剤、可塑剤およびその他の助剤類(例えば、導電性粒子、充填剤、消泡剤、難燃剤、レベリング剤、剥離促進剤、香料、表面張力調整剤など)を含有してもよい。これらの成分を適宜含有させることにより、目的とする近赤外線カットフィルタなどの光学フィルタの安定性、膜物性などの性質を調整することができる。これらの成分は、例えば、特開2012-003225号公報の段落番号0183(対応する米国特許出願公開第2013/0034812号明細書の段落番号0237)の記載、特開2008-250074号公報の段落番号0101~0104、0107~0109等の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<< Other ingredients >>
The composition of the present invention may contain a sensitizer, a curing accelerator, a filler, a thermal curing accelerator, a thermal polymerization inhibitor, a plasticizer, and other auxiliary agents (for example, conductive particles, fillers, An antifoaming agent, a flame retardant, a leveling agent, a peeling accelerator, a fragrance, a surface tension adjusting agent, etc.). By appropriately containing these components, it is possible to adjust the properties such as the stability and film properties of the target optical filter such as a near-infrared cut filter. These components are described in, for example, paragraph No. 0183 of JP2012-003225A (corresponding to paragraph No. 0237 of US Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0034812), paragraph No. of JP2008-250074A Descriptions such as 0101-0104, 0107-0109, and the like can be taken into consideration, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
<組成物の調製方法>
 本発明の組成物は、前述の成分を混合して調製できる。
 組成物の調製に際しては、各成分を一括混合してもよいし、各成分を溶剤に溶解または分散した後に逐次混合してもよい。また、混合する際の投入順序や作業条件は特に制約を受けない。例えば、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解または分散して組成物を調製してもよいし、必要に応じては、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液または分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して組成物として調製してもよい。
 また、本発明の組成物が顔料などの粒子を含む場合は、粒子を分散させるプロセスを含むことが好ましい。粒子を分散させるプロセスにおいて、粒子の分散に用いる機械力としては、圧縮、圧搾、衝撃、剪断、キャビテーションなどが挙げられる。これらプロセスの分散機の具体例としては、ビーズミル、サンドミル、ロールミル、ボールミル、ペイントシェーカー、マイクロフルイダイザー、高速インペラー、サンドグラインダー、フロージェットミキサー、高圧湿式微粒化、超音波分散などが挙げられる。またサンドミル(ビーズミル)における粒子の粉砕においては、径の小さいビーズを使用する、ビーズの充填率を大きくする事等により、粉砕効率を高めた条件で処理することが好ましい。また、粉砕処理後にろ過、遠心分離などで粗粒子を除去することが好ましい。また、粒子を分散させるプロセスおよび分散機は、「分散技術大全、株式会社情報機構発行、2005年7月15日」や「サスペンション(固/液分散系)を中心とした分散技術と工業的応用の実際 総合資料集、経営開発センター出版部発行、1978年10月10日」、特開2015-157893号公報の段落番号0022に記載のプロセスおよび分散機を好適に使用出来る。また粒子を分散させるプロセスにおいては、ソルトミリング工程にて粒子の微細化処理を行ってもよい。ソルトミリング工程に用いられる素材、機器、処理条件等は、例えば、特開2015-194521号公報、特開2012-046629号公報に記載のものを使用することができる。
<Method for preparing composition>
The composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the aforementioned components.
In preparing the composition, the components may be mixed together, or may be sequentially mixed after each component is dissolved or dispersed in a solvent. In addition, there are no particular restrictions on the input order and work conditions when mixing. For example, the composition may be prepared by dissolving or dispersing all the components in a solvent at the same time, and if necessary, each component is suitably used as two or more solutions or dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be mixed to prepare a composition.
Moreover, when the composition of this invention contains particles, such as a pigment, it is preferable to include the process of disperse | distributing particles. In the process of dispersing the particles, the mechanical force used for dispersing the particles includes compression, squeezing, impact, shearing, cavitation and the like. Specific examples of the disperser of these processes include a bead mill, a sand mill, a roll mill, a ball mill, a paint shaker, a microfluidizer, a high-speed impeller, a sand grinder, a flow jet mixer, a high-pressure wet atomization, and an ultrasonic dispersion. In the pulverization of particles in a sand mill (bead mill), it is preferable to use a bead having a small diameter, or to increase the pulverization efficiency by increasing the filling rate of beads. Further, it is preferable to remove coarse particles by filtration, centrifugation, or the like after the pulverization treatment. Also, the process and disperser for dispersing particles are described in “Dispersion Technology Taizen, Issued by Information Technology Corporation, July 15, 2005” and “Dispersion technology and industrial application centering on suspension (solid / liquid dispersion system)”. The process and disperser described in Paragraph No. 0022 of Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-157893 can be suitably used. In the process of dispersing the particles, the particles may be refined in the salt milling process. As materials, equipment, processing conditions and the like used in the salt milling process, for example, those described in JP-A-2015-194521 and JP-A-2012-046629 can be used.
 組成物の調製にあたり、異物の除去や欠陥の低減などの目的で、組成物をフィルタでろ過することが好ましい。フィルタの材質としては、従来からろ過用途等に用いられているものであれば特に限定されることなく用いることができる。例えば、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン(PTFE)等のフッ素樹脂、ナイロン(例えば、ナイロン-6、ナイロン-6,6)等のポリアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン(PP)等のポリオレフィン樹脂(高密度、超高分子量のポリオレフィン樹脂を含む)等を用いたフィルタが挙げられる。これら材質の中でもポリプロピレン(高密度、超高分子量のポリプロピレンを含む)およびナイロンが好ましい。
 フィルタの孔径は、0.01~7.0μm程度が適しており、好ましくは0.01~3.0μm程度、より好ましくは0.05~0.5μm程度である。この範囲とすることにより、微細な異物を確実に除去することが可能となる。また、ファイバ状のろ材を用いることも好ましい。ファイバ状のろ材としては、例えば、ポリプロピレンファイバ、ナイロンファイバ、グラスファイバ等が挙げられ、具体的にはロキテクノ社製のSBPタイプシリーズ(SBP008など)、TPRタイプシリーズ(TPR002、TPR005など)、SHPXタイプシリーズ(SHPX003など)のフィルタカートリッジを用いることができる。
In preparing the composition, it is preferable to filter the composition with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances or reducing defects. The material of the filter can be used without particular limitation as long as it has been conventionally used for filtration. For example, fluorine resin such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyamide resin such as nylon (for example, nylon-6, nylon-6,6), polyolefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (high density, super high And a filter using a molecular weight polyolefin resin). Among these materials, polypropylene (including high density and ultra high molecular weight polypropylene) and nylon are preferable.
The filter has a pore size of about 0.01 to 7.0 μm, preferably about 0.01 to 3.0 μm, more preferably about 0.05 to 0.5 μm. By setting it as this range, it becomes possible to remove a fine foreign material reliably. It is also preferable to use a fiber-shaped filter medium. Examples of the fiber-shaped filter medium include polypropylene fiber, nylon fiber, glass fiber, and the like, specifically, SBP type series (SBP008 etc.), TPR type series (TPR002, TPR005 etc.), SHPX type manufactured by Loki Techno Co., Ltd. Series (such as SHPX003) filter cartridges can be used.
 フィルタを使用する際、異なるフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。その際、第1のフィルタでのろ過は、1回のみでもよいし、2回以上行ってもよい。
 また、上述した範囲内で異なる孔径の第1のフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。ここでの孔径は、フィルタメーカーの公称値を参照することができる。市販のフィルタとしては、例えば、日本ポール株式会社(DFA4201NXEYなど)、アドバンテック東洋株式会社、日本インテグリス株式会社(旧日本マイクロリス株式会社)または株式会社キッツマイクロフィルター等が提供する各種フィルタの中から選択することができる。
 第2のフィルタは、上述した第1のフィルタと同様の材料等で形成されたものを使用することができる。
 例えば、第1のフィルタでのろ過は、分散液のみで行い、他の成分を混合した後で、第2のろ過を行ってもよい。
When using filters, different filters may be combined. At that time, the filtration with the first filter may be performed only once or may be performed twice or more.
Moreover, you may combine the 1st filter of a different hole diameter within the range mentioned above. The pore diameter here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer. As a commercially available filter, for example, select from various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd. (DFA4201NXEY, etc.), Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Integris Co., Ltd. (formerly Nihon Microlith Co., Ltd.) or KITZ Micro Filter Co., Ltd. can do.
As the second filter, a filter formed of the same material as the first filter described above can be used.
For example, the filtration with the first filter may be performed only with the dispersion, and the second filtration may be performed after mixing the other components.
 本発明の組成物の粘度(23℃における)は、1~100mPa・sであることが好ましい。下限は、2mPa・s以上がより好ましく、3mPa・s以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、50mPa・s以下がより好ましく、30mPa・s以下がさらに好ましく、15mPa・s以下が特に好ましい。
 本発明の組成物の全固形分は、適用方法により変更されるが、例えば、1~50質量%であることが好ましい。下限は10質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は30質量%以下がより好ましい。
The viscosity (at 23 ° C.) of the composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 100 mPa · s. The lower limit is more preferably 2 mPa · s or more, and further preferably 3 mPa · s or more. The upper limit is more preferably 50 mPa · s or less, further preferably 30 mPa · s or less, and particularly preferably 15 mPa · s or less.
Although the total solid content of the composition of the present invention varies depending on the application method, it is preferably, for example, 1 to 50% by mass. The lower limit is more preferably 10% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less.
 本発明の組成物は、近赤外線カットフィルタや赤外線透過フィルタなどの形成に好ましく用いることができる。 The composition of the present invention can be preferably used for forming a near-infrared cut filter or an infrared transmission filter.
<膜>
 本発明の膜は、上述した本発明の組成物を用いてなるものである。本発明の膜は、近赤外線カットフィルタや赤外線透過フィルタとして好ましく用いることができる。本発明の膜は、パターンを有していてもよく、パターンを有さない膜(平坦膜)であってもよい。また、本発明の膜は、支持体上に積層した状態で用いてもよく、本発明の膜を支持体から剥離して用いてもよい。
<Membrane>
The film of the present invention is formed using the above-described composition of the present invention. The film of the present invention can be preferably used as a near-infrared cut filter or an infrared transmission filter. The film of the present invention may have a pattern, or may be a film without a pattern (flat film). Moreover, the film of the present invention may be used in a state of being laminated on a support, or the film of the present invention may be used after being peeled from the support.
 本発明の膜を、赤外線透過フィルタとして用いる場合、上述した近赤外線吸収化合物と、可視光を遮光する色材とを含む組成物を用いたフィルタであるか、上述した近赤外線吸収化合物を含む層の他に、可視光を遮光する色材を含む層が別途存在するフィルタであることが好ましい。本発明の膜を赤外線透過フィルタとして用いる場合、上述した近赤外線吸収化合物は、透過する光(近赤外線)をより長波長側に限定する役割を有している。 When the film of the present invention is used as an infrared transmission filter, it is a filter using a composition containing the above-mentioned near-infrared absorbing compound and a colorant that blocks visible light, or a layer containing the above-mentioned near-infrared absorbing compound. In addition, it is preferable that the filter includes a layer containing a color material that blocks visible light. When using the film | membrane of this invention as an infrared rays permeable filter, the near-infrared absorption compound mentioned above has a role which limits the light (near-infrared rays) which permeate | transmit to a longer wavelength side.
 本発明の膜の厚さは、目的に応じて適宜調整できる。膜厚は、20μm以下が好ましく、10μm以下がより好ましく、5μm以下がさらに好ましい。膜厚の下限は、0.1μm以上が好ましく、0.2μm以上がより好ましく、0.3μm以上がさらに好ましい。 The thickness of the film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose. The film thickness is preferably 20 μm or less, more preferably 10 μm or less, and even more preferably 5 μm or less. The lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 μm or more, more preferably 0.2 μm or more, and further preferably 0.3 μm or more.
 本発明の膜は、有彩色着色剤を含むカラーフィルタと組み合わせて用いることもできる。カラーフィルタは、有彩色着色剤を含む着色組成物を用いて製造できる。有彩色着色剤としては、本発明の組成物で説明した有彩色着色剤が挙げられる。着色組成物は、樹脂、重合性化合物、光重合開始剤、界面活性剤、溶剤、重合禁止剤、紫外線吸収剤などをさらに含有することができる。これらの詳細については、本発明の組成物で説明した材料が挙げられ、これらを用いることができる。また、本発明の膜に有彩色着色剤を含有させて、近赤外線カットフィルタとカラーフィルタとしての機能を備えたフィルタとしてもよい。 The film of the present invention can also be used in combination with a color filter containing a chromatic colorant. A color filter can be manufactured using the coloring composition containing a chromatic colorant. Examples of the chromatic colorant include the chromatic colorant described in the composition of the present invention. The coloring composition can further contain a resin, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator, a surfactant, a solvent, a polymerization inhibitor, an ultraviolet absorber, and the like. About these details, the material demonstrated by the composition of this invention is mentioned, These can be used. Moreover, it is good also as a filter provided with the function as a near-infrared cut filter and a color filter by making the film | membrane of this invention contain a chromatic colorant.
 なお、本発明において、近赤外線カットフィルタとは、可視領域の波長の光(可視光)を透過し、近赤外領域の波長の光(近赤外線)の少なくとも一部を遮蔽するフィルタを意味する。近赤外線カットフィルタは、可視領域の波長の光をすべて透過するものであってもよく、可視領域の波長の光のうち、特定の波長の光を通過し、特定の波長の光を遮蔽するものであってもよい。また、本発明において、カラーフィルタとは、可視領域の波長の光のうち、特定の波長の光を通過させ、特定の波長の光を遮蔽するフィルタを意味する。また、赤外線透過フィルタとは、可視領域の波長の光を遮蔽し、近赤外領域の波長の光(近赤外線)の少なくとも一部を透過するフィルタを意味する。 In the present invention, the near-infrared cut filter means a filter that transmits light having a wavelength in the visible region (visible light) and shields at least part of light having a wavelength in the near-infrared region (near infrared light). . The near-infrared cut filter may transmit all light having a wavelength in the visible region, and transmits light having a specific wavelength out of light having a wavelength in the visible region and shields light having a specific wavelength. It may be. In the present invention, the color filter means a filter that allows light having a specific wavelength to pass through and blocks light having a specific wavelength among light having a wavelength in the visible region. The infrared transmission filter means a filter that blocks light having a wavelength in the visible region and transmits at least part of light having a wavelength in the near infrared region (near infrared).
 本発明の膜を、近赤外線カットフィルタまたは赤外線透過フィルタとして用いる場合、近赤外線カットフィルタと赤外線透過フィルタとを組み合わせて用いることもできる。近赤外線カットフィルタと赤外線透過フィルタとを組み合わせて用いることで、特定波長の赤外線を検出する赤外線センサの用途に好ましく用いることができる。両者のフィルタを組み合わせて用いる場合、近赤外線カットフィルタおよび赤外線透過フィルタの両方を本発明の組成物を用いて形成することもでき、いずれか一方のみを、本発明の組成物を用いて形成することもできる。 When the film of the present invention is used as a near infrared cut filter or an infrared transmission filter, a near infrared cut filter and an infrared transmission filter can be used in combination. By using a combination of a near-infrared cut filter and an infrared transmission filter, it can be preferably used for an infrared sensor that detects infrared rays having a specific wavelength. When both filters are used in combination, both the near-infrared cut filter and the infrared transmission filter can be formed using the composition of the present invention, and only one of them is formed using the composition of the present invention. You can also.
 本発明の膜は、CCD(電荷結合素子)やCMOS(相補型金属酸化膜半導体)などの固体撮像素子や、赤外線センサ、画像表示装置などの各種装置に用いることができる。また、本発明の膜は、近赤外線を吸収またはカットする機能を有するレンズ(デジタルカメラ、携帯電話、車載カメラ等のカメラ用レンズ、f-θレンズ、ピックアップレンズ等の光学レンズ)および半導体受光素子用の光学フィルタ、太陽光の選択的な利用を目的とする農業用コーティング剤、近赤外線の吸収熱を利用する記録媒体、電子機器用や写真用近赤外線フィルタ、保護めがね、サングラス、熱線遮断フィルタ、光学文字読み取り記録、機密文書複写防止用、電子写真感光体、レーザー溶着などに用いられる。またCCDカメラ用ノイズカットフィルタ、CMOSイメージセンサ用フィルタとしても有用である。 The film of the present invention can be used for various devices such as a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) and a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor), an infrared sensor, and an image display device. Further, the film of the present invention includes a lens having a function of absorbing or cutting near infrared rays (a lens for a camera such as a digital camera, a mobile phone, an in-vehicle camera, an optical lens such as an f-θ lens, a pickup lens) and a semiconductor light receiving element. Optical filters, agricultural coatings for selective use of sunlight, recording media using near infrared absorption heat, near infrared filters for electronic devices and photographs, protective glasses, sunglasses, heat ray blocking filters Used for optical character reading and recording, confidential document copy prevention, electrophotographic photosensitive member, laser welding, and the like. It is also useful as a noise cut filter for CCD cameras and a filter for CMOS image sensors.
<パターン形成方法>
 次に、パターン形成方法について説明する、パターン形成方法は、組成物を用いて支持体上に組成物層を形成する工程と、フォトリソグラフィ法またはドライエッチング法により、組成物層に対してパターンを形成する工程とを含む。
<Pattern formation method>
Next, the pattern forming method will be described. The pattern forming method includes a step of forming a composition layer on a support using the composition, and a pattern is formed on the composition layer by a photolithography method or a dry etching method. Forming.
 フォトリソグラフィ法でのパターン形成方法は、組成物を用いて支持体上に組成物層を形成する工程と、組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、未露光部を現像除去してパターンを形成する工程とを含むことが好ましい。必要に応じて、組成物層をベークする工程(プリベーク工程)、および、現像されたパターンをベークする工程(ポストベーク工程)を設けてもよい。
 また、ドライエッチング法でのパターン形成方法は、組成物を用いて支持体上に組成物層を形成する工程と、組成物層を硬化して硬化物層を形成する工程と、硬化物層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程と、露光および現像することによりフォトレジスト層をパターニングしてレジストパターンを得る工程と、レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして硬化物層をドライエッチングしてパターンを形成する工程とを含むことが好ましい。以下、各工程について説明する。
The pattern forming method by the photolithography method includes a step of forming a composition layer on a support using the composition, a step of exposing the composition layer in a pattern, and developing and removing unexposed portions to form a pattern. Preferably including the step of forming. If necessary, a step of baking the composition layer (pre-bake step) and a step of baking the developed pattern (post-bake step) may be provided.
Further, the pattern forming method by the dry etching method includes a step of forming a composition layer on a support using the composition, a step of curing the composition layer to form a cured product layer, A step of forming a photoresist layer on the substrate, a step of patterning the photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern, and a step of forming a pattern by dry etching the cured product layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask. It is preferable to contain. Hereinafter, each step will be described.
<<組成物層を形成する工程>>
 組成物層を形成する工程では、組成物を用いて、支持体上に組成物層を形成する。
<< Step of Forming Composition Layer >>
In the step of forming the composition layer, the composition layer is formed on the support using the composition.
 支持体としては、例えば、ガラス、シリコン、ポリカーボネート、ポリエステル、芳香族ポリアミド、ポリアミドイミド、ポリイミド等の材料からなる支持体が挙げられる。また、支持体上にCCDやCMOS等の固体撮像素子(受光素子)が設けられた固体撮像素子用支持体を用いることができる。
 パターンは、固体撮像素子用基板の固体撮像素子形成面側(おもて面)に形成してもよいし、固体撮像素子非形成面側(裏面)に形成してもよい。支持体は、必要により、上部の層との密着改良、物質の拡散防止あるいは基板表面の平坦化のために下塗り層を設けてもよい。
Examples of the support include a support made of a material such as glass, silicon, polycarbonate, polyester, aromatic polyamide, polyamideimide, and polyimide. Further, a support for a solid-state imaging element in which a solid-state imaging element (light receiving element) such as a CCD or CMOS is provided on the support can be used.
The pattern may be formed on the solid-state image sensor formation surface side (front surface) of the solid-state image sensor substrate, or may be formed on the solid-state image sensor non-formation surface side (back surface). If necessary, the support may be provided with an undercoat layer for improving adhesion to the upper layer, preventing diffusion of substances, or flattening the substrate surface.
 支持体への組成物の適用方法としては、公知の方法を用いることができる。例えば、滴下法(ドロップキャスト);スリットコート法;スプレー法;ロールコート法;回転塗布法(スピンコーティング);流延塗布法;スリットアンドスピン法;プリウェット法(例えば、特開2009-145395号公報に記載されている方法);インクジェット(例えば、オンデマンド方式、ピエゾ方式、サーマル方式)、ノズルジェット等の吐出系印刷、フレキソ印刷、スクリーン印刷、グラビア印刷、反転オフセット印刷、メタルマスク印刷法などの各種印刷法;金型等を用いた転写法;ナノインプリント法などが挙げられる。インクジェットでの適用方法としては、特に限定されず、例えば「広がる・使えるインクジェット-特許に見る無限の可能性-、2005年2月発行、住ベテクノリサーチ」に示された特許公報に記載の方法(特に115~133ページ)や、特開2003-262716号公報、特開2003-185831号公報、特開2003-261827号公報、特開2012-126830号公報、特開2006-169325号公報などに記載の方法が挙げられる。 As a method for applying the composition to the support, a known method can be used. For example, dropping method (drop casting); slit coating method; spray method; roll coating method; spin coating method (spin coating); casting coating method; slit and spin method; prewet method (for example, JP 2009-145395 A) Method described in the publication); inkjet (for example, on-demand method, piezo method, thermal method), ejection system printing such as nozzle jet, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, metal mask printing method, etc. Various printing methods; transfer method using a mold or the like; nanoimprint method. The application method in the ink jet is not particularly limited. For example, the method described in the patent publication shown in “Expanding and usable ink jet: unlimited possibilities seen in patents, issued in February 2005, Sumibe Techno Research”. (Particularly, pages 115 to 133), JP2003-262716A, JP2003-185831A, JP2003-261627A, JP2012-126830A, JP2006-169325A, and the like. The method described is mentioned.
 支持体上に形成した組成物層は、乾燥(プリベーク)してもよい。低温プロセスによりパターンを形成する場合は、プリベークを行わなくてもよい。プリベークを行う場合、プリベーク温度は、150℃以下が好ましく、120℃以下がより好ましく、110℃以下がさらに好ましい。下限は、例えば、50℃以上とすることができ、80℃以上とすることもできる。プリベーク時間は、10~300秒が好ましく、40~250秒がより好ましく、80~220秒がさらに好ましい。乾燥は、ホットプレート、オーブン等で行うことができる。 The composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked). When a pattern is formed by a low temperature process, pre-baking may not be performed. When prebaking is performed, the prebaking temperature is preferably 150 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower, and further preferably 110 ° C. or lower. For example, the lower limit may be 50 ° C. or higher, and may be 80 ° C. or higher. The pre-bake time is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 40 to 250 seconds, and further preferably 80 to 220 seconds. Drying can be performed with a hot plate, oven, or the like.
(フォトリソグラフィ法でパターン形成する場合)
<<露光工程>>
 次に、組成物層を、パターン状に露光する(露光工程)。例えば、組成物層に対し、ステッパー等の露光装置を用いて、所定のマスクパターンを有するマスクを介して露光することで、パターン露光することができる。これにより、露光部分を硬化することができる。
 露光に際して用いることができる放射線(光)としては、g線、i線等の紫外線が好ましく、特に好ましくはi線である。照射量(露光量)は、例えば、0.03~2.5J/cmが好ましく、0.05~1.0J/cmがより好ましく、0.08~0.5J/cmが最も好ましい。
 露光時における酸素濃度は適宜選択することができ、大気下で行う他に、例えば酸素濃度が19体積%以下の低酸素雰囲気下(好ましくは15体積%以下、より好ましくは5体積%以下、さらに好ましくは実質的に無酸素)で露光してもよく、酸素濃度が21体積%を超える高酸素雰囲気下(好ましくは22体積%以上、より好ましくは30体積%以上、さらに好ましくは50体積%以上)で露光してもよい。また、露光照度は適宜設定することが可能であり、通常1,000W/m~100,000W/m(好ましくは5,000W/m以上、より好ましくは15,000W/m以上、さらに好ましくは35,000W/m以上)の範囲から選択することができる。酸素濃度と露光照度は適宜条件を組み合わせてよく、例えば、酸素濃度10体積%で照度10,000W/m、酸素濃度35体積%で照度20,000W/mなどとすることができる。
(When forming a pattern by photolithography)
<< Exposure process >>
Next, the composition layer is exposed in a pattern (exposure process). For example, pattern exposure can be performed by exposing the composition layer through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using an exposure apparatus such as a stepper. Thereby, an exposed part can be hardened.
The radiation (light) that can be used for the exposure is preferably ultraviolet rays such as g-line and i-line, and particularly preferably i-line. Irradiation dose (exposure dose), for example, preferably 0.03 ~ 2.5J / cm 2, more preferably 0.05 ~ 1.0J / cm 2, most preferably 0.08 ~ 0.5J / cm 2 .
The oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be appropriately selected. In addition to being performed in the atmosphere, for example, in a low oxygen atmosphere having an oxygen concentration of 19% by volume or less (preferably 15% by volume or less, more preferably 5% by volume or less, Preferably, the exposure may be performed in a substantially oxygen-free manner, and in a high oxygen atmosphere where the oxygen concentration exceeds 21% by volume (preferably 22% by volume or more, more preferably 30% by volume or more, further preferably 50% by volume or more). ) For exposure. The exposure illuminance can be appropriately set, and is usually 1,000 W / m 2 to 100,000 W / m 2 (preferably 5,000 W / m 2 or more, more preferably 15,000 W / m 2 or more, More preferably, it can be selected from the range of 35,000 W / m 2 or more. Oxygen concentration and exposure illuminance may appropriately combined conditions, for example, illuminance 10,000 W / m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 10 vol%, oxygen concentration of 35 vol% can be such illuminance 20,000W / m 2.
<<現像工程>>
 次に、未露光部を現像除去してパターンを形成する。未露光部の現像除去は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。これにより、露光工程における未露光部の組成物層が現像液に溶出し、光硬化した部分だけが残る。
 現像液としては、下地の固体撮像素子や回路などにダメージを起さない、アルカリ現像液が望ましい。
 現像液の温度は、例えば、20~30℃が好ましい。現像時間は、20~180秒が好ましい。また、残渣除去性を向上させるため、現像液を60秒ごとに振り切り、さらに新たに現像液を供給する工程を数回繰り返してもよい。
<< Development process >>
Next, the unexposed portion is developed and removed to form a pattern. The development removal of the unexposed portion can be performed using a developer. Thereby, the composition layer of the unexposed part in an exposure process elutes in a developing solution, and only the photocured part remains.
The developer is preferably an alkaline developer that does not damage the underlying solid-state imaging device or circuit.
The temperature of the developer is preferably 20 to 30 ° C., for example. The development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Moreover, in order to improve residue removability, the process of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and supplying a new developer may be repeated several times.
 現像液に用いるアルカリ剤としては、例えば、アンモニア水、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、ジグリコールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、ヒドロキシアミン、エチレンジアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ジメチルビス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセンなどの有機アルカリ性化合物が挙げられる。現像液として、これらのアルカリ剤を純水で希釈したアルカリ性水溶液が好ましく使用される。アルカリ性水溶液のアルカリ剤の濃度は、0.001~10質量%が好ましく、0.01~1質量%がより好ましい。また、現像液のアルカリ剤として無機アルカリ性化合物を用いてもよい。無機アルカリ性化合物としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、ケイ酸ナトリウム、メタケイ酸ナトリウムなどが挙げられる。また、現像液には、界面活性剤を用いてもよい。界面活性剤の例としては、上述した組成物で説明した界面活性剤が挙げられ、ノニオン系界面活性剤が好ましい。なお、このようなアルカリ性水溶液からなる現像液を使用した場合には、現像後純水で洗浄(リンス)することが好ましい。 Examples of the alkaline agent used in the developer include ammonia water, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, diglycolamine, diethanolamine, hydroxyamine, ethylenediamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, Organic alkalinity such as tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis (2-hydroxyethyl) ammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene Compounds. As the developer, an alkaline aqueous solution obtained by diluting these alkaline agents with pure water is preferably used. The concentration of the alkaline agent in the alkaline aqueous solution is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass. Moreover, you may use an inorganic alkaline compound as an alkali agent of a developing solution. Examples of the inorganic alkaline compound include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate and the like. Further, a surfactant may be used for the developer. Examples of the surfactant include the surfactant described in the above-described composition, and a nonionic surfactant is preferable. In addition, when using the developing solution which consists of such alkaline aqueous solution, it is preferable to wash | clean (rinse) with a pure water after image development.
 現像後、乾燥を施した後に加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行うこともできる。ポストベークは、膜の硬化を完全なものとするための現像後の加熱処理である。ポストベークを行う場合、ポストベーク温度は、例えば100~240℃が好ましい。膜硬化の観点から、200~230℃がより好ましい。また、発光光源として有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(有機EL)素子を用いた場合や、イメージセンサの光電変換膜を有機素材で構成した場合は、ポストベーク温度は、150℃以下が好ましく、120℃以下がより好ましく、100℃以下がさらに好ましく、90℃以下が一層好ましい。下限は、例えば、50℃以上とすることができる。ポストベークは、現像後の膜を、上記条件になるようにホットプレートやコンベクションオーブン(熱風循環式乾燥機)、高周波加熱機等の加熱手段を用いて、連続式あるいはバッチ式で行うことができる。 Developed, dried and then heat-treated (post-baked). Post-baking is a heat treatment after development for complete film curing. In the case of performing post-baking, the post-baking temperature is preferably 100 to 240 ° C., for example. From the viewpoint of film curing, 200 to 230 ° C. is more preferable. In addition, when an organic electroluminescence (organic EL) element is used as the light source, or when the photoelectric conversion film of the image sensor is made of an organic material, the post-bake temperature is preferably 150 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower. Preferably, it is 100 ° C. or lower, and more preferably 90 ° C. or lower. The lower limit can be, for example, 50 ° C. or higher. Post-baking can be carried out continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), a high-frequency heater, etc., so that the film after development is in the above-mentioned condition. .
(ドライエッチング法でパターン形成する場合)
 ドライエッチング法でのパターン形成は、支持体上に形成した組成物層を硬化して硬化物層を形成し、次いで、得られた硬化物層を、パターニングされたフォトレジスト層をマスクとしてエッチングガスを用いて行うことができる。フォトレジスト層の形成においては、さらにプリベーク処理を施すことが好ましい。特に、フォトレジストの形成プロセスとしては、露光後の加熱処理、現像後の加熱処理(ポストベーク処理)を実施する形態が望ましい。ドライエッチング法でのパターン形成については、特開2013-064993号公報の段落番号0010~0067の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
(When pattern is formed by dry etching method)
The pattern formation by the dry etching method is performed by curing the composition layer formed on the support to form a cured product layer, and then using the patterned photoresist layer as a mask to etch the obtained cured product layer. Can be used. In the formation of the photoresist layer, it is preferable to further perform a pre-bake treatment. In particular, as a process for forming a photoresist, a mode in which heat treatment after exposure and heat treatment after development (post-bake treatment) are desirable. Regarding pattern formation by the dry etching method, the description of paragraph numbers 0010 to 0067 of JP2013-064993A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
<光学フィルタ>
 次に、本発明の光学フィルタについて説明する。本発明の光学フィルタは、本発明の膜を有する。光学フィルタは、近赤外線カットフィルタや赤外線透過フィルタとして好ましく用いることができる。
<Optical filter>
Next, the optical filter of the present invention will be described. The optical filter of the present invention has the film of the present invention. The optical filter can be preferably used as a near-infrared cut filter or an infrared transmission filter.
 本発明の光学フィルタは、本発明の膜の他に、さらに、銅を含有する層、誘電体多層膜、紫外線吸収層などを有していてもよい。
 例えば、本発明の光学フィルタを近赤外線カットフィルタとして用いる場合、本発明の膜の他に、さらに、銅を含有する層や誘電体多層膜を有することで、視野角が広く、赤外線遮蔽性に優れた近赤外線カットフィルタとすることができる。また、本発明の膜の他に、さらに、紫外線吸収層を有することで、紫外線遮蔽性に優れた近赤外線カットフィルタとすることができる。紫外線吸収層に含まれる紫外線吸収剤としては、本発明の組成物で説明した紫外線吸収剤が挙げられる。また、紫外線吸収層としては、例えば、国際公開WO2015/099060号の段落番号0040~0070、0119~0145の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。誘電体多層膜としては、特開2014-41318号公報の段落番号0255~0259の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。銅を含有する層としては、銅を含有するガラスで構成されたガラス基板(銅含有ガラス基板)や、銅錯体を含む層(銅錯体含有層)が挙げられる。銅含有ガラス基板としては、銅を含有するリン酸塩ガラス、銅を含有する弗リン酸塩ガラスなどが挙げられる。銅含有ガラスの市販品としては、NF-50(AGCテクノグラス(株)製、商品名)、BG-60、BG-61(以上、ショット社製、商品名)、CD5000(HOYA(株)製、商品名)等が挙げられる。銅錯体含有層としては、銅錯体を含む銅錯体含有組成物を用いて形成してなる層が挙げられる。銅錯体は、700~1,200nmの波長領域に極大吸収波長を有する化合物が好ましい。銅錯体の極大吸収波長は、720~1,200nmの波長領域に有することがより好ましく、800~1,100nmの波長領域に有することがさらに好ましい。
In addition to the film of the present invention, the optical filter of the present invention may further have a layer containing copper, a dielectric multilayer film, an ultraviolet absorbing layer, and the like.
For example, when the optical filter of the present invention is used as a near-infrared cut filter, in addition to the film of the present invention, it has a copper-containing layer and a dielectric multilayer film, so that the viewing angle is wide and the infrared shielding property is achieved. An excellent near-infrared cut filter can be obtained. In addition to the film of the present invention, a near-infrared cut filter having excellent ultraviolet shielding properties can be obtained by further comprising an ultraviolet absorbing layer. As an ultraviolet absorber contained in an ultraviolet absorption layer, the ultraviolet absorber demonstrated with the composition of this invention is mentioned. In addition, as the ultraviolet absorbing layer, for example, the description of paragraph numbers 0040 to 0070 and 0119 to 0145 of International Publication No. WO2015 / 099060 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein. As the dielectric multilayer film, the description of paragraph numbers 0255 to 0259 of JP 2014-41318 A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. As a layer containing copper, the glass substrate (copper containing glass substrate) comprised with the glass containing copper and the layer (copper complex containing layer) containing a copper complex are mentioned. Examples of the copper-containing glass substrate include a phosphate glass containing copper and a fluorophosphate glass containing copper. Commercially available products of copper-containing glass include NF-50 (manufactured by AGC Techno Glass Co., Ltd., product name), BG-60, BG-61 (manufactured by Schott Co., Ltd., product name), and CD5000 (manufactured by HOYA Corp.). , Product name) and the like. As a copper complex containing layer, the layer formed using the copper complex containing composition containing a copper complex is mentioned. The copper complex is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 700 to 1,200 nm. The maximum absorption wavelength of the copper complex is more preferably in the wavelength region of 720 to 1,200 nm, and further preferably in the wavelength region of 800 to 1,100 nm.
 また、本発明の光学フィルタは、本発明の膜の画素と、赤、緑、青、マゼンタ、黄、シアン、黒および無色から選ばれる画素とを有する態様も好ましい。 In addition, it is preferable that the optical filter of the present invention has a pixel of the film of the present invention and a pixel selected from red, green, blue, magenta, yellow, cyan, black, and colorless.
<積層体>
 本発明の積層体は、本発明の膜と、有彩色着色剤を含むカラーフィルタとを有する。本発明の積層体は、本発明の膜と、カラーフィルタとが厚さ方向で隣接していてもよく、隣接していなくてもよい。本発明の膜と、カラーフィルタとが厚さ方向で隣接していない場合は、カラーフィルタが形成された支持体とは別の支持体に本発明の膜が形成されていてもよく、本発明の膜とカラーフィルタとの間に、固体撮像素子を構成する他の部材(例えば、マイクロレンズ、平坦化層など)が介在していてもよい。
<Laminate>
The laminate of the present invention has the film of the present invention and a color filter containing a chromatic colorant. In the laminate of the present invention, the film of the present invention and the color filter may or may not be adjacent in the thickness direction. When the film of the present invention and the color filter are not adjacent in the thickness direction, the film of the present invention may be formed on a support different from the support on which the color filter is formed. Between the film and the color filter, other members (for example, a microlens, a flattening layer, etc.) constituting the solid-state imaging device may be interposed.
<固体撮像素子>
 本発明の固体撮像素子は、上述した本発明の膜を有する。本発明の固体撮像素子の構成としては、本発明の膜を有する構成であり、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はないが、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。
<Solid-state imaging device>
The solid-state imaging device of the present invention has the above-described film of the present invention. The configuration of the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration having the film of the present invention and functions as a solid-state imaging device, and examples thereof include the following configurations.
 支持体上に、固体撮像素子の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオードおよびポリシリコン等からなる転送電極を有し、フォトダイオードおよび転送電極上にフォトダイオードの受光部のみ開口したタングステン等からなる遮光膜を有し、遮光膜上に遮光膜全面およびフォトダイオード受光部を覆うように形成された窒化シリコン等からなるデバイス保護膜を有し、デバイス保護膜上に、本発明の硬化膜を有する構成である。
 さらに、デバイス保護膜上であって、本発明の硬化膜の下(支持体に近い側)に集光手段(例えば、マイクロレンズ等。以下同じ)を有する構成や、本発明の硬化膜上に集光手段を有する構成等であってもよい。
 また、固体撮像素子において、カラーフィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各色画素を形成する硬化膜が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。この場合の隔壁は各色画素に対して低屈折率であることが好ましい。このような構造を有する撮像装置の例としては、特開2012-227478号公報、特開2014-179577号公報に記載の装置が挙げられる。
On the support, there are a plurality of photodiodes that constitute the light receiving area of the solid-state imaging device, and transfer electrodes made of polysilicon, etc., and light shielding made of tungsten or the like that opens only the light receiving part of the photodiodes on the photodiodes and transfer electrodes. A structure having a film, having a device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light shielding film and the photodiode light receiving portion, and having the cured film of the present invention on the device protective film It is.
Furthermore, on the device protective film, the structure having a light collecting means (for example, a microlens, etc., the same shall apply hereinafter) under the cured film of the present invention (side closer to the support), or on the cured film of the present invention. The structure etc. which have a condensing means may be sufficient.
Further, in the solid-state imaging device, the color filter may have a structure in which a cured film that forms each color pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by a partition, for example, in a lattice shape. The partition in this case preferably has a low refractive index for each color pixel. Examples of the image pickup apparatus having such a structure include apparatuses described in JP 2012-227478 A and JP 2014-179577 A.
<画像表示装置>
 本発明の膜は、液晶表示装置や有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(有機EL)表示装置などの画像表示装置に用いることもできる。例えば、各着色画素(例えば赤色、緑色、青色)とともに用いることにより、表示装置のバックライト(例えば白色発光ダイオード(白色LED))に含まれる赤外光を遮断し、周辺機器の誤作動を防止する目的や、各着色画素に加えて赤外の画素を形成する目的で用いることが可能である。
<Image display device>
The film of the present invention can also be used for image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices and organic electroluminescence (organic EL) display devices. For example, when used with each colored pixel (for example, red, green, blue), the infrared light contained in the backlight of the display device (for example, white light emitting diode (white LED)) is blocked, and malfunction of peripheral devices is prevented. It can be used for the purpose of forming an infrared pixel in addition to each colored pixel.
 画像表示装置の定義や画像表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木昭夫著、(株)工業調査会、1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹順章著、産業図書(株)、平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田龍男編集、(株)工業調査会、1994年発行)」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。 For the definition of the image display device and details of the image display device, for example, “Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Kenkyukai, Issued 1990)”, “Display Device (Junaki Ibuki, Sangyo Tosho Co., Ltd.) ), Issued in 1989). The liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”. The liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
 画像表示装置は、白色有機EL素子を有するものであってもよい。白色有機EL素子としては、タンデム構造であることが好ましい。有機EL素子のタンデム構造については、特開2003-45676号公報、三上明義監修、「有機EL技術開発の最前線-高輝度・高精度・長寿命化・ノウハウ集-」、技術情報協会、326~328ページ、2008年などに記載されている。有機EL素子が発光する白色光のスペクトルは、青色領域(430~485nm)、緑色領域(530~580nm)および黄色領域(580~620nm)に強い極大発光ピークを有するものが好ましい。これらの発光ピークに加えさらに赤色領域(650~700nm)に極大発光ピークを有するものがより好ましい。 The image display device may have a white organic EL element. The white organic EL element preferably has a tandem structure. Regarding the tandem structure of organic EL elements, JP 2003-45676 A, supervised by Akiyoshi Mikami, “Frontier of Organic EL Technology Development-High Brightness, High Precision, Long Life, Know-how Collection”, Technical Information Association, 326-328 pages, 2008, etc. The spectrum of white light emitted from the organic EL element preferably has a strong maximum emission peak in the blue region (430 to 485 nm), the green region (530 to 580 nm) and the yellow region (580 to 620 nm). In addition to these emission peaks, those having a maximum emission peak in the red region (650 to 700 nm) are more preferable.
<赤外線センサ>
 本発明の赤外線センサは、上述した本発明の膜を有する。赤外線センサの構成としては、本発明の膜を有する構成であり、赤外線センサとして機能する構成であれば特に限定はない。
<Infrared sensor>
The infrared sensor of the present invention has the above-described film of the present invention. The configuration of the infrared sensor is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration having the film of the present invention and functions as an infrared sensor.
 以下、本発明の赤外線センサの一実施形態について、図面を用いて説明する。
 図1において、符号110は、固体撮像素子である。固体撮像素子110上に設けられている撮像領域は、近赤外線カットフィルタ111と、赤外線透過フィルタ114とを有する。また、近赤外線カットフィルタ111上には、カラーフィルタ112が積層している。カラーフィルタ112および赤外線透過フィルタ114の入射光hν側には、マイクロレンズ115が配置されている。マイクロレンズ115を覆うように平坦化層116が形成されている。
Hereinafter, an embodiment of an infrared sensor of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In FIG. 1, reference numeral 110 denotes a solid-state image sensor. The imaging region provided on the solid-state imaging device 110 includes a near infrared cut filter 111 and an infrared transmission filter 114. A color filter 112 is laminated on the near infrared cut filter 111. A micro lens 115 is disposed on the incident light hν side of the color filter 112 and the infrared transmission filter 114. A planarization layer 116 is formed so as to cover the microlens 115.
 近赤外線カットフィルタ111は、後述する赤外発光ダイオード(赤外LED)の発光波長によりその特性は選択される。例えば、可視光(例えば、波長450nm以上650nm未満の光)を透過し、波長650nm以上の光の少なくとも一部(好ましくは波長650~1,000nmの光の少なくとも一部、さらに好ましくは波長700~1,000nmの光の少なくとも一部)を遮蔽するフィルタであることが好ましい。近赤外線カットフィルタ111は、例えば、本発明の組成物を用いて形成できる。 The characteristics of the near infrared cut filter 111 are selected according to the emission wavelength of an infrared light emitting diode (infrared LED) described later. For example, visible light (for example, light having a wavelength of 450 nm or more and less than 650 nm) is transmitted, and at least a part of the light having a wavelength of 650 nm or more (preferably at least a part of light having a wavelength of 650 to 1,000 nm, more preferably a wavelength of 700 to A filter that shields at least a part of light of 1,000 nm) is preferable. The near-infrared cut filter 111 can be formed using, for example, the composition of the present invention.
 カラーフィルタ112は、可視領域における特定波長の光を透過および吸収する画素が形成されたカラーフィルタであって、特に限定はなく、従来公知の画素形成用のカラーフィルタを用いることができる。例えば、赤色(R)、緑色(G)、青色(B)の画素が形成されたカラーフィルタなどを用いることができる。例えば、特開2014-043556号公報の段落番号0214~0263の記載を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The color filter 112 is a color filter in which pixels that transmit and absorb light of a specific wavelength in the visible region are formed, and is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known color filter for pixel formation can be used. For example, a color filter in which red (R), green (G), and blue (B) pixels are formed can be used. For example, the description of paragraph numbers 0214 to 0263 in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-043556 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 赤外線透過フィルタ114は、後述する赤外LEDの発光波長によりその特性は選択される。例えば、赤外LEDの発光波長が850nmである場合、赤外線透過フィルタ114は、膜の厚さ方向における光透過率の、波長450nm以上650nm未満の範囲における最大値が30%以下であることが好ましく、20%以下であることがより好ましく、10%以下であることがさらに好ましく、0.1%以下であることが特に好ましい。この透過率は、波長450nm以上650nm未満の範囲の全域で上記の条件を満たすことが好ましい。 The characteristics of the infrared transmission filter 114 are selected according to the emission wavelength of an infrared LED described later. For example, when the emission wavelength of the infrared LED is 850 nm, the infrared transmission filter 114 preferably has a maximum value of 30% or less of the light transmittance in the film thickness direction in the wavelength range of 450 nm to less than 650 nm. 20% or less, more preferably 10% or less, and particularly preferably 0.1% or less. This transmittance preferably satisfies the above-described conditions over the entire wavelength range of 450 nm or more and less than 650 nm.
 赤外線透過フィルタ114は、膜の厚さ方向における光透過率の、波長800nm以上(好ましくは800~1,300nm)の範囲における最小値が70%以上であることが好ましく、80%以上であることがより好ましく、90%以上であることがさらに好ましい。この透過率は、波長800nm以上の範囲の一部で上記の条件を満たすことが好ましく、赤外LEDの発光波長に対応する波長で上記の条件を満たすことが好ましい。 In the infrared transmission filter 114, the minimum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 800 nm or more (preferably 800 to 1,300 nm) is preferably 70% or more, and 80% or more. Is more preferable, and it is still more preferable that it is 90% or more. This transmittance preferably satisfies the above condition in a part of the wavelength range of 800 nm or more, and preferably satisfies the above condition at a wavelength corresponding to the emission wavelength of the infrared LED.
 赤外線透過フィルタ114の膜厚は、100μm以下が好ましく、15μm以下がより好ましく、5μm以下がさらに好ましく、1μm以下が特に好ましい。下限値は、0.1μmが好ましい。 赤外線透過フィルタ114の分光特性、膜厚等の測定方法を以下に示す。
 膜厚は、膜を有する乾燥後の支持体を、触針式表面形状測定器(ULVAC社製 DEKTAK150)を用いて測定した。膜の分光特性は、分光光度計((株)日立ハイテクノロジーズ製、U-4100)を用いて、波長300~1,300nmの範囲において透過率を測定した値である。
The film thickness of the infrared transmission filter 114 is preferably 100 μm or less, more preferably 15 μm or less, further preferably 5 μm or less, and particularly preferably 1 μm or less. The lower limit is preferably 0.1 μm. A method for measuring the spectral characteristics, film thickness, etc. of the infrared transmission filter 114 is shown below.
The film thickness was measured using a stylus type surface shape measuring instrument (DEKTAK150 manufactured by ULVAC) on the dried support having the film. The spectral characteristic of the film is a value obtained by measuring transmittance in a wavelength range of 300 to 1,300 nm using a spectrophotometer (U-4100, manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation).
 上述した分光特性を有する赤外線透過フィルタ114は、可視光を遮光する色材を含む組成物を用いて形成できる。可視光を遮光する色材の詳細については、上述した本発明の組成物で説明した内容と同様である。 The infrared transmission filter 114 having the spectral characteristics described above can be formed using a composition containing a colorant that blocks visible light. The details of the colorant that blocks visible light are the same as those described in the above-described composition of the present invention.
 また、例えば、赤外LEDの発光波長が940nmである場合、赤外線透過フィルタ114は、膜の厚さ方向における光の透過率の、波長450nm以上650nm未満の範囲における最大値が20%以下であり、膜の厚さ方向における、波長835nmの光の透過率が20%以下であり、膜の厚さ方向における光の透過率の、波長1,000~1,300nmの範囲における最小値が70%以上であることが好ましい。 For example, when the emission wavelength of the infrared LED is 940 nm, the infrared transmission filter 114 has a maximum light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the range of the wavelength of 450 nm or more and less than 650 nm of 20% or less. The transmittance of light at a wavelength of 835 nm in the thickness direction of the film is 20% or less, and the minimum transmittance of light in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 1,000 to 1,300 nm is 70%. The above is preferable.
 上述した分光特性を有する赤外線透過フィルタ114は、可視光を遮光する色材と、近赤外線吸収剤とを含む組成物を用いて形成できる。可視光を遮光する色材の詳細については、上述した本発明の組成物で説明した内容と同様である。近赤外線吸収剤としては、上述した本発明の組成物で説明した近赤外線吸収化合物などが挙げられる。 The infrared transmission filter 114 having the spectral characteristics described above can be formed using a composition containing a colorant that blocks visible light and a near infrared absorber. The details of the colorant that blocks visible light are the same as those described in the above-described composition of the present invention. As a near-infrared absorber, the near-infrared absorption compound demonstrated with the composition of this invention mentioned above etc. are mentioned.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明を具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「%」および「部」は質量基準である。以下の構造式中、Meはメチル基を表し、Buはブチル基を表し、Phはフェニル基を表す。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be specifically described with reference to examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. Unless otherwise specified, “%” and “parts” are based on mass. In the following structural formulas, Me represents a methyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
<重量平均分子量の測定>
 樹脂の重量平均分子量の測定は、測定装置としてHPC-8220GPC(東ソー(株)製)、ガードカラムとしてTSKguardcolumn SuperHZ-L、カラムとしてTSKgel SuperHZM-M、TSKgel SuperHZ4000、TSKgel SuperHZ3000、TSKgel SuperHZ2000を直結したカラムを用い、カラム温度を40℃にして、試料濃度0.1質量%のテトラヒドロフラン溶液をカラムに10μL注入し、溶出溶剤としてテトラヒドロフランを毎分0.35mLの流量でフローさせ、RI(示差屈折率)検出装置にて試料ピークを検出し、標準ポリスチレンを用いて作製した検量線を用いて計算した。
<Measurement of weight average molecular weight>
The weight average molecular weight of the resin was measured by using HPC-8220GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corp.) as a measuring device, TSKguardcolumn SuperHZ-L as a guard column, TSKgel SuperHZM-M as a column, TSKgel SuperHZ4000, TSKgel SuperTSZHZ3000, and TSKgel Super TS The column temperature was set to 40 ° C., 10 μL of a tetrahydrofuran solution having a sample concentration of 0.1% by mass was injected into the column, and tetrahydrofuran as an elution solvent was allowed to flow at a flow rate of 0.35 mL / min. RI (differential refractive index) The sample peak was detected by a detection device, and calculation was performed using a calibration curve prepared using standard polystyrene.
<組成物の調製>
下記表に示す原料を、下記表に示す割合で混合および撹拌した後、孔径0.45μmのナイロン製フィルタ(日本ポール(株)製)でろ過して、組成物を調製した。表中に記載の数値は質量部である。
<Preparation of composition>
The raw materials shown in the following table were mixed and stirred at the ratio shown in the following table, and then filtered through a nylon filter (manufactured by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 0.45 μm to prepare a composition. The numerical values described in the table are parts by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000062
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000062
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000063
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000063
 上記表に記載の原料は以下の通りである。
(近赤外線吸収化合物)
 pp-1、pp-2、pp-3、pp-4、pp-5、sq-1、cy-1:下記化合物。下記化合物は、23℃のシクロペンタノン100g、23℃のシクロヘキサノン100g、および、23℃のプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート100gに対する溶解度が2g以上である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
 樹脂1:下記構造の樹脂(重量平均分子量41,400、ガラス転移温度53℃、主鎖の繰り返し単位に付記した数値はモル比である。)のシクロヘキサノン30質量%溶液
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
 樹脂2:下記構造の樹脂(重量平均分子量41,400、ガラス転移温度53℃、主鎖の繰り返し単位に付記した数値はモル比である。)のシクロペンタノン30質量%溶液
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
 樹脂3:下記構造の樹脂(重量平均分子量10,000、ガラス転移温度46℃、主鎖の繰り返し単位に付記した数値はモル比である。)のプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート40質量%溶液
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
 有機溶剤1:シクロヘキサノン
 有機溶剤2:シクロペンタノン
 重合性化合物1:下記化合物の混合物(左側化合物と右側化合物とのモル比が7:3の混合物)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
 重合性化合物2:下記化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
重合性化合物3:下記化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
重合性化合物4:下記化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
 光重合開始剤1:IRGACURE OXE01(BASF社製)
 光重合開始剤2:下記化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073
 界面活性剤:メガファックRS-72-K(DIC(株)製、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート30質量%溶液)
 凝集抑制剤1~7:下記構造の化合物(化合物1~4、6、7はTCI(株)製)。
 凝集抑制剤1:2-アミノベンズイミダゾール
 凝集抑制剤2:フルベンダゾール
 凝集抑制剤3:2-メチル-8-キノリノール
 凝集抑制剤4:ジエチルジチオカルバミン酸-2-ベンゾチアゾリル
 凝集抑制剤6:2,7-ジブロモ-9-ドデシルカルバゾール
 凝集抑制剤7:2,2-ビス(4-ヒドロキシ-3-メチルフェニル)プロパン
 凝集抑制剤5の重量平均分子量は110,000である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074
重合禁止剤:p-ヒドロキシフェノール
The raw materials described in the above table are as follows.
(Near-infrared absorbing compound)
pp-1, pp-2, pp-3, pp-4, pp-5, sq-1, cy-1: the following compounds. The following compounds have a solubility of 2 g or more in 100 g of cyclopentanone at 23 ° C., 100 g of cyclohexanone at 23 ° C., and 100 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate at 23 ° C.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
Resin 1: Cyclohexanone 30% by mass solution of a resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 41,400, glass transition temperature 53 ° C., the numerical value added to the repeating unit of the main chain is a molar ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
Resin 2: A cyclopentanone 30% by mass solution of a resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 41,400, glass transition temperature 53 ° C., the numerical value added to the repeating unit of the main chain is a molar ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
Resin 3: 40% by mass solution of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate in a resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 10,000, glass transition temperature 46 ° C., the numerical value added to the repeating unit of the main chain is a molar ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
Organic solvent 1: Cyclohexanone Organic solvent 2: Cyclopentanone Polymerizable compound 1: Mixture of the following compounds (Mix ratio of left compound to right compound is 7: 3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
Polymerizable compound 2: the following compound
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
Polymerizable compound 3: the following compound
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
Polymerizable compound 4: the following compound
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
Photopolymerization initiator 1: IRGACURE OXE01 (manufactured by BASF)
Photopolymerization initiator 2: the following compound
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073
Surfactant: Megafac RS-72-K (manufactured by DIC Corporation, 30% by mass solution of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate)
Aggregation inhibitors 1 to 7: Compounds having the following structures (compounds 1 to 4, 6, and 7 are manufactured by TCI).
Aggregation inhibitor 1: 2-aminobenzimidazole Aggregation inhibitor 2: Flubendazole Aggregation inhibitor 3: 2-Methyl-8-quinolinol Aggregation inhibitor 4: Diethyldithiocarbamate-2-benzothiazolyl Aggregation inhibitor 6: 2,7- Dibromo-9-dodecylcarbazole aggregation inhibitor 7: 2,2-bis (4-hydroxy-3-methylphenyl) propane Aggregation inhibitor 5 has a weight average molecular weight of 110,000.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074
Polymerization inhibitor: p-hydroxyphenol
<膜の製造>
 各組成物をガラス基材または8インチ(1インチ=2.54cm)シリコンウエハ上に、製膜後の膜厚が1.0μmとなるようにスピンコート塗布し、i線ステッパー露光装置FPA-3000i5+(Canon(株)製)を用い、1,000mJ/cmで全面露光した。次いで、ホットプレートを用いて、220℃で5分間加熱し、膜を製造した。
<Manufacture of membrane>
Each composition was spin-coated on a glass substrate or an 8-inch (1 inch = 2.54 cm) silicon wafer so that the film thickness after film formation was 1.0 μm, and an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5 + Using Canon (manufactured by Canon Inc.), the entire surface was exposed at 1,000 mJ / cm 2 . Subsequently, it heated at 220 degreeC for 5 minute (s) using the hotplate, and the film | membrane was manufactured.
<凝集サイズ(膜断面の穴空きサイズ)の評価>
 上記膜を製膜したシリコンウエハを、23℃のアセトン中に5分間浸漬した後に、超高分解能走査型電子顕微鏡((株)日立ハイテクノロジーズ製)を用い、加速電圧2.0kV、観測倍率50,000倍にて膜断面の観察を行い、任意の3か所の穴空き形状の長軸方向の長さを測定し、その平均値を、穴空きサイズとして算出した。
 なお、上述した近赤外線吸収化合物pp-1、pp-2、pp-3、pp-4、pp-5、sq-1、cy-1は、23℃のアセトンに溶解する化合物である。したがって、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集サイズが、膜中の穴あきサイズに相当し、穴空きサイズが小さいほど、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集サイズが小さいことを意味する。
<Evaluation of aggregate size (perforated size of membrane cross section)>
The silicon wafer on which the above film was formed was immersed in acetone at 23 ° C. for 5 minutes, and then using an ultra-high resolution scanning electron microscope (manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation), an acceleration voltage of 2.0 kV and an observation magnification of 50 The cross section of the film was observed at a magnification of 1,000, and the length in the major axis direction of any three perforated shapes was measured, and the average value was calculated as the perforated size.
The near-infrared absorbing compounds pp-1, pp-2, pp-3, pp-4, pp-5, sq-1, and cy-1 described above are compounds that are soluble in acetone at 23 ° C. Therefore, the agglomerated size of the near-infrared absorbing compound corresponds to the perforated size in the film, and the smaller the perforated size, the smaller the agglomerated size of the near-infrared absorbing compound.
<近赤外領域の光の遮蔽性(遮光性)の評価>
 上記の膜を製膜したガラス基材について、紫外可視近赤外分光光度計U-4100((株)日立ハイテクノロジーズ製)を用いて、波長400~1,300nmの範囲で透過率を測定した。波長700~1,000nmの範囲での透過率の極小値(T)について、下記基準で判断した。
 3:T<1%
 2:1%≦T<5%
 1:5%≦T
<Evaluation of light shielding property (light shielding property) in near infrared region>
With respect to the glass substrate on which the above film was formed, transmittance was measured in the wavelength range of 400 to 1,300 nm using an ultraviolet-visible near-infrared spectrophotometer U-4100 (manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation). . The minimum value (T) of transmittance in the wavelength range of 700 to 1,000 nm was determined according to the following criteria.
3: T <1%
2: 1% ≦ T <5%
1: 5% ≦ T
<耐光性の評価>
 上記の膜を製膜したガラス基材について、紫外可視近赤外分光光度計U-4100((株)日立ハイテクノロジーズ製)を用いて、波長400~1,300nmの範囲で透過率を測定した。
 次に、上記の膜を製膜したガラス基材を、キセノンランプを用い10万luxで20時間照射(200万lux・h相当)し、キセノンランプ照射後の膜の透過率を測定した。
 キセノンランプ照射前後での波長400~1,300nmの範囲での透過率変化(ΔT)を測定した。測定波長域全体で、透過率変化(ΔT)が最も大きい値に基づき、以下の基準で耐光性を評価した。ΔTの値が小さいほうが耐光性が良好である。
透過率変化(ΔT)=|キセノンランプ照射前の膜の透過率-キセノンランプ照射後の膜の透過率|
 3:ΔT<3%
 2:3≦ΔT<5%
 1:5≦ΔT%
<Evaluation of light resistance>
With respect to the glass substrate on which the above film was formed, transmittance was measured in the wavelength range of 400 to 1,300 nm using an ultraviolet-visible near-infrared spectrophotometer U-4100 (manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation). .
Next, the glass substrate on which the above film was formed was irradiated with a xenon lamp at 100,000 lux for 20 hours (equivalent to 2 million lux · h), and the transmittance of the film after irradiation with the xenon lamp was measured.
The transmittance change (ΔT) was measured in the wavelength range of 400 to 1,300 nm before and after irradiation with the xenon lamp. The light resistance was evaluated according to the following criteria based on the value with the largest transmittance change (ΔT) in the entire measurement wavelength range. The smaller the value of ΔT, the better the light resistance.
Transmittance change (ΔT) = | Transmittance of film before xenon lamp irradiation−Transmittance of film after xenon lamp irradiation |
3: ΔT <3%
2: 3 ≦ ΔT <5%
1: 5 ≦ ΔT%
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000075
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000075
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000076
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000076
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000077
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000077
 上記結果より、実施例の膜は、近赤外領域の光(近赤外線)の遮蔽性に優れ、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集サイズが小さかった。また、実施例の膜は耐光性も優れていた。
 一方、比較例の膜は、近赤外領域の光(近赤外線)の遮蔽性と、近赤外線吸収化合物の凝集抑制とを両立することができなかった。
From the above results, the films of the examples were excellent in the shielding property of light in the near infrared region (near infrared), and the aggregate size of the near infrared absorbing compound was small. Further, the films of the examples were excellent in light resistance.
On the other hand, the film of the comparative example could not achieve both the light shielding property in the near infrared region (near infrared) and the suppression of aggregation of the near infrared absorbing compound.
 実施例において、さらに可視光を遮光する色材を配合することで、分光変動性に優れた赤外線透過フィルタが得られる。 In Examples, an infrared transmission filter excellent in spectral variability can be obtained by further blending a colorant that blocks visible light.
 実施例において、本明細書に記載の酸化防止剤および/またはシランカップリング剤をさらに含んでも、実施例と同様の効果が得られる。 In the example, even when the antioxidant and / or silane coupling agent described in the present specification is further included, the same effect as in the example can be obtained.
110:固体撮像素子、111:近赤外線カットフィルタ、112:カラーフィルタ、114:赤外線透過フィルタ、115:マイクロレンズ、116:平坦化層 110: Solid-state imaging device, 111: Near-infrared cut filter, 112: Color filter, 114: Infrared transmission filter, 115: Micro lens, 116: Flattening layer

Claims (16)

  1.  単環または縮合環の芳香族環を含むπ共役平面を有し、波長650~1,000nmの範囲に吸収極大波長を有する近赤外線吸収化合物と、
     芳香族炭化水素環および複素環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を有し、波長650~1,000nmの範囲に吸収極大波長を有さない凝集抑制剤とを含む、組成物。
    A near-infrared absorbing compound having a π-conjugated plane containing a single ring or a condensed aromatic ring and having an absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm;
    A composition comprising an aggregation inhibitor having at least one ring selected from an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and a heterocyclic ring and having no absorption maximum wavelength in the wavelength range of 650 to 1,000 nm.
  2.  前記凝集抑制剤は、ベンゼン環、ベンゼン環を含む縮合環および含窒素複素環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を含む、請求項1に記載の組成物。 The composition according to claim 1, wherein the aggregation inhibitor includes at least one ring selected from a benzene ring, a condensed ring including a benzene ring, and a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring.
  3.  前記凝集抑制剤は、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、ピリジン環、キノリン環、イソキノリン環、イミダゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、ピラゾール環、チアゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、トリアゾール環、ベンゾトリアゾール環、オキサゾール環、ベンゾオキサゾール環、イミダゾリン環、ピラジン環、キノキサリン環、ピリミジン環、キナゾリン環、ピリダジン環、トリアジン環、ピロール環、インドール環、イソインドール環、フルオレン環およびカルバゾール環から選ばれる少なくとも1種の環を含む、請求項1または2に記載の組成物。 The aggregation inhibitor is benzene ring, naphthalene ring, pyridine ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, imidazole ring, benzimidazole ring, pyrazole ring, thiazole ring, benzothiazole ring, triazole ring, benzotriazole ring, oxazole ring, benzoxazole. Including at least one ring selected from a ring, an imidazoline ring, a pyrazine ring, a quinoxaline ring, a pyrimidine ring, a quinazoline ring, a pyridazine ring, a triazine ring, a pyrrole ring, an indole ring, an isoindole ring, a fluorene ring, and a carbazole ring. Item 3. The composition according to Item 1 or 2.
  4.  前記近赤外線吸収化合物が有するπ共役平面は、単環または縮合環の芳香族環を2個以上含む、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the π-conjugated plane of the near-infrared absorbing compound contains two or more monocyclic or condensed aromatic rings.
  5.  前記近赤外線吸収化合物が、ピロロピロール化合物、シアニン化合物およびスクアリリウム化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種である、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the near-infrared absorbing compound is at least one selected from a pyrrolopyrrole compound, a cyanine compound, and a squarylium compound.
  6.  さらに、樹脂を含む、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further comprising a resin.
  7.  さらに、重合性化合物および光重合開始剤を含む、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, further comprising a polymerizable compound and a photopolymerization initiator.
  8.  さらに、近赤外領域の光の少なくとも一部を透過し、かつ、可視領域の光を遮光する色材を含む、請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7, further comprising a colorant that transmits at least part of light in the near infrared region and shields light in the visible region.
  9.  請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の組成物を用いた、膜。 A film using the composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8.
  10.  請求項9に記載の膜を有する、光学フィルタ。 An optical filter having the film according to claim 9.
  11.  前記光学フィルタが、近赤外線カットフィルタまたは赤外線透過フィルタである、請求項10に記載の光学フィルタ。 The optical filter according to claim 10, wherein the optical filter is a near-infrared cut filter or an infrared transmission filter.
  12.  請求項9に記載の膜の画素と、
     赤、緑、青、マゼンタ、黄、シアン、黒および無色から選ばれる少なくとも1種の画素とを有する、請求項10または11に記載の光学フィルタ。
    A film pixel according to claim 9;
    The optical filter according to claim 10 or 11, comprising at least one pixel selected from red, green, blue, magenta, yellow, cyan, black, and colorless.
  13.  請求項9に記載の膜と、有彩色着色剤を含むカラーフィルタとを有する、積層体。 A laminate comprising the film according to claim 9 and a color filter containing a chromatic colorant.
  14.  請求項9に記載の膜を有する、固体撮像素子。 A solid-state imaging device having the film according to claim 9.
  15.  請求項9に記載の膜を有する、画像表示装置。 An image display device having the film according to claim 9.
  16.  請求項9に記載の膜を有する、赤外線センサ。 An infrared sensor having the film according to claim 9.
PCT/JP2017/012275 2016-03-30 2017-03-27 Composition, film, optical filter, laminate, solid-state imaging element, image display device and infrared sensor WO2017170339A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018509312A JP6705891B2 (en) 2016-03-30 2017-03-27 Composition, film, optical filter, laminate, solid-state image sensor, image display device and infrared sensor

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016067796 2016-03-30
JP2016-067796 2016-03-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017170339A1 true WO2017170339A1 (en) 2017-10-05

Family

ID=59964486

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2017/012275 WO2017170339A1 (en) 2016-03-30 2017-03-27 Composition, film, optical filter, laminate, solid-state imaging element, image display device and infrared sensor

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6705891B2 (en)
TW (1) TW201807149A (en)
WO (1) WO2017170339A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019150908A1 (en) * 2018-02-01 2019-08-08 富士フイルム株式会社 Curable composition, near-infrared absorbing agent, film, near-infrared cut filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and infrared sensor
JP2020019207A (en) * 2018-07-31 2020-02-06 株式会社日本触媒 Laminate and optical article
WO2020036037A1 (en) * 2018-08-15 2020-02-20 富士フイルム株式会社 Composition, film, optical filter, layered body, solid-state imaging element, image display device and infrared sensor

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006006731A1 (en) * 2004-07-15 2006-01-19 Teijin Chemicals Ltd. Resin composition and molded object thereof
JP2009263614A (en) * 2008-03-30 2009-11-12 Fujifilm Corp Infrared absorptive compound and fine particles comprising the compound
JP2011208101A (en) * 2010-03-30 2011-10-20 Fujifilm Corp Squarylium compound, method for producing the same, and infrared absorber
JP2015072440A (en) * 2013-09-09 2015-04-16 富士フイルム株式会社 Coloring compositions, photosensitive coloring compositions, color filters and manufacturing methods thereof, solid-state image sensors, image display devices, monomers, and polymers
JP2015172004A (en) * 2014-03-11 2015-10-01 Jsr株式会社 Novel cyanine compound, optical filter and device using optical filter
JP2015172102A (en) * 2014-03-11 2015-10-01 Jsr株式会社 Novel cyanine compound, optical filter and device using optical filter
WO2015166779A1 (en) * 2014-05-01 2015-11-05 富士フイルム株式会社 Coloring composition, film, color filter, method for forming pattern, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and infrared sensor
JP2015203863A (en) * 2014-04-16 2015-11-16 ソニー株式会社 Image pickup element and imaging device

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006006731A1 (en) * 2004-07-15 2006-01-19 Teijin Chemicals Ltd. Resin composition and molded object thereof
JP2009263614A (en) * 2008-03-30 2009-11-12 Fujifilm Corp Infrared absorptive compound and fine particles comprising the compound
JP2011208101A (en) * 2010-03-30 2011-10-20 Fujifilm Corp Squarylium compound, method for producing the same, and infrared absorber
JP2015072440A (en) * 2013-09-09 2015-04-16 富士フイルム株式会社 Coloring compositions, photosensitive coloring compositions, color filters and manufacturing methods thereof, solid-state image sensors, image display devices, monomers, and polymers
JP2015172004A (en) * 2014-03-11 2015-10-01 Jsr株式会社 Novel cyanine compound, optical filter and device using optical filter
JP2015172102A (en) * 2014-03-11 2015-10-01 Jsr株式会社 Novel cyanine compound, optical filter and device using optical filter
JP2015203863A (en) * 2014-04-16 2015-11-16 ソニー株式会社 Image pickup element and imaging device
WO2015166779A1 (en) * 2014-05-01 2015-11-05 富士フイルム株式会社 Coloring composition, film, color filter, method for forming pattern, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and infrared sensor

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019150908A1 (en) * 2018-02-01 2019-08-08 富士フイルム株式会社 Curable composition, near-infrared absorbing agent, film, near-infrared cut filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and infrared sensor
JPWO2019150908A1 (en) * 2018-02-01 2021-02-04 富士フイルム株式会社 Curable composition, near-infrared absorber, film, near-infrared cut filter, solid-state image sensor, image display device and infrared sensor
US11886112B2 (en) 2018-02-01 2024-01-30 Fujifilm Corporation Curable composition, near infrared absorber, film, near infrared cut filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and infrared sensor
JP2020019207A (en) * 2018-07-31 2020-02-06 株式会社日本触媒 Laminate and optical article
JP7061045B2 (en) 2018-07-31 2022-04-27 株式会社日本触媒 Laminates and optics
WO2020036037A1 (en) * 2018-08-15 2020-02-20 富士フイルム株式会社 Composition, film, optical filter, layered body, solid-state imaging element, image display device and infrared sensor
JPWO2020036037A1 (en) * 2018-08-15 2021-08-10 富士フイルム株式会社 Compositions, films, optical filters, laminates, solid-state image sensors, image display devices and infrared sensors
JP7011722B2 (en) 2018-08-15 2022-02-10 富士フイルム株式会社 Compositions, films, optical filters, laminates, solid-state image sensors, image displays and infrared sensors

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP6705891B2 (en) 2020-06-03
JPWO2017170339A1 (en) 2019-02-14
TW201807149A (en) 2018-03-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6833728B2 (en) Composition, film, near-infrared cut filter, laminate, pattern forming method, solid-state image sensor, image display device, infrared sensor and color filter
WO2018043185A1 (en) Composition, film, near-infrared blocking filter, pattern forming method, laminate, solid-state imaging element, image display device, camera module and infrared sensor
KR102247284B1 (en) Photosensitive composition, cured film, optical filter, laminate, pattern formation method, solid-state image sensor, image display device, and infrared sensor
JP6612965B2 (en) Composition, curable composition, cured film, near-infrared cut filter, infrared transmission filter, solid-state imaging device, infrared sensor, and camera module
JP6734377B2 (en) Composition, film, optical filter, laminate, solid-state imaging device, image display device, infrared sensor and compound
CN108603959B (en) Film, method for producing film, optical filter, laminate, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and infrared sensor
JP6745329B2 (en) Radiation-sensitive composition, optical filter, laminate, pattern forming method, solid-state image sensor, image display device and infrared sensor
WO2017104283A1 (en) Near-infrared absorbent composition, membrane, infrared cut filter, solid-state imaging element, infrared absorbent, and compound
JP6849314B2 (en) Compositions, films, optical filters, laminates, solid-state image sensors, image display devices and infrared sensors
TWI740063B (en) Colored composition, cured film, pattern forming method, color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
KR102259624B1 (en) Composition, film, optical filter, pattern forming method, solid-state image sensor, image display device and infrared sensor
JP2018045011A (en) Infrared absorbent, composition, film, optical filter, laminate, solid state imaging device, image display apparatus, and infrared sensor
WO2018047584A1 (en) Composition, method for manufacturing film, method for manufacturing near-infrared cut filter, method for manufacturing solid-state imaging element, method for manufacturing image display device, and method for manufacturing infrared sensor
WO2018101189A1 (en) Pigment-dispersed liquid, curable composition, film, near-infrared ray cut-off filter, solid-state image pickup element, image display device, and infrared ray sensor
WO2017145637A1 (en) Curable composition, cured film, optical filter, laminate body, solid-state imaging element, image display device and infrared sensor
WO2018163702A1 (en) Laminate, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and infrared sensor and kit
WO2018139534A1 (en) Composition, film, infrared-transmitting filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and infrared sensor
WO2018016232A1 (en) Composition, film, laminate, infrared light transmitting filter, solid-state imaging element and infrared sensor
JP6705891B2 (en) Composition, film, optical filter, laminate, solid-state image sensor, image display device and infrared sensor
WO2018163986A1 (en) Filter, light sensor, solid-state imaging element and image display device
WO2018056127A1 (en) Near-infrared absorbing organic pigment, pigment dispersion, curable composition, film, near-infrared cut filter, laminate, solid state imaging element, image display device, and infrared sensor
KR102219144B1 (en) Composition, film, near-infrared cut filter, solid-state image sensor, image display device, and infrared sensor
WO2019049635A1 (en) Near infrared ray-absorbable organic pigment, resin composition, method for producing near infrared ray-absorbable organic pigment, method for adjusting spectrum of near infrared ray-absorbable organic pigment, film, laminate, near infrared ray cut filter, near infrared ray transmission filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and infrared ray sensor
JPWO2019077912A1 (en) Coloring composition, film manufacturing method, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state image sensor manufacturing method, and image display device manufacturing method
JPWO2019077913A1 (en) Coloring compositions, films, color filters, solid-state image sensors and image display devices

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2018509312

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17774876

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17774876

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1